Technical Publications: Revision 2

Technical
Publications
2381096–100
Revision 2
Advantage Workstation 4.2

sm
Service Manual
do not duplicate
CopyrightE 2003–2004 by General Electric Co.

GE Medical Systems Advantage Workstation 4.2
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

CONVENTIONS FOR THIS MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
CHAPTER 1 – INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
2 INSTALLATION GUIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
2-1 Required Hardware Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
2-1-1 HP XW8000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
2-1-2 HP X4000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
2-1-3 Common items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
2-1-4 Ethernet connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
2-2 Required Software Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
2-3 Further Assumptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
2-4 Installation / re–installation flowcharts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
3 NEW SYSTEM INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
4 ADD NEW SCSI OPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
5 ADD NEW SOFTWARE OPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
6 AW SOFTWARE RE–INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
7 LOAD FROM COLD: O.S. AND AW SOFTWARE RE–INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . 30
8 DEMO EXAMS INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
9 SECOND MONITOR UPGRADE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
10 PX PATCH (RE)INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
11 INSTALLATION JOB CARDS LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
JOB CARD IST 001 – HARDWARE INSTALLATION AND CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . 33
JOB CARD IST 002 – SITE CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
JOB CARD IST 003 – EXTERNAL SCSI DEVICE OPTION CONNECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
JOB CARD IST 004 – EXTERNAL SCSI DEVICE OPTION LOGICAL INSTALLATION . . . 57
JOB CARD IST 005 – SOFTWARE OPTIONS INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
JOB CARD IST 006 – POSTSCRIPT AND DICOM PRINTERS INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . 69
JOB CARD IST 007 – NETWORK CONFIGURATION ON IMAGE SOURCES . . . . . . . . . . . 77
JOB CARD IST 008 – INSITE INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
JOB CARD IST 009 – TURNOVER TO THE CUSTOMER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
JOB CARD IST 010 – AW APPLICATION SOFTWARE RELOAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
JOB CARD IST 011 – LOAD FROM COLD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
JOB CARD IST 012 – ADVANTAGE WORKSTATION DEMO EXAMS REINSTALLATION . 145
CHAPTER 2 – UPGRADES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
1 OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
2 TOOLS REQUIRED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
3
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
3 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

4 PREREQUISITES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
5 UPGRADE PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
6 OLD SYSTEM, IMAGE FILES DELETION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
7 OLD HARDWARE RETURN PROCESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
7-1 Return Procedure for Americas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
7-2 Return Procedure for ASIA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
7-3 Return Procedure for Europe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
8 RESTORE CAPABILITY PROCEDURE FOR AW3.1/AW4.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
8-1 AWrestore scripts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
8-2 Restore capability matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
9 RESTORE CAPABILITY PROCEDURE FOR AW4.1 / AW4.1P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
CHAPTER 3 – COMMON PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
1 OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
2 COMMON PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
2-1 Basic LINUX Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
2-1-1 Boot Advantage Workstation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
2-1-2 Login as sdc on Advantage Workstation (windowing system not running) . . . . . . . 155
2-1-3 Find out what ‘true’ user you currently are . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
2-1-4 Become sdc user after successful login as another user . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
2-1-5 Become root user after successful login as another user (locally or remote) . . . . . 156
2-1-6 Shutdown System –– from Login Prompt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
2-1-7 Logout Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
2-1-8 Login as root on Advantage Workstation (windowing system not running) . . . . . . . 156
2-1-9 Remote Login to Advantage Workstation from a Remote Station (General Case) 157
2-1-10 Remote Login as root on Advantage Workstation (from a Remote Station) . . . . . . 157
2-1-11 Remote Login as sdc on Advantage Workstation (from a Remote Station) . . . . . . 157
2-1-12 Find the Internet, Ethernet, and Broadcast Address, Netmask Value and ... . . . . . 157
2-1-13 Shutdown and Reboot Advantage Workstation Locally or Remotely ... . . . . . . . . . . 158
2-1-14 Shutdown and Reboot Advantage Workstation Locally (i.e. no input from ... . . . . . 158
2-1-15 Shutdown and Reboot Advantage Workstation Locally –– Workstation “Hard .... . 158
2-1-16 Changing the ”USER” Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
2-1-17 Line Commands for Controlling Printer (Filming) Queues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
2-1-18 Changing the Host Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
2-1-19 Host Identification (license ID) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
2-1-20 Using the ”man” Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
2-1-21 Routing Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
2-1-22 Netmasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
2-1-23 Reconfiguring the Advantage Workstation (Removing all Current Hostname, ... . 161
4
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
2-1-24 Changing the Internet Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

2-1-25 File Systems Checks –– Windowing System not Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
2-1-26 Check for SCSI Devices Recognized by the Workstation during the Boot ... . . . . 162
2-2 Restart Advantage Workstation Application from the Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
2-2-1 Advantage Workstation OK, no one logged in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
2-2-2 Advantage Workstation OK, sdc logged in BUT application is not running . . . . . . . 162
2-2-3 Advantage Workstation OK, someone else logged in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
2-3 Shutdown Advantage Workstation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
2-3-1 Windowing system not running –– login prompt displayed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
2-3-2 Advantage Workstation running –– Normal Shutdown (including computer ... . . . 162
2-3-3 Advantage Workstation running –– Stop application only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
2-3-4 Advantage Workstation not running and Windowing system running . . . . . . . . . . . 163
2-3-5 AW not running and windowing system running ––– Kill Application locally . . . . . . 163
2-3-6 AW application up, down or blocked and Windowing system blocked . . . . . . . . . . 163
2-4 Advantage Workstation and Site Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
2-4-1 Displaying or saving Advantage Workstation Site Configuration Information . . . . . 164
2-4-2 Copy text files in DOS format onto a diskette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
2-4-3 Changing Advantage Workstation Site Configuration Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
2-4-4 Creating a KICKSTART diskette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
2-4-5 Reading Configuration Diskette Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
2-5 ADOBE ACROBAT Reader Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
2-6 ADVANTAGE WOKSTATION Database Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
2-6-1 Recover Database from the Root Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
2-7 Using the SMPTE Pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
2-7-1 Displaying the SMPTE pattern. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
2-7-2 Console Monitor Adjustment Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
2-7-3 Create and Display a Coloured SMPTE Pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
3 ON–LINE DOCUMENTATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
3-1 Access to the Operator’s documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
3-2 Access to Service documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
CHAPTER 4 – TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
1 FOREWORD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
2 TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE HP X4000 & XW8000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
3 TROUBLESHOOTING JOB CARDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
JOB CARD TSG 001 – INITIALIZATION PHASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
JOB CARD TSG 002 – APPLICATION IS RUNNING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
JOB CARD TSG 003 – FILES SYSTEM CHECKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
JOB CARD TSG 004 – REFORMATTING AND/OR REPARTITIONING DISKS . . . . . . . . . . 189
JOB CARD TSG 005 – USING HP DIAGNOSTICS TOOL CDROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
JOB CARD TSG 006 – TROUBLESHOOTING PHYSICAL NETWORK PROBLEMS . . . . . 203
5
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
JOB CARD TSG 007 – HOOKING UP LAPTOP AS A TERMINAL FOR DIAGNOSTICS . . 205
JOB CARD TSG 008 – CREATE A KICKSTART DISKETTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
JOB CARD TSG 009 – LOGFILES INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
JOB CARD TSG 010 – RUNNING PROCESSES INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
JOB CARD TSG 011 – SERVICE MENU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
JOB CARD TSG 012 – CREATE A FLASH DISKETTE FOR BIOS AND FIRMWARE . . . . . 231
JOB CARD TSG 013 – X4000 SYMBIOS CHANGES TO AVOID BOOT HANG UP . . . . . . 235
CHAPTER 5 – DISASSEMBLY / REASSEMBLY PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
1 OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
2 TOOLS REQUIRED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
3 PREREQUISITES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
4 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
5 PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
5-1 CPU box swap. Do not leave on site the following items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
5-2 CPU box swap. Fill up the new CE rating plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
5-3 Fill up the new ICD card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
5-4 Send back the defective unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
CHAPTER 6 – RENEWAL PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
CHAPTER 7 – FILMING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
1 INTERCONNECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
2 TROUBLE SHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
2-1 Laser Imager Error Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
2-2 Error and Status Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
3 CHECKS AND UTILITIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
3-1 Communication Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
3-2 Utility Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
3-3 Accessing and using the log file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
3-4 Changing the Print AET of your AW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
3-5 Older DICOM Printers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
CHAPTER 8 – OPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
1 DICOM OPTICAL DISK DRIVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
1-1 Physical Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
1-2 Maxoptix MOD Drive Physical Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
1-3 Sony SMO–S551–SD MOD Drive Physical Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
1-4 Dicom MOD Software Declaration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
1-5 De–installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
6
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
1-6 Running MOD Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258

2 ADD SECOND MONITOR OPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
2-1 Add 2nd Flat Panel or CRT Color Landscape (1L1 >>> 2L1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
2-2 Removing the 2nd Monitor from an Installed System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
3 2GB MEMORY ADD–ON OPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
3-1 X4000 Workstation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
3-2 XW8000 Workstation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
4 VOLUME VIEWER APPLICATIONS PACKAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
5 FUNCTIONAL ANALYSIS APPLICATIONS PACKAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
6 FUSION APPLICATIONS SOFTWARE PACKAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
7 X–RAY APPLICATIONS SOFTWARE PACKAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
8 SMARTSCORE OPTION SOFTWARE PACKAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
9 DENTASCAN OPTION SOFTWARE PACKAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
10 NON EMBEDDED OPTION SOFTWARE PACKAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
11 INSITE OPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
12 COLOR PRINTER OPTION (CODONICS NP–1600 M OR MD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
12-2 Printer Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
12-3 Testing the Network Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
12-4 Check Printer Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
12-5 Test Printer Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
12-6 Load Paper Cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
12-7 Service Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
13 GREYSCALE PRINTER OPTION (LEXMARK OPTRA S1650) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
13-2 Printer Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
13-3 De–Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
CHAPTER 9 – NETWORKING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
1 SAMPLE NETWORK CONFIGURATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
1-1 Basic Intra–Suite Network: MR SIGNA ADVANTAGE, MR HORIZON . . . . . . . . . . . 279
1-2 Basic Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
1-3 Basic Intra–Suite Network: CT–HLA, CT–HSA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
1-4 Basic Network: CT SYTEC, PACE, PROSPEED – MR VECTRA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
1-5 Basic Network: DRS, DLX (without Digital Gateway) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
1-6 Basic Workstations Network with no Router DLX with a Fast Ethernet Gateway . . 281
7
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
1-7 Workstations Subnetworks with one Router DLX with a Digital Gateway and ... . . . 282
1-8 Advantage Workstation within the MR SUITE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
1-9 Advantage Workstation within the CT SUITE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
1-10 Advantage Workstation on the LOCAL BACKBONE (Gateway in CT Operator ... . 284
1-11 Advantage Workstation within the MR, CT and LOCAL SUITE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
1-12 MIXED Sources Configuration Sample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
2 AW LINUX HOST DECLARATION ON IMAGE SOURCES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
2-1 AW4.2 Declaration on UNIX (SUN or Silicon Graphics) Based Source . . . . . . . . . . . 287
2-2 AW4.2 Declaration on GENESIS Based Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
2-3 AW4.2 Declaration on non Genesis Based Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
2-4 AW4.2 Host Declaration on CT9800 Image Sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
2-5 AW4.2 Host Declaration on Dicom Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
2-6 AW4.2 Declaration on DRS / DLX Sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
2-7 AW4.2 Declaration on YMS Sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
3 NETWORKING OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
3-1 General Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
3-2 Routing Table Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
3-2-1 Adding a default router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
3-2-2 Checking the routing table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
3-3 Emergency procedure: Forcing the network speed and mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
3-3-1 Case 1: No route information curently exists: Create S93route script. . . . . . . . . . . 295
3-3-2 Case 2: Route information curently exists: Update S93route script. . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
3-4 More information on subnetworks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
3-5 Netmasks Declaration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
CHAPTER 10 – PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
1 TO BE DONE ONCE A YEAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
2 TO BE DONE DURING THE IMAGE SOURCE MAINTENANCE OR AS ... . . . . . . 300
3 TO BE DONE EVERY 5 YEARS: SYSTEM BATTERY REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . 302
APPENDIX A – GLOSSARY & LINUX COMMAND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
1 GLOSSARY (THIS GLOSSARY CONTAINS A LIST OF LINUX TERMS ... 309
2 LINUX COMMAND SUMMARY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
REVISION HISTORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
8
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
WARNING
DO NOT ATTEMPT TO SERVICE THE EQUIPMENT UNLESS

THIS SERVICE MANUAL HAS BEEN CONSULTED AND IS UNDERSTOOD
This Service Manual is available in English only.
If a customer’s service provider requires a language other than English, it is the customer’s
responsibility to provide translation services.
Failure to heed this warning may result in injury to the service provider, operator or patient from
electric shock, mechanical or other hazards.
ATTENTION
NE PAS TENTER D’INTERVENIR SUR LES ÉQUIPEMENTS

TANT QUE LE MANUEL DE SERVICE N’A PAS ÉTÉ CONSULTÉ ET COMPRIS
Ce Manuel de Service n’est disponible qu’en anglais.
Si le technicien du client a besoin de ce manuel dans une autre langue que l’anglais, c’est au client
qu’il incombe de le faire traduire.
Le non-respect de cet avertissement peut entraîner chez le technicien, l’opérateur ou le patient des
blessures dues à des dangers électriques, mécaniques ou autres.
ATENCION
NO SE DEBERÁ DAR SERVICIO TÉCNICO AL EQUIPO,

SIN HABER CONSULTADO Y COMPRENDIDO ESTE MANUAL DE SERVICIO.
Este Manual de Servicio sólo existe en inglés.
Si algún proveedor de servicios ajeno a General Electric Medical Systems solicita un idioma que no
sea el inglés, es responsabilidad del cliente ofrecer un servicio de traducción.
La no observancia del presente aviso puede dar lugar a que el proveedor de servicios, el operador o
el paciente sufran lesiones provocadas por causas eléctricas, mecánicas o de otra naturaleza.
WARNUNG
ERSUCHEN SIE NICHT DIESE ANLAGE ZU WARTEN,

OHNE DIESE SERVICEANLEITUNG GELESEN UND VERSTANDEN ZU HABEN.
Diese Serviceanleitung existiert nur in englischer Sprache.
Falls ein fremder Kundendienst eine andere Sprache benötigt, ist es Aufgabe des Kunden für eine
entsprechende Übersetzung zu sorgen.
Wird diese Warnung nicht beachtet, so kann es zu Verletzungen des Kundendiensttechnikers, des
Bedieners oder des Patienten durch Stromschläge, mechanische oder sonstige Gefahren kommen.
9
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
ATENÇAO
NÃO TENTE REPARAR O EQUIPAMENTO SEM TER CONSULTADO E
COMPREENDIDO ESTE MANUAL DE ASSISTÊNCIA TÉCNICA
Este Manual de Assistência Técnica só se encontra disponível em Inglês.
Se qualquer outro serviço de assistência técnica, que não a General Electric Medical Systems,
solicitar estes manuais noutro idioma, é da responsabilidade do cliente fornecer os serviços de
tradução.
O não cumprimento deste aviso pode por em perigo a segurança do técnico, operador ou paciente
devido a‘ choques elétricos, mecânicos ou outros.
AVVERTENZA
SI PROCEDA ALLA MANUTENZIONE DELL’APPARECCHIATURA SOLO DOPO AVER
CONSULTATO IL PRESENTE MANUALE ED AVERNE COMPRESO IL CONTENUTO
Il presente manuale di manutenzione è disponibile soltanto in inglese.
Se un addetto alla manutenzione esterno alla General Electric Medical Systems richiede il manuale in
una lingua diversa, il cliente è tenuto a provvedere direttamente alla traduzione.
Non tenere conto della presente avvertenza potrebbe far compiere operazioni da cui derivino lesioni
all’addetto alla manutenzione, all’utilizzatore ed al paziente per folgorazione elettrica, per urti
meccanici od altri rischi.
10
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
THIS MANUAL TO BE USED ONLY FOR AW4.2 RUNNING ON THE

WARNING
HP XW8000 AND HP X4000 WORKSTATION.
Chapter 1: Installation
Refer first to the Flowcharts to find out which Job Card(s) you need to follow, depending on the task you want to
perform. Then follow step by step the instructions given in the mentionned Job Card(s), in order to either install a
new system and its optional devices or advanced applications, or to re–install it after a system crash or software
upgrade.
Each time additional information is necessary in order to set–up an optional device, you will be warned to get it
from Chapter 8 at the corresponding Section or paragraph.
Chapter 2: Upgrades
This chapter gives information about the various proposed upgrades.
Chapter 3: Common Procedures

This chapter gives information about the various LINUX commands necessary for System Administration.
Chapter 4: Troubleshooting
This chapter gives troubleshooting information and tips to ease diagnostics of hardware and software.
Chapter 5: Disassembly/reassembly
This chapter is a link to the hardware manufacturer(s) Service manuals. It summarizes the
disassembly/reassembly procedures and gives a reference to the appropriate manual.
Chapter 6: Renewal Parts

Find there the necessary part number for the Field Replaceable Unit, you need to order.
Chapter 7: Filming
This chapter gives information about connection to the various validated Laser Cameras.
Chapter 8: Options
This chapter gives additional information about the optional devices and softwares. You will get to refer to it when
needing first to setup a device (dip switch for example) before being able to connect and declare it to the
workstation.
Chapter 9: Networking
This chapter gives additional information about networking, such as subnetworks and routers.
Chapter 10: Preventive Maintenance

This chapter gives the preventive maintenance procedures, as well as the check lists.
Appendix A: Glossary and LINUX commands

Glossary of terms used in this manual, and summary of the most usual LINUX commands.
11
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
CONVENTIONS FOR THIS MANUAL
Text and Messages in a Command Window are shown using the Courier font :
e.g : Do you want to continue [y,n,?,??,q]
Responses or commands to be typed in by the FE appear in bold characters:

e.g : ./install.aw
The Return or Enter hardkey is shown in bold characters and between brackets:
e.g : [Return] or <ENTER> or [Enter]
Keyboard hardkeys are shown in bold characters and between brackets :

e.g : <Alt> <F3>
Pull down menu selections, to be selected by the FE appear in bold characters

e.g:
Root Menu
Refresh Screen
Display Configuration
Command Window
Save Configuration
Recover Database
Service Tools
AW Administration Install package
Restart AW Service Tools
Exit AW
Note: Triangles do NOT indicate an individual selection only, but rather a menu of sub–menu
selections.
12
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
CHAPTER 1 – INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION
ADVANTAGE WORKSTATION CONFIGURATION FORM
Complete this form at the end of installation or when requested (you will then be instructed how to
proceed).
Leave it attached to the site’s Service Manual. Upgrade it for each new option or software release.
MACHINE TYPE: ............................................

SERIAL NUMBER: ............................................
LICENSE ID: (use command licenseId) ............................................
INTERNET ADDRESS: ............................................
NETMASK: ............................................
ROOT PASSWORD: ............................................
SDC PASSWORD: ............................................
HOSPITAL NAME: ............................................
USER’S INTERFACE LANGUAGE : ............................................
APPLICATION SUPPORT TELEPHONE : ............................................
MISCELLANEOUS: ............................................
SOFTWARE INITIAL VERSION: AW4.2_ . . . . . . . . . . . .
SOFTWARE UPGRADE VERSION: ............................................
AW SOFTWARE LICENSE KEY: ............................................
VOLUME VIEWER LICENSE KEY: ............................................
VOLUME RENDERING LICENSE KEY: ............................................
ADVANCED VESSEL ANALYSIS ............................................
ADVANCED LUNG ANALYSIS ............................................
CT COLONOGRAPHY LICENSE KEY: ............................................
NAVIGATOR LICENSE KEY: ............................................
AUTOBONE LICENSE KEY: ............................................
DENTASCANPLUS LICENSE KEY: ............................................
DENTASCAN LICENSE KEY: ............................................
CT PERFUSION 2 LICENSE KEY: ............................................
CT PERFUSION 3 MULTI–ORGAN ............................................
CT PERFUSION 3 BODY LICENSE KEY: ............................................
CT PERFUSION 3 NEURO LICENSE KEY: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FUNCTOOL PERFORMANCE. ............................................
FUNCTOOL SPECTROSCOPY. ............................................
FUNCTOOL DIFFUSION TENSOR. ............................................
13
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
SMARTSCORE LICENSE KEY: ............................................

INSTALLATION
BMD LICENSE KEY: ............................................

CARDIQ FUNCTION LICENSE KEY: ............................................
ADVANTAGE SIM LICENSE. KEY: ............................................
PREMIUM VIEW LICENSE. KEY: ............................................
CAD–X LICENSE. KEY: ............................................
CAD–R2 LICENSE. KEY: ............................................
.................................LICENSE KEY: ............................................
.................................LICENSE KEY: ............................................
.................................LICENSE KEY: ............................................
NETWORK HOST #1 :
Hostname: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IP address: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Protocol: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Port Number: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A.E. Title: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Comments: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NETWORK HOST#2
NETWORK HOST #3
NETWORK HOST #4
NETWORK HOST #5
NETWORK HOST #6
14
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
NETWORK HOST #7
INSTALLATION
NETWORK HOST #8
NETWORK HOST #9
NETWORK or DICOM PRINTER #1 :
NETWORK or DICOM PRINTER #2
NETWORK or DICOM PRINTER #3
ROUTING TABLE: on /etc/rc5.d/S93route
route add default: ............................................
route add net: ............................................
route add net: ............................................
route add host: ............................................
route add host: ............................................
15
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
INSTALLATION
1 INTRODUCTION
This chapter outlines the procedures to follow, in order to successfuly complete 6 main different
operations. The overall flow of the five operations (see brief explanation below) is in the flowchart on
pg. 23. Each operation is then explained in detail in the following flowcharts:
D Section 3 New System Installation.
D Section 6 Advantage Workstation software (re)installation.
D Section 7 Load From Cold: O.S. and AW Software (re)installation.
D Section 8 Demo Exams installation.
D Section 9 Add second Monitor option.
D Section 10 Px Patch Cdrom (re)installation.
So your entrance points into this chapter will be as follows:
D NEW SYSTEM INSTALLATION: You have a new system to install for the first time:
– refer to the conditions described in the AW4.2 Pre–Installation Manual, (PIM 2381098–100).
– refer to flowchart section 3.
D LOAD FROM WARM (AW RE–INSTALL): You have a workstation running release 4.2 of
Advantage Workstation software and you want to fully reload the release 4.2 software but not the
Operating System):
D ADD NEW HW OR SW OPTION: You have a new option (hardware or software) to add for the first
time to an existing system running release 4.1 of Advantage Workstation software:
– refer to flowchart section 4 and section 5. Also refer to Chapter 8.
D LOAD FROM COLD (O.S. + Application software RE–INSTALL): You have an Advantage
Workstation and you want to fully reload the software of the workstation:
D DEMO EXAMS INSTALLATION: You have an operational Advantage Workstation and you just
want to load the demo exams:
D SECOND MONITOR UPGRADE OPTION: You have a second monitor to add to an existing 1
screen system running release 4.2 of Advantage Workstation software:
– refer to Chapter 8.
Note: This step is not to be done for a new system delivered with 2 monitors.
D Px PATCH CDROM (RE)INSTALLATION: You have a Px Patch Cdrom to (re)install (where ’x’ is
the number describing the revision of patch e.g.: P1 , P2, Pn).
16
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
2 INSTALLATION GUIDE
INSTALLATION
Illustration 1 – Advantage Workstation HP XW8000 Basic Overview

Illustration 2 – Advantage Workstation HP X4000 Basic Overview

ADVANTAGE WORKSTATION HAS UNSHIELDED MONITORS. PLACING THE

WARNING
CARTONS CONTAINING THE MONITORS OR THE UNPACKED WORKSTATION
NEAR THE MR MAGNET (INSIDE THE 1.3 GAUSS LINE) WILL PERMANENTLY
DAMAGE THE MONITORS AND POTENTIALLY VOID THE WARRANTY.
17
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
2-1 Required Hardware Environment

INSTALLATION
2-1-1 HP XW8000
See Illustration 1.
ADVANTAGE WORKSTATION 4.2 performs on:
HP XW8000 Workstation hardware comprising:
D 2 x 3.06GHz CPU modules on Mother board.
D RAM 2048 MB (4 x 512 MB modules).
D Two internal SCSI 73 GByte disks 15000 rpm for System and Images files.
D One 3 1/2” floppy disk drive.
D One Internal CD–R writer drive.
D Power cables, connectors, internal speaker, keyboard, mouse and pad.
D One NVIDIA Q4 200NVS Graphic board.
D One additional Intel Pro 1000XT Ethernet board.
D One VGA double output Y Adapter cable (connect Master monitor to connector labelled 1).
CONNECTION TO NEC MONITORS: EXCLUSIVELY USE THE VGA/VGA CABLE

WARNING
DELIVERED WITH THE STATION. DO NOT USE THE DVI/VGA OR DVI/DVI
CABLES DELIVERED WITH THE NEC MONITORS.
2-1-2 HP X4000
See Illustration 2.
ADVANTAGE WORKSTATION 4.2 can also perform on AW4.1 hardware:
HP X4000 Workstation hardware comprising:
D 2 x 2.2GHz CPU modules on Mother board.
D RAM 2048 MB (4 x 512 MB modules).
D Two internal SCSI 36 GByte disks 15000 rpm for System and Images files.
D One 3 1/2” floppy disk drive.
D One Internal CD–R writer drive.
D Power cables, connectors, internal speaker, keyboard, mouse and pad.
D One ATI Radeon 7000 Graphic board.
D One DVI/VGA Adapter cable.
2-1-3 Common items
2-1-3-1 NETWORK ITEMS are:
D RJ45 Ethernet connection. (see 2–1–4)
2-1-3-2 SCSI OPTIONS (PERIPHERALS):
D External Dicom MOD drive 5.2GB (Chapter 8 section 5).
2-1-3-3NON–SCSI OPTIONS (PERIPHERALS):
D Color Printer connected to network (DIA, see Chapter 8).
18
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
D Greyscale Printer connected to network (DIA, see Chapter 8).

D InSite option (see Chapter 8).
INSTALLATION
2-1-3-4 MONITOR CONFIGURATIONS are:
D One or two 21” Sony Color CRT Landscape monitor(s).
(to be used in a magnetic field of 1 Gauss maximum). OR
D One or two NEC Flat Panel Color LCD Landscape monitor(s).
(to be used in a magnetic field up to 10 Gauss maximum).
D Cables for monitors.
Illustration 3 – Sony 1K Landscape CRT Monitor
INPUT switch SONY Color monitor

Front View
Note: Make sure that the ”input switch” selection (Front of the monitor) is set to INPUT 1 and that
the video cable is connected to INPUT 1 (rear of the monitor).
Note: Refer to the Color Graphic Display documentation P/N: 4–073–971–11, delivered with the
monitors, for more information about monitor settings and adjustments.
Illustration 4 – NEC 1K Landscape LCD Monitor
EXIT < > + – SELECT 1–2 RESET/OSM ON/OFF
INPUT selector NEC Flat Panel

Color monitor
Front View
Note: Make sure that the ”input selector” (Front of the monitor) is set to INPUT 2 (XW8000) or
INPUT 1 (X4000) and that the video cable is connected to input 2/VGA (XW8000) and INPUT
1/DVI (X4000) at the rear of the monitor.
Refer to Job Card IST001, to set the monitor auto–adjust ON.
19
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
Illustration 5 – HPXW8000 with 1K NEC 1880SX LCD Landscape Monitor(s) Configuration

INSTALLATION
(MASTER)
XW8000 REAR VIEW
ÀÀÀÀÀ LEFT MONITOR
ÀÀÀÀÀ
RIGHT MONITOR NEC 1880SX FLAT PANEL
NEC 1880SX FLAT PANEL
INPUT2 / VGA ÀÀÀÀÀ

ÀÀÀÀÀ
INPUT 2/ VGA
ÀÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀÀ VGA OUT
HD15 / HD15
VGA cable HD15 / HD15
2 1 VGA cable
CAUTION : DO NOT USE THE
DVI / DVI OR DVI / VGA CABLES
DELIVERED WITH THE NEC
DOUBLE VGA HD15
MONITOR.
ADAPTER Y CABLE
USE THE VGA / VGA CABLE
AND Y ADAPTER CABLE
Illustration 6 – HPX4000 with 1K NEC 1880SX LCD Landscape Monitor(s) Configuration
ÀÀÀÀ
X4000 REAR VIEW (MASTER)
RIGHT MONITOR
ÀÀÀÀ LEFT MONITOR
ÀÀÀÀ
NEC 1880SX FLAT PANEL NEC 1880SX FLAT PANEL
DVI 1 IN
ÀÀÀÀ DVI 1 IN
ÀÀÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀÀÀ
VGA OUT
DVI / HD15
cable
DVI OUT
CAUTION : DO NOT USE THE DVI / HD15

DVI / DVI CABLE DELIVERED cable
WITH THE NEC MONITOR.
USE THE DVI / VGA CABLE
AND DVI / VGA HD15 ADAPTER
AS SHOWN ABOVE. DVI / VGA HD15
ADAPTER CABLE
20
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
Illustration 7 – HPXW8000 with 1K SONY CRT Landscape Monitor(s) Configuration
INSTALLATION
XW8000 REAR VIEW (MASTER)
RIGHT MONITOR
ÀÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀÀ
SONY G520P LEFT MONITOR
SONY G520P
ÀÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀÀ
INPUT 1 INPUT 2
ÀÀÀÀÀ INPUT 1 INPUT 2
ÀÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀÀ VGA OUT
HD15 / HD15
cable HD15 / HD15
2 1 cable
DOUBLE VGA HD15

ADAPTER Y CABLE
Illustration 8 – HPX4000 with 1K SONY CRT Landscape Monitor(s) Configuration
X4000 REAR VIEW
ÀÀÀÀÀ
RIGHT MONITOR (MASTER)
ÀÀÀÀÀ
SONY G520P
LEFT MONITOR
ÀÀÀÀÀ
SONY G520P
INPUT 1 INPUT 2
ÀÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀÀ
INPUT 1 INPUT 2
ÀÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀÀ
VGA OUT
DVI OUT
HD15 / HD15 HD15 / HD15

cable cable
DVI / VGA HD15

ADAPTER CABLE
21
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
2-1-4 Ethernet connection

INSTALLATION
RJ 45 CABLES OF CATEGORY > 5 MUST BE USED FOR 1GBPS CONNECTION.

WARNING
CATEGORY 5E IS FINE ; CATEGORY 6 IS SURE.
CATEGORY IS MARKED ON CABLE.
Illustration 9 – HPx4000 and HPXW8000 connection to the network
CAUTION : XW8000 STATION:

Connect the network to the additional Ethernet
board (which defaults to ETH0).
The controller on the Mother board (defaults to
ETH1) is reserved for future use.
XW8000 REAR VIEW X4000 REAR VIEW
ÀÀÀÀ ÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀ ÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀ ÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀ
Type: ifconfig –a to
get Ethernet Inter-
ÀÀÀÀÀ face(s) information

ÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀÀ ÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀÀ ÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀÀ ÀÀÀÀ
eth1
eth0
DO NOT USE
USE THE ADDI-

TIONAL
ETHERNET CARD
(defaults to eth0) NETWORK
2-2 Required Software Environment

D Operating system: Red Hat 7.3 LINUX.
D XW8000: System/Image disk space: 2 x 73 GB internal hard disks.
D X4000: System/Image disk space: 2 x 36 GB internal hard disks.
D Release 4.2 on Linux of Advantage Workstation software.
2-3 Further Assumptions

In this document, we also assume that an Internet Address, a hostname and a root password are
given by a central or local authority for each ADVANTAGE WORKSTATION.
22
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
2-4 Installation / re–installation flowcharts
INSTALLATION
START
NEW AW SYSTEM Yes

INSTALLATION? GO TO SECTION 3
page 24
No
NEW MRV2 SYSTEM Yes

INSTALLATION?
No
LOAD FROM WARM ? Yes

( AW re–install) GO TO SECTION 6
page 30
No
LOAD FROM COLD ? Yes

(OS +AW re–install) GO TO SECTION 7
page 30
Succeeded State No Basic system, Operating system,

Pre–requisite State and AW software Operational
Px PATCH Yes
(re)installation ? GO TO SECTION 10
page 31
No
DEMO EXAMS Yes

GO TO SECTION 8
INSTALLATION ? page 31
No
Second Monitor Yes GO TO SECTION 9

Upgrade option page 31
No
Add New HW : GO TO SECTION 4,

HW or SW Yes page 28
Option? SW : GO TO SECTION 5
page 29
No
END
23
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
INSTALLATION
3 NEW SYSTEM INSTALLATION
Note: It is possible to restore User Preferences and setup from AW3.1 / AW4.0 or from AW4.1
upgrades.
The procedure is described in this manual in Job Card IST009, and Chapter 2, Section 8.
Before de–installing/removing the old AW3.1, AW4.0 or AW4.1 workstation, proceed with
”Save Configuration on Floppy (or Cdrom )” procedure as described in your AW3.1, AW4.0 or
AW4.1 Service Manuals, Chapter 1, IST009.
NEW SYSTEM
INSTALLATION
Install Base System Hardware:

IST 001
– Install and connect workstation
(do not connect external option devices yet) 1 hour
– Install RAM extension option 1 FE
– Install Network connection
– Configure Host (workstation)

AW4.2 Basic
New Basic System Configuration:

IST 002
– Install software protection key
1/4 hour
– Configure site (hospital name,
auto–delete mode, add hosts...) 1 FE
SENO ADVANTAGE installation :
– AW4.2 basic system is installed Yes Seno Advantage

– Refer next to Seno Advantage installation ?
service Manual
No
Seno Advantage Service Manual

P/N: 2391077–100 GO TO A
24
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
INSTALLATION
A
Succeeded State Basic system Operational

Pre–requisite State
External SCSI Peripherals Physical

Connection:
IST 003 SCSI
– Shutdown workstation Yes
– Connect SCSI peripherals HARDWARE OPTION ?
1/4 hour
– boot workstation
1 FE
No
Run install.hardware OR IST 004
For each new SCSI peripheral

1/4 hour
Next per option
peripheral 1 FE
Logical Installation:
run : install.<option_name>
Succeeded State
Basic system and SCSI Peripherals Operational
GO TO B
25
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
INSTALLATION
Succeeded State Basic system Operational

Yes
SOFTWARE OPTION ?
Run install.software OR
IST 005
For each new SW option 1/4 hour
per option
Next
1 FE
SW option
run : install.<option_name>
No
Succeeded State
Basic system, SW options and SCSI Peripherals
Pre–requisite State Operational
Install Network Printer

IST 006 Yes
– Configure Printer NETWORK PRINTER
1/2 hour
OPTION ?
– Install Network connection and 1 FE
declare on AW Station.
No
Succeeded State
All Software and Hardware Operational
GO TO C
26
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
INSTALLATION
Succeeded State
All Software and Hardware Operational
IST 007
Network Configuration/update on
1/4 hour
scanners and other devices (per image
source)
1 FE
Input from
D Load From Cold and
Load From Warm
procedures
IST 008
Install INSITE option
Install non–SCSI options as per Yes

Non–SCSI option ?
the OEM installation manual
No
Turnover To the Customer:

IST 009
– Functional tests: (image disk space,
save site parameters, monitor calibration...) 1/2 hour
– Create USERs accounts 1 FE
– Reinstall User Preferences and setup
from AW3.1, AW4.0 or AW4.1 upgrades
– Save configuration on Cdrom
Succeeded State
Advantage Workstation System Operational
END
27
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
INSTALLATION
4 ADD NEW SCSI OPTION
INSTALL NEW SCSI

HARDWARE OPTION ?
External SCSI Peripherals Physical

Connection:
IST 003
– Shutdown workstation
– Connect SCSI peripheral into the
1/4 hour
Daisy chain.
1 FE
– reboot workstation
IST 004
For each new SCSI peripheral
Next 1/4 hour

peripheral per option
run : install.<option_name> 1 FE
Turnover to Customer: IST 009

– Test the newly installed device
1/4 hour
1 FE
END
28
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
INSTALLATION
5 ADD NEW SOFTWARE OPTION
INSTALL NEW
SOFTWARE OPTION ?
IST 005
For each new software option
Next 1/4 hour

peripheral per option
run : install.<option_name> 1 FE
Turnover to Customer : IST 009

– Test the newly installed application
1/4 hour
1 FE
END
29
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
6 AW SOFTWARE RE–INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION
Station to be
reloaded with AW
application
software only
Advantage Workstation application software reload IST 010

– AW software load (Configuration parameters are stored on the
workstation hard disk, and automatically restored) 1 hour to
several
Advanced applications software preload/install from Cdroms hours if
(Volume Viewer apps, Functional Analysis apps, etc ...) images
on HDD
Check configuration re–installed :
– site parameters 1 FE
– harware options
– software options
– Dicom & Postscript printers
Reinstall InSite (or restore InSite parameters)
Final checks before turnover to customer
END
7 LOAD FROM COLD: O.S. AND AW SOFTWARE RE–INSTALLATION

Station to be
fully reloaded
Complete load from cold with Kickstart diskette

– Linux O.S. and AW software load IST 011
– Restore Configuration parameters from Configuration Cdrom
Advanced applications software preload/install from Cdroms

(Volume Viewer apps, Functional Analysis apps, etc ...)
1.5 hours
Check configuration re–installed :
– site parameters 1 FE
– harware options
– software options
– Dicom & Postscript printers
Reinstall InSite (or restore InSite parameters)
Final checks before turnover to customer
END
30
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
INSTALLATION
8 DEMO EXAMS INSTALLATION
Station operational
INSTALL DEMO EXAMS
Loading demo exams from CDROM:

IST 012
– Check for disk space
1/4 hour
– Load demo exams
1 FE
End
9 SECOND MONITOR UPGRADE

Station operational
ADD 2nd MONITOR
Add Second Monitor Chapter 8

– Connect and configure for 2 Monitors 1/4 hour
1 FE
End
10 Px PATCH (RE)INSTALLATION
NOT AVAILABLE FOR THE PRESENT RELEASE Station operational
(re)install Px patch
(re)install Px patch
– Insert the .Px (*) Patch cdrom into drive and run install.cdrompatches
1/4 hour to
– Run the Recover Database routine (if necessary). This can take several
several hours
hours depending on the number of images stored on the hard disks.
1 FE
* where x is the number describing the

revision of patch (e.g.: P1, P2, Pn)
End
31
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
INSTALLATION
11 INSTALLATION JOB CARDS LIST
List of IST installation / reinstallation job cards: To be followed step by

step and in the right order.
ALWAYS START A NEW SYSTEM INSTALLATION WITHOUT THE EXTERNAL

WARNING
SCSI OPTION DEVICES CONNECTED. THIS WILL HELP YOU MAKE SURE THAT
YOUR BASIC SYSTEM IS OPERATIONAL AND WILL PREVENT ANY SCSI
ADDRESSING CONFLICT WITH THE INTERNAL DISKS OF THE WORKSTATION.
DURING SOFTWARE RE–INSTALLATION (LOAD FROM COLD OR LOAD FROM
WARM), THE EXTERNAL SCSI DEVICES CAN BE LEFT CONNECTED, BUT MUST
BE SWITCHED OFF.
JOB CARD PURPOSE

NEEDS TO BE DONE FOR ...
NO
NEW LOAD LOAD

SYSTEM FROM FROM
INSTALL COLD WARM
IST001 HARDWARE INSTALLATION AND CONFIGURATION YES NO NO
IST002 SITE CONFIGURATION YES YES YES
IST003 EXTERNAL SCSI DEVICE OPTION CONNECTION YES NO NO
EXTERNAL SCSI DEVICE OPTION LOGICAL

IST004 YES YES YES
INSTALLATION
IST006 POSTSCRIPT & DICOM PRINTERS INSTALLATION YES YES YES
IST005 SOFTWARE OPTIONS INSTALLATION YES YES YES
NETWORK CONFIGURATION ON IMAGES

IST007 YES NO NO
SOURCES
IST008 INSITE INSTALLATION YES YES YES
IST009 TURNOVER TO THE CUSTOMER YES YES YES
IST010 AW APPLICATION SOFTWARE RELOAD (L.F.W.) NO NO YES
IST011 LOAD FROM COLD (L.F.C.) NO YES NO
IST012 AW DEMO EXAMS REINSTALLATION CHOICE CHOICE CHOICE
32
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
JOB CARD IST 001 – Hardware Installation and Configuration
INSTALLATION
Time: 0 h 30 min – Personnel: 1 field engineer 1 of 6
1 SUPPLIES
HP workstation installation set comprising:
D Computer box HP XW8000 OR HPX4000 (upgrade from AW4.1).
D One or two Landscape 21” CRT color monitor(s).
OR
D One or two Landscape 18” LCD color monitor(s).
D Cable(s) and adapters for monitor(s).
D Keyboard
D Mouse with cable and pad.
D Cable set.
D ETHERNET RJ45 cable.
2 TOOLS REQUIRED
None.
3 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
THE MAXIMUM MAGNETIC FIELD ALLOWABLE FOR INSTALLING ADVANTAGE WORKSTATION
WHEN NOT USING SHIELDED MONITOR IS 1 GAUSS TO ENSURE PROPER OPERATION.
4 PREREQUISITES
The site must be prepared for installation of the workstation:
D Desk and chair.
D Line voltage power supply outlets.
D ETHERNET connection.
The following information must also be available before starting. It can be obtained from the network
administrator of the hospital or from the ”Needs Assessment Form” filled by the ”Network Champion”.
D Hostname of workstation.
Note: “A.E. Title” (Application Entity Title) = Hostname of the AW workstation.

D Internet Protocol (IP) Address of workstation.
D Netmask Value (if applicable).
33
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
JOB CARD IST 001 – Hardware Installation and Configuration 2 of 6

INSTALLATION
This procedure does not describe the ETHERNET network installation, which is assumed to be
already installed.
The hostname, IP address, and netmask value should be available from the Network Administrator of
your Site.
5 PHYSICAL INSTALLATION
5-1 Workstation Unpacking

D No special tools are needed.
Monitors and workstation are heavy. Ask for help to handle. Handle with care.
5-2 Memory Extension Option Installation

D Insert your memory extension option module(s), if applicable, into the computer box. (Refer to
Chapter 8 for installation).
5-3 Line Voltage Selection

LINE VOLTAGE SELECTION IS AUTOMATIC FOR THE WORKSTATION, MONITORS AND ITS
PERIPHERALS.
5-4 Power Connections

D One power outlet is required for the computer.
D One power outlet is required for each of the monitors.
D One power outlet is required for each of the optional SCSI devices (MOD, ...).
Note: Power cables must be fitted with proper plugs for the country where the workstation is
installed.
5-5 Video Connection

D Between monitor(s) and computer or via Video Recorder option Interface.
Refer to illustrations at Chapter 1, Section 2 at the beginning of this manual.
5-6 Keyboard connection

D Between keyboard and computer.
5-7 Mouse connection

D Connect the mouse to the computer box.
34
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
INSTALLATION
5-8 Network Connection
D Between computer and Image Source through Ethernet network.
Note: The XW8000 workstation MUST BE connected through its additional Ethernet Interface
card. Refer to Illustration 9, page 22.
Also refer to Chapter 8 for more information concerning networking.
Note: The workstation must be powered off when connecting the transceiver box to the AW,
otherwise, the workstation can be damaged.
5-9 External SCSI Connection

D From computer SCSI port to external SCSI device.
DO NOT CONNECT EXTERNAL SCSI DEVICES YET. THEY COULD INTERFERE
WARNING
WITH YOUR WORKSTATION IF ANY OF THE ADDRESS SWITCH WAS NOT
CORRECTLY SET. THE FOLLOWING STEPS WILL FIRST MAKE SURE THAT
YOUR WORKSTATION IS WORKING PROPERLY BEFORE YOU SHOULD
ATTEMPT TO CONNECT THE SCSI DEVICES.
6 POWER UP WORKSTATION
D Turn the monitor(s) and the workstation ON.
After the power up test is complete, check that no LEDs remain lit (LEDs can flash from times to
times) and that the Power LED is lit but not flashing (indicating a system error).
In the other case, refer to the trouble shooting guide, chapter 4.
The monitor unblanks and displays the AW logo.
The system starts to boot up from the disk and enters the system setup menu.
D Press on the <Esc> key when prompted.
– Check that the Firmware version is 1.14 (X4000 workstation).
– Check that the BIOS version is IU.W1.15US (X4000) or JQ.W1.09US (XW8000).
or JQ.W1.11US (XW8000 from AW4.2_04.10_EXT release)
If not, you must ”flash” the Firmware and BIOS before going any further.
Refer to Chapter 4, TSG 012.
This can be the case after replacement of the workstation, for instance.
D Enter the BIOS setup menu by pressing on the <F2> key, when prompted.
– Make sure the Main tab is selected and check (XW8000) that the Installed O/S parameter is
set to [Other/NT/Linux]
– Also make sure (XW8000) that the Installed O/S parameter is set to [Other/NT/Linux], and
that Legacy USB Support is set to disabled. (see Chap 4, TSG012 section 5 for details)
– Optional: Change the Reset configuration Data from its default value [No], to [Yes], following
the instructions given in the setup menu. This change is not permanent, and will be reset at
next boot.
This should be done mainly in case of hardware peripheral change, memory upgrade and/or if
the boot sequence did not complete for any reason, in order to force the system to reset.
Note that the consecutive boot sequence will take longer time for the system to scan for new
hardware devices.
35
REV 2 sm 2381096–100

INSTALLATION
D Press on the <Esc> key to quit, and confirm by pressing [Enter],to exit the BIOS setting menu.
The system now resets and start to boot up again.
The system settings display, followed by hard disks size, memory size and other information on the
internal hardware devices.
The LINUX RED HAT 7.3 boot up process displays lots of messages, then the reconfiguration script is
started :
We will now set the basic network parameters
You will have to confirm or re–enter the data at the end.
Please enter the hostname: i.e: aw–1 [Return]
D Type in the name you want to give to your workstation and press on the [Return] key when done.
DO NOT USE THE FOLLOWING CHARACTERS FOR HOSTNAME:

WARNING
. ! $ ” ‘ ’ { } [ ] * @ # ? ^ _ / etc..
ONLY USE ALPHANUMERICAL CHARACTERS WITHOUT SPACE.
However it is possible to use the – (dash).
THE HOSTNAME SHOULD BE 12 CHARACTERS MAXIMUM

WARNING
Note: The Hostname will automatically be used as the Dicom A.E. Title for the workstation.
Please enter the IP address: i.e: 3.45.12.145
D Type in the IP address for your workstation and press on the [Return] key when done.
i.e : 3.45.12.145 [Return]
Note: The Internet Protocol (IP) address value is only given as an example.
Use here the value given by the Network Administrator if applicable.
Please enter the netmask: i.e: 255.255.252.0
D Type in the appropriate Netmask then press on the [Return] key when done.
i.e : 255.255.255.240 [Return]
Note: This Netmask value is only given as an example.
Use here the value given by the Network Administrator if applicable.
hostname = aw–1
IP = 3.45.12.145
netmask = 255.255.252.0
Apply these settings ? (y/n) y [Return] to accept,
or n[Return] if you wish to modify the settings
In the second case, you will be prompted to enter again the Hostname, IP address and Netmask
Setting hostname = ............
...............................
Setting IP = ...............
Setting netmask = ............
activating the hostname/ip config
36
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
1
oJOB CARD IST 001 – Hardware Installation and Configuration 5 of 6
INSTALLATION
Now a graphical user interface will let you change the timezone, date and time
Please make your modifications, and click OK to confirm,
Press <ENTER> when ready
D Press on the [Return] key

The Date & Time / Time Zone window is displayed
Check and adjust
Time Zone
Date and Time
Date & Time Time Zone
.......................
Check and adjust .......................
Date & Time
Enable Network Time Protocol
Do not select
OK Apply
D Set the date and time first, then click on the Time Zone tab to select the appropriate time zone for
your system.
When this is done, click on the Apply button.
The Date & Time / Time Zone window pops–out.
The system completes the boot up sequence.
IN ORDER TO IMPROVE AW SECURITY, WE RECOMMEND THAT YOU MODIFY

WARNING
THE ROOT, ADMINISTRATOR AND SDC PASSWORDS WHEN THE MACHINE IS
DELIVERED TO THE CUSTOMER.
D The default password for root is factory set to operator
We recommend that you change the root password to increase security for your workstation. In
order to change the root password, refer to Chapter 1, IST002, section 4.1.2.
IT IS NOW TIME TO WRITE DOWN WORKSTATION HOSTNAME, INTERNET ADDRESS, AND

NETMASK IN THE AW CONFIGURATION FORM LOCATED AT THE BEGINNING OF THIS
MANUAL.
37
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
2
INSTALLATION
7 NEC 1880SX AUTO–ADJUST SETTING

The NEC 1880SX LCD monitors must be configured to have the auto–adjust disabled, in order not to
automatically ”catch up” the screen size, after the Screen Saver is releasing and unblanks the screen.
In order to set the auto–adjust parameter to ”disabled”, proceed as follows with each monitor
Illustration 1 – NEC 1K Landscape LCD Monitor
EXIT < > + – SELECT 1–2 RESET/OSM ON/OFF
NEC 1880SX LCD

Color monitor
Front View
Pre–requisite: The workstation is up and running.

– Left screen : Display the Patient list for catching up the 1280x1024 format
– Right screen : Display the Viewer + Filmer in full screen mode for catching up the 1280x1024 format
D Catch up the right format, by pressing alternatively on the Select 1–2 button , and the Exit
button. Note that at the first time the system is powered up, the image can be shifted to the left or
right, or out of the screen limits.
D When the image has the right format, turn OFF the monitor
D Turn ON the monitor, while keeping the Select 1–2 button pressed.
The Brightness/Contrast menu pops up. You can now release the Select1–2 button.
D Press on the Exit button. The Monitor adjustment menu pops up.
D Press again on the Exit button.
D Press twice on the > button, and move to Tab 3 (auto–adjust).
Your monitor is most probably set to ”single” or to ”full”.
D Press on the Select 1–2 button.
D With the + and/or – buttons, move auto–calibration to OFF
D Press on the Exit button.
D Press again on the Exit button to quit the Monitor adjustment menu.
Do the same steps in order to set the auto–adjust of the second monitor (if applicable).
8 SITE CONFIGURATION
Perform now the steps described in Job Card IST 002 (up to AW4.2_03.10 release) or go to Job Card
IST001bis.
3
38
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
JOB CARD IST 002 – Site Configuration

Time: x h xx min – Personnel: 1 field engineer
INSTALLATION
1 of 14
1 SUPPLIES
Site Configuration Cdrom of the older AW system to upgrade.
2 TOOLS REQUIRED
Not applicable.
3 PREREQUISITES
Steps from Job Card IST 001 have been completed.
4 PROCEDURE
D Login as sdc:
console login : sdc [Return]
Password : adw4.2 [Return] (the sdc password is factory loaded as adw4.2)
Note: AW will attempt to startup but will fail as the software protection key has not been
installed yet, so don’t be alarmed to see windows popping up in the upper left corner of the
screen, displaying the message: Invalid Software key for AW Station
4-1 Preliminary steps, for upgrades from AW1.2, AW2.0, AW3.1, AW4.0 or
AW4.1/4.1P
AW1.2 or AW2.0 case:
D Bypass this step. No Site parameters, Protocols or Customer presets are compatible, so they
cannot be reinstalled from the older AW1.2 or AW2.0 system. Jump to section 4–2.
AW3.1 or AW4.0 case:
D Bypass this step. The compatible Site parameters, Protocols and/or Customer presets
reinstallation is detailed in Job Card IST009, to be performed later on. Jump to section 4–2.
AW4.1P (XW8000 workstation) and AW4.1 (X4000) software upgrade only:
D All Site parameters, Protocols or Customer presets and License keys of the upgraded AW4.1 or
AW4.1P can be reinstalled into your new AW4.2 system, as the upgrade consists on a software
upgrade only. Note that Volume Viewer application requires a license key with AW4.2 !!!
You need to perform a complete software reload (Load from Cold) as described in Chapter 1, Job
Card IST011, then go to section 4.2
AW4.1 (X4000 workstation) hardware upgrade (workstation swap):
D All Site parameters, Protocols or Customer presets of the older AW4.1 can be reinstalled into your
new AW4.2 system, but no license keys, as the upgrade consists on a hardware swap.
However, the License keys of the older AW4.1 system will be restored as well from the AW4.1
Configuration Cdrom and will have to be modified.
You will have to enter manually the appropriate keys , later on when prompted :
– IST002 : Section 4–3 : install.site script for the AW (sdc) key
– IST005 : Application options installation
Follow the steps described hereafter before continuing with steps described section 4–2.
39
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
4
JOB CARD IST 002 – Site Configuration 2 of 14
INSTALLATION
D Move the mouse pointer to the screen background (dark area), press on the middle or right button
of the mouse, and select AW Administration .
Root Menu
Refresh Screen
Save Configuration
Service Tools
AW Administration
Restart AW
D Enter the Administrator’s password when prompted:

Password: administrator [Return]
A command window pops up with the User Management menu.
Main MENU
USERS MANAGEMENT...................................1
SHARED PROTOCOLS MANAGEMENT........................2
EXAM CODES MANAGEMENT..............................3
CONFIGURATION......................................4
BACKUP THE WHOLE CONFIG ON CDROM...................5
RESTORE THE WHOLE CONFIG FROM CDROM................6
=================================================================
Enter your choice or <Enter> to display the current menu [?,q] ? [Return]
D Insert the Site Configuration Cdrom from the upgraded AW4.1 system, before selecting option 6,
RESTORE THE WHOLE CONFIG FROM CDROM
6 [Return]
WARNING : The current config will be overwritten
Please type ’restore’ then <Enter> to confirm
or just <Enter> to abort
restore [Return]
The whole configuration from your older AW4.1 system is restored on your new AW4.2.
D Follow the steps described section 4–2, and make sure you modify the following parameters:
key : change the Software Key (current = xxxxxxx)
ser : change the Serial Number of the station (current = xxxxxxxx)
sid : change the GE System ID of the station (current = xxxxxxxx)
nod : change the Remote Node Control state (current = off)
delmin : change the autodelete lower bound (current = xxxxx)
delmax : change the autodelete upper bound (current = xxxxxx)
40
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
5
INSTALLATION
4-2 Install the Site Parameters
4-2-1 install.site script
This step will allow you to install the software protection key code, the serial number of the
workstation, the hospital name and the telephone number of GE Medical Systems local Application
Support Answer Line and other site parameters.
THE SOFTWARE PROTECTION KEY CODE CAN BE FOUND ON A SHEET OF PAPER
DELIVERED WITH THE MACHINE.
IT IS ALSO LOADED INTO THE CONFIGURATION DISKETTE SHIPPED WITH THE SYSTEM FROM
MANUFACTURING. THE FLOPPY DISKETTE CONTAINS A TEXT FILE THAT CAN ALSO BE READ
ON A LAPTOP.
KEYS CAN BE ENTERED IN EITHER LOWER OR UPPER CASE LETTERS.
D Move the mouse pointer to the screen background (dark area), press on the middle or right button
of the mouse, and select Service Tools, Command Window.
Root Menu
Refresh Screen
Command Window
Save Configuration
Recover Database
Service Tools
Exit AW
The Command window pops–up.

Note: If you need to read the workstation’s licenseId number, in order to check (or request from your
OLC) the corresponding AW software license key, type in:
licenseId [Return]
D Change to the SdC install directory:
cd /export/home/sdc/install [Return]
D To install the Site parameters, type in ”./install.site” and answer the questions as they appear:
./install.site [Return]
Note: Do not use the following characters for hospital name and phone number:
. ! $ ” ‘ ’ { } [ ] * @ # ? ^
–––––––––––––––––AW SETUP–––––––––––––––––––––––
all : change all below
lan : change the language for AW software (current = english)
mon : change the monitors configuration (current = 1L1)
mon_type : change the monitor type configuration (current = NEC)
41
REV 2 sm 2381096–100

INSTALLATION
sid : change the GE System ID of the station (current = AW42BUC)

hos : change the hospital name (current = BUC)
sup : change the support phone number (current = 00 00 00 00 00)
sal : change the sales phone number (current = 00 00 00 00 00)
del : change the autodelete activity (current = off)
delmin : change the autodelete lower bound (current = xxxxx)
loc : change the autolock activity (current = off)
lockdelay : change the autolock delay (current = 5)
sav : change the screen saver activity (current = on)
savdelay : change the screen saver delay (current = 5)
look : change the look & feel configuration (current = picasso)
–––––––––––––––––––––––
q : quit this menu
h : help
Enter the keyword :
D Enter all [Return] .
You will be prompted to set in sequence all the above mentioned SIte parameters.
See example hereafter.
OR
(If you want to set only one or some of the parameters, you can choose among the keywords (i.e:
mon_type [Return]) to set the parameter(s) you wish).
Note: AW4.1 (X4000) upgrade case: Make sure you modify the following parameters, if you have
restored the configuration from the AW4.1 Configuration Cdrom:
sid : change the GE System ID of the station (current = xxxxxxxx)
this parameter is to set the ”receive_filter”
delmin : change the autodelete lower bound (current = xxxxx) :
if you use autodelete, the new autodelete lower bound default value for XW8000 is 5000
if you use autodelete, the new autodelete lower bound default value for XW8000 is 12000
======== Software Key ========
Enter the keyword : key [Return]
Please enter the software Key for AW product : [xxxxxxxx] xxxxxxxx [Return]
–––> To activate the key, you will have to restart AW
======== Language for AW ========
Enter the keyword : lan [Return]
Which language do you want for AW software ?
(e)nglish, (f)rench, (g)erman, (i)talian, (p)ortuguese, (s)panish : [french] e,f,g,i,p,s [Return]
Installing links for language and monitor dependent files...
–––> To activate this setting, you will have to logout and restart AW
42
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
INSTALLATION
======== Monitor(s) configuration ========
Enter the keyword : mon [Return]
How many monitors are plugged on the station ? (1 or 2) (= 1L1 or 2L1) 1 or 2 [Return]
–––> To activate this setting, you will have to reboot the station
======== Monitor(s) type configuration ========
Enter the keyword : mon_type [Return]
Please choose your monitor in the list
1 NEC LCD1880SX
2 SONY CPD–G520P
Enter selection [?,??] 1 or 2 [Return]
======== Serial Number ========
Enter the keyword : ser [Return]
Please enter the Serial Number of the station (it can be found on the rear of the station)
[146C0517] : XXXXXXXX [Return]
========== System ID ==========
Enter the keyword : sid [Return]
Please enter the GE’s System ID of the station : [AW41BUC] XXXXXXX [Return]
======== Hospital Name ========
Enter the keyword : hos [Return]
Please enter the name of the hospital : [BUC] XXXXXXXX [Return]
–––> To activate this setting, you will have to restart AW
==== Support phone number ====
Enter the keyword : sup [Return]
Please enter the telephone number of GE’s local Application Support Answer Line
[00 00 00 00 00] : XX XX XX XX XX [Return]
===== Sales phone number =====
Enter the keyword : sal [Return]
Please enter the telephone number of GE’s local Sales Support Answer Line
[00 00 00 00 00] : XX XX XX XX XX [Return]
===== Remote Node Control state =====
Enter the keyword : nod [Return]
Please choose the Remote Node Control state ? (off/on) : [off] on [Return]
Configuration updated. All the remote hosts having their Dicom AE title declared in the host manager
are allowed to send images to the station.
Note: More information on Remote Node Control in Section 5 : Appendix

===== Autodelete activity =====
Enter the keyword : del [Return]
Please chose the autodelete activity ? (off/on) : [on] on OR off [Return]
43
REV 2 sm 2381096–100

INSTALLATION
==== Autodelete lower bound ====

Enter the keyword : delmin [Return]
Enter the amount of free disk space under which autodelete starts (in MB) : [200]
i.e: 5000 [Return] The autodelete process will start as soon as the free disk space is < 5GB
==== Autodelete upper bound ====
Enter the keyword : delmax [Return]
Enter the amount of free disk space above which autodelete stops (in MB) : [400]
i.e: 12000 [Return] The autodelete process will stop as soon as the free disk space is >12GB
Note: The suggested default values are made to start autodelete when the capacity is < 10% of the
disks capacity and to stop when it gets > 25% :
– HP X4000 : 2 x 36GB disks : delmin = 5000 ; delmax = 12000
– HP XW8000 : 2 x73GB disks : delmin = 12000 ; delmax = 30000
====== Autolock activity ======
Enter the keyword : loc [Return]
Please choose the autolock activity (off/on) : [on] off [Return]
–––> To activate this setting, you will have to logout
======= Autolock delay =======
Enter the keyword : locdelay [Return]
Please enter the autolock delay in minutes : [5] 5 [Return]
==== Screen saver activity ===
Enter the keyword : sav [Return]
Please choose the screensaver activity (off/on) : [off] on [Return]
===== Screen saver delay =====
Enter the keyword : savdelay [Return]
Please enter the screensaver delay in minutes : [5] 5 [Return]
===== User Interface (look & feel) =====
Enter the keyword : look [Return]
Please choose the look & feel configuration (cui/picasso) : [picasso] (default is picasso)
Type cui [Return] to choose the new ”Common User Interface”
OR type picasso [Return] to choose the original AW ”picasso look” User Interface
–––> To activate this setting, you will have to logout and login again.
Note: The Login window, will only be updated to CUI at the next boot.
CAUTION
We recommend that you do not change to the Common User Interface (CUI), as
long as you have not installed Applications running with the same ”look & feel”
interface, to keep consistency between the User Interfaces.
44
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
INSTALLATION
4-2-2 Additional Site parameters
1 : install.receivefilter
This script is obsolete. It is replaced by the ”nod” entry in the install.site menu script.
It is usefull to prevent undesired hosts to push to, and/or query/retrieve images from your AW
workstation, by limiting the push and query/retrieve rights, to the only remote hosts you have de-
clared into the AW Patient List Browser.
D cd /export/home/sdc/install [Return]
./install.receivefilter [Return] >>>> (see install.site option nod)
To disable the filter and give back access to any hosts on the network, run the script again.
Note: The next scripts must be run as root.

D su – root [Return]
enter root password
D cd /export/home/sdc/install [Return]
2 : install.passwords
This script allows to modify the root password, the sdc password and the administrator password
at once.
We strongly recommend that you change them to increase network security.
Make sure to notify the users of the new AW (sdc) password, and all persons in charge of the System
administration and/or maintenance of the station, of the new Root and/or Administrator passwords.
Choose passwords of a least 8 characters, an assortment of lower/upper case letters, numbers, and
the grouping of letters should have no known meaning.
i.e: the following characters (which the system may assign a special meaning) should not be use:
@ ; # ; <Tab> ; <Esc> etc ...
D ./install.passwords [Return]
Enter the name of the user whose password must be changed
– root ; sdc_admin ; sdc ; or type q to quit
Follow the instructions given by the script to change the password(s).
3 : install.http
D ./install.http [Return]
The http server is intentionally disabled to increase network security.
This script allows to enable the HTTP server, in order to export files with DataExport through the http
protocol to a remote host running a Web navigator.
Note: To put back the http server to ”disabled”, run ./uninstall.http

4 : updateDTEXpw
D After software reload, (LFW=IST010) and after having restored the Site parameters from the
Configuration Cdrom, it is necessary, if the system uses the DataExport HTTP server, to run
the following script :
cd export/home/sdc/bin [Return]
./updateDTEXpw [Return]
45
REV 2 sm 2381096–100

INSTALLATION
5 : configure.patient_key
CAUTION
This script should be used very carefully, because it might lead to mix Patients
data into the AW Database.
DO NOT CHANGE the Database Management model, unless explicitely
requested by the Site.
The standard Database patient identification is based on 4 information:
– Patient name
– Patient ID (unique number to identify a patient in the hospital)
– Patient birth date
– Patient sex
Some sites may require that this Database Management model is changed to a less ”restrictive”
model:
i.e: Emergency sites which might not know the name of the Patient upon arrival to the Radiology
departement.
These sites, may consequently require to have the Patient ID + Patient sex model only
D If your site requests a different Database management model, than the standard
Name_ID_Birth_sex model, you have to run the following script :
./export/home/sdc/scripts/configure.patient_key [Return]
======== Database patient key configuration ========

WARNING!!!–––––––WARNING!!!
MODIFYING PATIENT_KEY ON NON RELIABLE CENTRALIZED
PATIENT ID MANAGEMENT INFORMATION SYSTEMS MAY LEAD
TO MIX PATIENTS IN THE AW DATABASE
Database patient key configuration
1 NAME_ID_BIRTH_SEX (SAFEST) Patient is identified by his name,
birthdate, hospital id and sex
2 NAME_ID_SEX Patient is identified by his name, hospital id
and sex
3 ID_SEX_BIRTH (UNSAFE ON NON CENTRALIZED PATIENT ID SYSTEM)
Patient is identified only by his hospital id and sex
4 ID_SEX (UNSAFE ON NON CENTRALIZED PATIENT ID SYSTEM) is
identified only by his hospital id and sex
Please choose the desired Database patient key configuration [?,??,q]:
[NAME_ID_BIRTH_SEX] i.e : 2 [Return]
Database patient key configuration : NAME_ID_SEX

Please confirm [y,n,?,q] y [Return]
Note: At this time, the Database is going to be reconstructed, to take the change into account.
PLEASE WAIT !!! DATABASE IS BEING RECONSTRUCTED !!!
46
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
6
INSTALLATION
4-3 Restart Application
Select Restart AW from the System menu (this takes about 20 seconds to complete).
D Install the SMPTE test patterns

Note: !!! No access to the VIEWER or to any features of the workstation is possible, as long
as no images have been installed on the workstation. !!!
4-4 Declare Hosts on the Network

Note: The software Licence key must be installed, and Advantage Workstation software must
successfully start prior to performing this step. This is a User accessible menu on the
PATIENT LIST so there is no need to switch user to root.
D Select Network Manager from the Tools menu
The Network Manager window pops up
Tools Patient List
Preferences Network Manager
Set Exam Modify, create or delete remote host.
Admin Anonymous
One Touch
Manager
System
Network Select remote host:
Manager
Printer
Manager Close Modify Create Delete
Log out
47
REV 2 sm 2381096–100

INSTALLATION
D click on the Create button. The Remote host parameters window pops up
Define or modify remote host parameters
Host Label
Hostname
Make the Network Application Entity Title

protocol selection first, then
fill in the other fields Network address
SDCNET3.2/4.0
Network protocol SDCNET3.1
DICOM 3.0
IC DICOM 3.0
Port number 4006
Query retrieve No provider
Storage commitment No
Application Entity Title
This part is disabled when Network address

Storage Commitment = No
Storage commitment
information Port number
Comments
Cancel Clear Save
D Fill in the different fields following the information given in the following pages.
(Remote Host Parameter) then click on Save to quit.
Note: Some archive systems offer the ”Storage commitment” feature.
If you select Storage commitment = yes, you will have to fill in the corresponding fileds with
the AET, network address and port number of the Storage system.
Check with the Network administrator for ”Storage commitment” capability of your archive
system.
48
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
INSTALLATION
4-4-1 Declaring an SDC Based Product: (AW4.0, AW3.1, AW2.0 and 1.2...)
CAUTION
These older AW products ARE NOT Dicom Query/retrieve providers. Therefore
you cannot query/retrieve images from them using the Dicom 3.0 protocol.
However you can push images from AW4.0, AW3.1, AW2.0 or AW1.2 using the
Dicom 3.0 protocol, to your AW4.2.
AW4.1 and AW4.2 ARE Dicom Query/retrieve providers.
Therefore, AW4.0, AW3.1, AW2.0, AW1.2 can query/retrieve images from them
using the Dicom 3.0 protocol.
4-4-1-1AW2.0 and AW1.2 case

D For these products, you must use exclusively the DICOM 3.0 protocol .
HOST LABEL : Enter the name you want to give to the icon that will represent the remote host
HOSTNAME : Enter hostname
APPLICATION ENTITY TITLE : Enter the Application Entity Title (A.E.T.) *
NETWORK ADDRESS : Enter Internet address
PROTOCOL FIELD : select DICOM 3.0
PORT NUMBER : Enter the listened Port number of the Target station *
QUERY RETRIEVE TYPE : choose:
NO PROVIDER : AW1.2 and AW2.0 ARE NOT Dicom query/retrieve provider.
STORAGE COMMITMENT : choose:
NO .
COMMENT : In the Comment field, add any comments you want.
D Click on Save button to update and Quit.
4-4-1-2AW4.0 and AW3.1 case

D For these products, you can use the DICOM 3.0 protocol to support the Dicom Push from AW4.1
/ AW4.2, or the appropriate SdCNet protocol, if your site wants to use the Query/retrieve feature.
For Dicom Push only : See above: Same as case AW1.2 or AW2.0
For SdCNet Query/Retrieve, refer to instructions hereafter
SdCNet Query/retrieve OK
AW4.1 / AW4.2 AW4.0 / AW3.1
Remote Host Dicom Push OK Remote Host
Dicom 3.0 SdCNet
AW4.0 / AW3.1 AW4.1 / AW4.2
Dicom Query/retrieve OK
Dicom Query/retrieve KO
49
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
7
INSTALLATION
APPLICATION ENTITY TITLE : DE–ACTIVATED
PROTOCOL FIELD :
For Advantage Workstation 3.1 : select SdC NET 3.1
For Advantage Workstation 4.0 : select SdC NET 3.2 / 4.0
PORT NUMBER : DE–ACTIVATED
PROVIDER TYPE : DE–ACTIVATED
COMMENT :In the Comment field , add any comment you want.
4-4-2 Declaring an AdvantageNet Based Product: (IC, Signa 5.X, CT–HLA, CT/i...)
Note: For these products, use the DICOM 3.0 or IC Dicom 3.0 protocol .
PROTOCOL FIELD : select DICOM 3.0 OR
: select IC DICOM 3.0 for former Genesis Protocol based hosts.
QUERY RETRIEVE TYPE : STUDY
STORAGE COMMITMENT : DE–ACTIVATED
COMMENT : In the Comment field, add any comment you want.
4-4-3 Declaring a DICOM3 Host: (AW4.2, AW4.1, MR Lx, CT/i, CT Synergy, DLX, MR Lx...
and Third party hosts)
PROTOCOL FIELD : select DICOM 3.0
QUERY RETRIEVE TYPE : choose:
STUDY for all genesis based products (and typically Image Sources), which work only with
EXAM, SERIES, IMAGE concept.
PATIENT for Advantage Cluster Storage and Archive system which work with
PATIENT, EXAMS, SERIES, IMAGES concept.
NO PROVIDER if host is not query/retrieve provider.
STORAGE COMMITMENT : choose:
NO (unless otherwise specified by the product Dicom Conformance Statement)
COMMENT : In the Comment field, add any comments you want.
50
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
INSTALLATION
* This information can be obtained from the Remote Host Conformance statement documents.
Note: The Port number depends on the DICOM system to be connected. For instance, AW listens
to DICOM Hosts on the Port 4006.
Note: Network Remote Hosts are not updated in the /etc/inet/hosts file, but can be found in the file
/export/home/sdc/Prefs/SdCRHosts. For this reason, it is not possible to use “ping”, “telnet”,
“spray” and similar commands using the hostname. The internet address must be used
instead. For example, to ping the MR operator’s console from the A.W. workstation, do not
use /bin/ping MR01_OC0. Instead, use its internet address:
e.g.: /bin/ping –c 1 192.9.200.1. (–c 1 is the number of ping occurences)
Therefore, though it is not mandatory to declare hosts in the /etc/hosts file, when using the
Dicom 3.0 protocol, we recommend you to do it in any case.
4-4-4 Declaring a Dicom IC (Independent Console)
A new protocol has been implemented in order to solve some problems with the IC current software
Release 5.5 (echo, delay, repetition and inversion times display beeing multiplied by 1000).
Declare the host as any other Dicom3 host, but select the IC Dicom3.0 protocol.
Advantage Workstation Basic System is operational.

IT IS NOW TIME TO WRITE DOWN AW SOFTWARE PROTECTION KEY, SERIAL NUMBER OF
WORKSTATION, APPLICATION SUPPORT TELEPHONE NUMBER, HOSPITAL NAME AND
USER’S INTERFACE INFORMATION IN THE AW CONFIGURATION FORM LOCATED AT THE
BEGINNING OF THIS MANUAL.
Perform now the steps described in Job Card IST 003 and IST004 to install the hardware options
(if applicable)..
5 APPENDIX: REMOTE NODE CONTROL

The Remote Node Control is usefull to prevent undesired hosts to push to, and/or query/retrieve
images from your AW workstation, by limiting the push and query/retrieve rights, to the only remote
hosts you have declared into the AW Patient List Browser.
The filter is disabled by default. It means that any System on the network can push to and/or retrieve
images from your AW. If you set the filter ON, you will have to make sure that authorized systems
needing to push images or retrieve images from your AW, are properly declared in your AW worksta-
tion . (see section 4–4)
51
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
Blank page.
INSTALLATION
52
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
JOB CARD IST 003 – External SCSI Device Option Connection
INSTALLATION
1 SUPPLIES
None.
2 TOOLS REQUIRED
None.
Always shutdown the workstation before connecting the SCSI devices.
4 PREREQUISITES
Advantage workstation is configured (Job Card IST 001 – 002).
You have read the sections of Chapter 8 corresponding to the SCSI peripherals to be installed,
in order to make sure that these devices are properly configured.
5 PROCEDURE
D Shutdown workstation if it is not already shutdown.
– If you are logged in as ”sdc” and Advantage Workstation is running, you can click on the
”shutdown” button available in the browser.
– If you are logged in as ”root”, you can open a Command window (Xterm) and type in:
halt [Return].
D Wait about 1/2 minute for shutdown to complete. When the shutdown completes, the ”Power down
” message will display.
D Turn OFF the Computer box.
D Using the figures on the next pages, correctly address and connect the external SCSI devices in a
daisy chain and in the order shown. ALWAYS USE THE SHORTEST SCSI CABLES AS
POSSIBLE.
Note: Refer to Chapter 8 for information on the external SCSI device you want to connect.
Also see part numbers of various SCSI cables length at Chapter 6 FRU list.
53
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
JOB CARD IST 003 – External SCSI Device Option Connection 2 of 4

INSTALLATION
X4000 XW8000
ÀÀÀ ÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀ ÀÀÀ
X4000 ÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀ ÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀ ÀÀÀÀ
SCSI port
ÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀ ÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀ
SONY or MAXOPTIX DICOM MOD drive
ÀÀÀÀ ÀÀÀÀ
SCSI ID select switch : set
SCSI terminator to ID = 3
ËËË ÀÀÀÀÀ
ËËË ÀÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀÀ
Centronics 50p to wide SCSI 68p cable XW8000
SCSI port
CAUTION
Never change the SCSI address of a device when power is on.
CAUTION
Never use the built–in terminator switch.
Use the external Active Terminator instead.
D Turn ON the external SCSI device first.
MOD DEVICE LINE VOLTAGE SELECTION IS AUTOMATIC

D Switch on the workstation or press on the Reset button of the workstation.
The systems starts the Power On Selft Tests.
– Make sure the Main tab is selected and change the Reset configuration Data from its
default value [No], to [Yes], following the instructions given in the setup menu.
Note that the consecutive boot up will take longer, time for the system to scan for new
hardware devices.
– Also make sure that Installed O/S is set to [Other/NT/Linux] and Legacy USB Support is
set to Disabled.
54
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
JOB CARD IST 003 – External SCSI Device Option Connection 3 of 4
INSTALLATION
D When the boot sequence has completed, make sure the MOD device has been properly
recognized by the workstation :
Start AW application by login as sdc, then open a Command window and type in :
cat /proc/scsi/scsi [Return]
You should find references to the hard disks, the CD–RW drive and the MOD device.
XW8000 workstation
Attached devices :
Host: scsi0 Channel: 00 Id 00 Lun: 00
Vendor: SEAGATE Model: ST373453LW ....................
....................
Vendor: HL–DT–ST Model: CD–RW GCE–8481B ......................
...................
X4000 workstation
Attached devices :
....................
Vendor: MITSUMI Model: CR–48X9TE ......................
...................
Note: However the internal CD–RW drive is an IDE drive, it is emulated as an SCSI drive.
Therefore it shows up in your list

Vendor: SONY Model: SMO–551–SD ......................
...................................
CAUTION
If the MOD has not been detected, do not continue. Shutdown the workstation,
check all connections and start again.
The system is now ready for SCSI options to be logically installed.

Proceed with steps described in Job Card IST 004.
55
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
Blank page.
INSTALLATION
56
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
JOB CARD IST 004 – External SCSI Device Option Logical Installation
INSTALLATION
Time: 0 h 30 min per Option – Personnel: 1 field engineer 1 of 2
HARDWARE OPTIONS INSTALLATION
1 PREREQUISITE
Advantage Workstation is configured (Job Card IST 001/002).
External SCSI options are connected and powered on (Job Card IST 003).
2 FOREWORD
No License key is required to install the SCSI Hardware options.
At this time, the ONLY supported SCSI option is the Dicom MOD.
3 TOOLS REQUIRED
None.
Make sure you have correctly set up the SCSI devices before starting the logical installation. Refer to
Chapter 8 for additional information.
57
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
JOB CARD IST 004 – External SCSI Device Option Logical Installation 2 of 2
INSTALLATION
5 PROCEDURE
D Login as sdc if not already logged in as sdc:
Password : adw4.2 [Return] (default sdc password is factory loaded)
D When AW has completed its startup, click on the Admin button, then on the Command Window
button to open a Command Window:
D Move the cursor arrow into the Command window and switch user to root:
su – root [Return]
Password : operator [Return]
D Change to the install directory by typing:
D Insert the Configuration diskette or Configuration Cdrom for devices requiring installation of a
license key.
5-1 Dicom MOD option

This MOD option only supports CT and MR images.
Maxoptix MOD or Sony MOD drives from AW 3.1 or AW4.0 upgrades can be installed on AW4.2
without need of a license key.
D Run the hardware option installation script:
./install.dicmod [Return]
During this phase, a number of messages are printed on the screen which tell the operator what is
going on.
When the installation has completed, restart the software so that the new device is taken into account
by the AW application.
10
58
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
JOB CARD IST 005 – Software Options Installation
INSTALLATION
SOFTWARE OPTIONS INSTALLATION
1 PREREQUISITE
External SCSI options are connected and installed (Job Card IST 003 and IST004).
A Dicom Printer is installed (Job Card IST 006) prior to install the Dentascan option.
A Configuration Floppy disk, specific to the Site, is available when installing the options.
If this diskette is not available, or is corrupted, you may install your options by typing the appropriate
key when prompted, or one by one, using the appropriate ” install.xxx” script (see below).
Note: However it is possible to read License keys delivered on Floppy diskettes by Manufacturing,
you can no longer write/store keys and Site parameters on Floppy. Once your system is
installed, you will have to save the license keys and Site parameters on a blank Cdrom.
2 FOREWORD
AW options are protected by a software key. This software key is linked to the workstation’s ID
number (licenseId) of the Site which has purchased the option.
This key is delivered under 2 forms: A Configuration diskette containing a special number
matching the ID number of your workstation (use command : licenseId) and a sheet of paper on
which this number is written.
If several options are purchased for the Site at the time of first installation, only one Configuration
diskette containing the corresponding keys will be delivered. On the joined sheet of paper, these keys
will also be clearly written.
If this Configuration diskette is not available, or is corrupted, you may install your options by entering
the appropriate key at the keyboard (see below).
There are two different ways to install new software options:
1. Using the Easy Install utility.
2. By the specific command for each options ”install.xxx” where xxx is linked with option name
In this case, you will install options one by one, (see section 6 and Chapter 8 for more
information).
When all your options are installed, you can save all the software keys at once, on one blank
CDROM which will become the brand new Site Configuration parameters media.
This will be done by following steps described in IST009 Job Card.
3 TOOLS REQUIRED
None.
59
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
JOB CARD IST 005 – Software Options Installation 2 of 10

INSTALLATION
None.
5 PROCEDURE USING EASY INSTALL

D When AW has completed its startup, click on the Admin button in the bottom left corner of the
Patient List (Browser). This will open a Menu displaying the available applications.
D Click on Install Packages button from the pop–up menu.

The Easy Install window pops–up.
Easy install
Select to install
Installation on workstation ’hostname’ from Hard disk
........................ or Cdrom
A– For Software preloaded on the Hard disk
........................
B – For Software on Floppy or Cdom
........................
........................ Hard disk
CDRom
Floppy
Driver CDRom
Contents
Install Quit
Note: If you receive on Cdrom, a more recent version of an Application (preloaded on the AW
hard disks), always use it instead of the preloaded release. In this case, select Cdrom.
60
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
INSTALLATION
D Make sure the Hard Disk button is selected, then click on the Contents button.
The Easy Install window for optional software application(s) present on the hard disks, pops–up.
The example below may differ from what you get, depending on the pre–loaded or the already
installed applications, or if the Configuration diskette has been already inserted.
Click on the checkbox of the applications candidate to be installed.
D Click on the corresponding button(s) of the optional software application(s) you want to install. The
display will change from Not installed to Ready to be installed.
61
REV 2 sm 2381096–100

INSTALLATION
D When this is done, click on the Install button to start the installation of the chosen application(s).
You will be prompted to enter the appropriate software protection key for each chosen application.
When the application has been installed, the display will change to Installation successful.
Note: Make sure the Uninstall button is not pressed inadvertantly. This would mean that selected
applications are candidate to erase. In this case, the Install button changes to Uninstall.
6 MANUAL PROCEDURE
D Login as sdc if not already logged in as sdc.
D When AW completes its startup, open a Command Window from the Admin submenu.
Note: DO NOT SWITCH USER TO ROOT.

6-1 Installing the Autobone Package

D Run the installation script:
./install.autobone XXXXXXX [Return]
(where XXXXXXX is the Autobone soft key)
6-2 Installing the Advanced Lung Analysis Package

./install.ala XXXXXXX [Return]
(where XXXXXXX is the ALA soft key)
D To validate the package, logout, click on the Restart AW button under Exit menu.
6-3 Installing the Advanced Vessel Analysis Package

./install.ava XXXXXXX [Return]
(where XXXXXXX is the AVA soft key)
6-4 Installing the CT Colonography Package

./install.ctc XXXXXXX [Return]
(where XXXXXXX is the CTC soft key)
62
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
11
INSTALLATION
6-5 Installing the CT Perfusion 2 Package

./install.ctperf2 XXXXXXX [Return]
(where XXXXXXX is the CT Perfusion 2 software key)
D To validate the package, click on the Restart AW button under Exit menu.
6-6 Installing the CT Perfusion 3 (Multi–organ) Package

./install.ctperf3 XXXXXXX [Return]
(where XXXXXXX is the CT Perfusion 3 software key)
6-7 Installing the CT Perfusion 3 (Body) Package

./install.ctperfbody XXXXXXX [Return]
(where XXXXXXX is the CT Perf Body software key)
6-8 Installing the CT Perfusion 3 (Neuro) Package

./install.ctperfneuro XXXXXXX [Return]
(where XXXXXXX is the CT Perf Neuro software key)
6-9 Installing the CardEP package

./install.cardep XXXXXXX [Return]
(where XXXXXXX is the CardEP software key)
6-10 Installing the CardIQ 2 package

./install.cardiq2 XXXXXXX [Return]
(where XXXXXXX is the CardIQ 2 software key)
6-11 Installing Functional applications package

D Run the Functool Performance installation script:
./install.fctl2 XXXXXXX [Return]
(where XXXXXXX is the FuncTool Performance software key)
63
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
12
INSTALLATION
D Run the Functool Diffusion Tensor installation script:

./install.fctldti XXXXXXX [Return]
(where XXXXXXX is the Functool Diffusion Tensor software key)
D Run the Functool Perfusion installation script:
./install.fctpwi XXXXXXX [Return]
(where XXXXXXX is the Functool Perfusion software key)
D Run the Functool Spectroscopy installation script:
./install.fctlmrsi XXXXXXX [Return]
(where XXXXXXX is the Functool Spectroscopy software key)
6-12 Installing Fusion applications package

D Run the Fusion installation script:
./install.fusion_ctmr XXXXXXX [Return]
(where XXXXXXX is the Fusion for CT and MR software key)
D Run the CT_PET Fusion installation script:
./install.fusion_ctpet XXXXXXX [Return]
(where XXXXXXX is the CT_PET Fusion software key)
Note: The XA_MR Fusion for this release is a PROTOTYPE.

D Run the XA_MR Fusion installation script:
./install.fusion_xmr XXXXXXX [Return]
(where XXXXXXX is the XA_MR Fusion software key)
6-13 Installing the MR Pasting package

./install.mrpasting XXXXXXX [Return]
(where XXXXXXX is the MR Pasting software key)
6-14 Installing the Dentascan Package

./install.denta XXXXXXX [Return] (where XXXXXXX is the denta package key)
D Or run the installation script:
./install.dentaplus XXXXXXX [Return] (where XXXXXXX is the dentaPlus package key)
Note: FILMS WILL BE SENT TO THE LASER CAMERA!!!

./install.denta LicenseServer XXXXXXXX (where XXXXXXXX is the Denta key)
The procedure will send 1or 2 films to the camera
(2 films if Zoom is supported by the type of Camera)
Please check that your camera is connected and running.
64
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
13
INSTALLATION
Do you want to continue (y/n) y [Return]
...........................
Sending film to the camera
...........................
Note: To answer the following question(s), you must get the film(s) sent to the camera by the
install.denta script. Measure the distance between the two vertical lines on the film(s) printed,
and enter the value(s) in MILLIMETERS (mm).
Enter the distance 1 in (mm) : XXX.X [Return]
Enter the distance 2 in (mm) : YYY.Y [Return]

(if Zoom supported by the type of Camera)
Configuring Dentascan camera with Zoom disabled
To film real size, Field of View should be equal to: XXX mm
(if Zoom is not supported) OR
Configuring Dentascan camera with Zoom enabled

To film real size, Field of View should be less than or equal to:XXX mm
(if Zoom supported)
...........................
Application declared
Note: Older type GE–YMS scanners do not give exactly the same FOV value as the one prescribed
above. For example, a selected FOV of 130 can give something like 135 mm on the film.
This is why you should experimentally find a FOV value on the scanner giving a real FOV as
close as possible to the value ”Dist 1” found during installation and communicate it to the
customer. If the scanning FOV is too far away from the value ”Dist1” (more than 5%), you
may get the message: ”MAY NOT BE LIFE SIZE”.
Note: If a communication error with the Printer occurs during installation, the Dentascan package
will be installed with NO CAMERA. In this case, when later on, your camera is installed and
running, run the installcamera.denta script under /export/home/sdc/install directory.
If any change is made later to the camera, it will also be necessary to run this script again so
the camera changes can be taken into account by the Dentascan software.
D Run the installation script (if applicable, see Note above):
./installcamera.denta [Return]
D To validate the package, logout, and login again as sdc.
65
REV 2 sm 2381096–100

INSTALLATION
6-15 Installing OTHER application package using EASY–INSTALL (Cdrom)

The following procedure is a COMMON procedure which describes how to install Advanced
applications delivered on a Cdrom media.
Password : adw4.2 [Return]
Note: DO NOT login as “root” to install the software. The installation procedure may appear to work,
but you will not be able to start any of the software packages.
D Select Install package from the Service menu:
The package installation window pops up.

Easy install
Installation on workstation ’hostname’

........................
A – For Software preloaded on the Hard disk
Hard disk
CDRom
Contents Driver Hard disk
Floppy
Install Quit
D Click on Hard disk / Floppy / Cdrom button and select CDROM from the pull down menu.
66
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
INSTALLATION
D Insert the Licence key diskette into the drive.
D Insert the appropriate ”Advanced Application” software CDROM into the drive.
D Click on the Contents button.
The Application Package name appears in the window. A new window pops up:
Installation on Workstation ’hostname’
Package Name
Eject CDRom Driver CDRom
Install Quit
Note: If the following window pops up, you probably have selected the wrong media (Floppy /
Cdrom), or the concerned drive is defective.
Notice Notice
! Malformed package ! Error : Cannot access to media
OK OK
D Click on the Install button.

A ”password” window like the following window pops up if the Configuration diskette containing the
Option package key has not been inserted into the Floppy drive, so that you type in the Licence key
manually.
”Application name” D Click into the password field and type

in the key corresponding to the
package you want to install.
Security Key
D Click on OK to accept the

OK Abort Licence key installation.
67
REV 2 sm 2381096–100

INSTALLATION
For certain packages, the following window pops up.
Language
English
OK Abort
D Select the language by clicking on the button located into the language field, then click on OK to
continue.
At this point, a number of messages are printed on the screen which tell the operator what is going on.
Note: Applications check that the package is not already present on the hard disk, and if so, warn
you in order not to overwrite a posterior release. See example below.
The Application version to be installed is

ANTERIOR to the version already installed . XXXX YYYY
XXXX
Make sure before you accept to overwite,
that this is really what you want to do !!!
D Click on OK. Installation will complete

Start installation
..................
End installation
.................
D Click on Eject CDRom , then click on Quit unless you want to install another package.
Do not forget to restart the browser to

declare your new installed option D Click on OK to exit
OK
D The ”Application Name” software is now installed. Select Restart Software from the System menu
button, to validate the option.
The Application is available through a new ”Application” button located the Applications window.
14
68
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
JOB CARD IST 006 – Postscript and DICOM Printers Installation
INSTALLATION
Time: 0 h 30 min per Printer – Personnel: 1 field engineer 1 of 8
PART 1: NETWORK POSTSCRIPT PRINTERS
1 SUPPLIES
Supported Networks Postscript printers are:
Codonics NP1660 M or NP 1660 MD ; Codonics Horizon
Seiko 1720D ; Kodak DMI 3600 ; Tally T8106 ; HP LaserJet ; Xerox Phaser
Lexmark 1650N ; Lexmark C710n ; Lexmark C720N ; Lexmark T612 ; Lexmark T614 ; Lexmark
SC1275N ; Lexmark Optra S1855N.
QMI GL2101HD Film/ThickPager ; QMI GL2101HD Plain Paper
Note: If your site has purchased the Dicom option for the Codonics NP1660MD and the Seiko
1720D printers, you may skip to PART2: DICOM PRINTERS installation.
2 TOOLS REQUIRED
None.
None.
4 PREREQUISITES
Advantage workstation is configured.
Network Printers are connected to the Network and operational (see Chapter 8 for set–up
information).
Make sure the following information is available before starting to install your color printer:
(This information can be obtained from the Network Administrator of the Hospital.
D Internet address of Network printer(s).
D Hostname of Network printer(s).
This procedure does not describe how to connect the Network Printer(s) to the network, which is
assumed to be already installed.
CAUTION
The Network printer cannot receive images directly from the Image source
system.
It can only print images that are produced by the AW software.
69
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
JOB CARD IST 006 – Postscript and DICOM Printers Installation 2 of 8

INSTALLATION
5 PROCEDURE
5-1 Testing the Network Connection to the Network Printer

Once the Network printer is connected to the network and set with an IP address (refer to Chapter 8,
for details), the Network printer should respond to TCP/IP messages from another Host on the
network. Before logically installing the Network printer on AW, check the following items:
Color printer
D The color printer is turned on and the front panel ”POWER” button is on.
D The front panel on the color printer displays ”READY”, and the correct IP address for the color
printer is set in the color printer. Refer to Chapter 8, Section 12.
Greyscale printer
D The Greyscale printer is connected to the network, through the RJ45 cable. The printer is turned
on and the front panel ”POWER” button is on.
D The front panel on the Greyscale printer displays ”READY”.
Refer to Chapter 8, Section 13.
D Go to the Advantage workstation and login as root:

console login: root [Return]
Password: operator [Return] (factory loaded default root password)
D Type in the following command:
ping <IP_address_of_network_printer> [Return]
i.e.: ping 192.100.9.5 [Return]
<IP address of Network printer> is alive
Note: Do not enter leading zeros in any of the four numeric fields separated by dots of the IP
address.
e.g.: do not type in 192.100.009.005, but type 192.100.9.5 instead.
This ”alive” answer from the system means that the Network printer can be reached from the
Advantage Workstation system through the network.
If the system displays ”unknown host”, your color printer may not be correctly declared on the network.
Do the steps described in Chapter 8 again.
If the system displays ”Network unreachable”, you probably have given the printer an IP address
incompatible with your Advantage workstation’s IP address. Check that they belong to the same
network, 192.100.9.X, for example.
D Logout.
70
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
INSTALLATION
5-2 Network Printer Installation
D Login as sdc, if not already logged in as sdc:
console login: sdc [Return]
Password: adw4.2 [Return] (factory loaded default sdc password)
D When AW4.1 has completed its startup, click on the Admin button, then on the Command Window
button to open a Command Window:
Note: It is suggested that you move this window to the lower right corner of the screen so that it
does not get overwritten by AW pop-up windows.
D Switch user to root:
Password : operator [Return]
D Change to the sdc install directory:
D Run the printers installation script:
./install.printers [Return]
CAUTION
This script allows you to install several printers. For this reason, it has been
renamed from install.printer (previous versions of AW) to install.printers.
Do you want to install new printer(s) [y,n,?,q] y [Return]

Define the local name of the printer [?,q] <printer1–name> [Return]
At this point, you should give the name you have chosen for your printer. It can be the same as the
network Hostname of your printer but it is not mandatory.
Installing Printer
Printer model
1 c Codonics (1660M 1660MD)
2 h Codonics Horizon
3 hp HP LaserJet
4 k Kodak (DMI 3600)
5 l Lexmark (Optra 1650N 1855N SC1275N C710n C720N T612 T614)
71
REV 2 sm 2381096–100

INSTALLATION
6 qf QMI GL2101HD Film/ThickPaper

7 qp QMI GL2101HD Plain Paper
8 s Seiko (1720D)
9 t Tally (T8106)
10 x Phaser Xerox
Enter selection [?,??,q]: 5 [Return] (e.g.: you are selecting a Lexmark printer)
Printer type
1 c Colour printer
2 g Greyscale printer
Enter selection [?,??,q]: 2 [Return] (e.g.: you are selecting a greyscale printer)
Printer format
1 a Letter (or A for Codonics)
2 a4 A4
Enter selection [?,??,q]: 2 [Return] (e.g.: you are selecting A4 format)
Printer internet (IP) address [?] e.g.: 192.9.100.6 [Return]
Printer hostname [?] e.g.: lexmark–1 [Return]
Note: Just make sure to use a hostname with less than 10 characters, and avoid special characters
else than the – and _ signs.
Checking if lexmark–1 is alive ...
......................
lexmark–1: lpd: scaled: unknown printer
*** WARNING : Greyscale Printer (lexmark–1 is installed but not idle . ***
Do you want to install new printer(s) [y,n,?,q]
Type y [Return] if you want to declare another printer. The same set of questions will be asked or the
next printer.
Type n [Return] to exit.
Note: If message...
install.printer error : <printer_host_name> not responding ...
Printer *Greyscale Printer (printer_name)* installation aborted
... the printer is not responding. You must check that it is connected to the network
and properly configured.
D Switch user back to sdc:
exit [Return]
The workstation is now configured for one optional Network printer operation.
Install other postscript printers the same way then click on Restart AW button to validate the
installation of the printer(s).
72
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
INSTALLATION
PART 2: DICOM PRINTERS
Note: The Dicom Print software is part of the AW basic features. Therefore it does not require any
software License key.
D Click on the Tools button in the bottom left corner of the Browser. This will open a Menu displaying
the available applications.
Tools Patient List

Preferences
Set Exam
Admin Anonymous
One Touch
Manager
System
Network
Manager
Printer
Manager
Log out
D Click on the Printer Manager button.

The Dicom Printer selection window pops up.
Printer Manager
Modify, add or remove printers
Select DICOM printer :
Close Modify Add Remove
D Fill in the different fields following the information given by the Dicom Printer manufacturer.
click on Add button

Dicom Printer parameters window pops up
73
REV 2 sm 2381096–100

INSTALLATION
Define new printer parameters

DICOM printer label :
Hostname :
Application Entity Title (AET) :
Network address :
Port number :
Layouts :
3x5 4x5
4x4 4x6
Slide formats : 35mm 40mm

12 bits image supported :
Colour supported :
Film size :
8 in x 10 in W H 14 in x 17 in W H
8_5 in x 11 in W H 24 in x 24 in W H
10 in x 12 in W H 24 cm x 30 cm W H
10 in x 14 in W H A4 W H
11 in x 14 in W H A3 W H
11 in x 17 in W H A W H
14 in x 14 in W H
Printer pixel size (micron) : Letter Format
Configuration information :
Density : Min Max
Magnification type : None
Smoothing factor : REPLICATE
BILINEAR
Trim : No CUBIC
Printer memory size : NONE
MBytes
Cancel Clear Save
D Enter the Dicom Printer parameters, as defined by the Vendor’s Printer Dicom conformance
statement.
74
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
INSTALLATION
Note: The Dicom Printer Label (name you want to give to your printer) is at your own choice.
– 12 bits image supported : Not used for AW application.
– Pixel depth and Printer pixel size: Not used for AW application.
– Density: AW application uses this information if supplied for your camera, and entered in the
corresponding fields. In the other case, leave the fields blank.
– Configuration information: (i.e.: PERCEPTION_LUT=LINEAR):
Allows to select the LUT of the printer instead of the default AW LUT
D Finally click on Save to update and Quit.
The following information is available from the Codonics and Seiko manufacturers, but is subject to
change without notice, so it is given as information only. Please check with the camera vendor.
Codonics NP 1660 MD:
Application Entity Title (A.E.T): PRINT_SCP
Port number: 104
Medium: Paper or Blue Film
Destination: Magazine
Film size: 8 x 10
Film format: Select all formats
Seiko 1720 D:
Application Entity Title (A.E.T): 1720D–1 to 1720D–16
Port number: 104
Medium: Paper
Destination: Magazine
Film size: 8 x 10
Film format: Select all formats
Once created, the printers logical devices can be found under the following directories:
D Dicom Printers :
cd /export/home/sdc/Prefs [Return]
i.e : more printer1.dev [Return]
set dUid ”/export/home/sdc/Prefs/printer1.dev”
set dName ”printer1”
set dType dicom
set dColour greyscale
set dQueueType DICM
set dQueueName ”dicom”
props canDoSaveOnDisk
props canDoMultiCopies
props canDoCustomResolution
.........................................
set defaultFormat 1x1_fid
75
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
15
INSTALLATION
pformat 1x1_fid
set filmingMode FittedSize
pfilmingMode FittedSize
set printerMemorySize 20971520
D Postscript Printers :
cd /export/home/sdc/app–defaults/devices [Return]
i.e : more lexmark.dev [Return]
more lexmark.dev
set dName ”lexmark”
set dType postscript2
set dColour greyscale
set dQueueType LP
set dQueueName lexmark
# Options
props canDoMultiCopies
props canDoCustomResolution
# List of supported formats
set defaultFormat 2x2_fid
pformat 1x1_fid
pformat 2x1_fid
.........................
pformat 5x4_fid
pformat 6x4_fid
set filmSize ”A4”
pfilmSize ”A4” 2560 0
set printerMemorySize ”25165824”
props canDoMixResolution
IT IS NOW TIME TO WRITE DOWN PRINTERS INFORMATION IN THE AW CONFIGURATION

FORM LOCATED AT THE BEGINNING OF THIS MANUAL.
Note: You will be invited to save later on (Job Card IST 009), the Dicom Printer parameters on the
Configuration diskette.
CAUTION
The AW Application Entity title (A.E.T) to be declared to Dicom printers (when
requested) is PR_hostname and not the Hostname of AW as for Dicom hosts.
i.e.: AW workstation hostname is AW01
AW Print AE Title is PR_AW01
CAUTION
Refer to Chapter 7 PRINTING, for detailed information concerning the supported
Dicom printers.
Also refer to the AW Dicom Conformance Statement delivered with the product.
16
76
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
JOB CARD IST 007 – Network Configuration on Image Sources
INSTALLATION
1 SUPPLIES
None.
2 TOOLS REQUIRED
None.
THE FOLLOWING MATERIAL IS INFORMATION ONLY. THE SCRIPTS USED TO DECLARE HOSTS
PROPERLY DEPEND ON THE SOFTWARE REVISION LEVEL OF EACH IMAGE SOURCE
SYSTEM.
4 PREREQUISITES
Advantage Workstation is installed and configured (IST 001 / 002).
5 PROCEDURE
Note: Refer to IST 002, Section 4-4 ”Declare Hosts on the Network” under Site configuration, for
Network Setup of Image Sources on AW.
1. AW4.2 declaration on Genesis based sources (SIGNA 5.X, MR Horizon, CT HLA/HSA...).

D See Chapter 9 – Section 1 for network exemple.
D Refer to the manuals delivered with your system.
The only protocol supported on AW4.2 is the DICOM3.0 protocol, or the IC Dicom3.0 protocol.
Refer to your Image source system service manual.
2. AW4.2 declaration on non Genesis based sources (SIGNA 4.X).

D Direct connection to the Signa 4.X is no longer supported.
3. AW4.2 declaration on CT9800 IMAGE SOURCES –– VIA CT9800–IDLINK2.

D This direct connection is NOT supported.
77
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
JOB CARD IST 007 – Network Configuration on Image Sources 2 of 2

INSTALLATION
4. AW4.2 declaration on GE DICOM Systems (DLX, CT/i, CT Synergy, MR Horizon LX, MR

Contour...) and Foreign devices using DICOM protocol.
D Refer to the manuals delivered with your system.
– The DICOM ”Application Entity Title” of the Advantage Workstation is its ”hostname”.
– The DICOM ”port number” of the Advantage Workstations is ALWAYS ”4006”.
5. AW4.2 declaration on YMS based sources (CT Sytec family, CT ProSpeed family, MR Vectra).
D See Chapter 9 – Section 1 for network exemple, and Section 2-6.
D Refer to the manuals delivered with your scanning system.
Use the DICOM3.0 protocol if availabler on your Scanning system. Otherwise, use the
AdvantageNet protocol.
– The DICOM ”Application Entity Title” of the Advantage Workstations is its ”hostname”.
6. AW4.2 declaration on AW1.2 and AW2.0.

D AW1.2, AW2.0 are not DICOM Query/Retrieve Provider.
AW4.2 is DICOM Query/Retrieve Provider.
D Use the DICOM3.0 protocol to connect to AW4.2
DO NOT use any of the SdCNet protocols !!!
– The DICOM ”Application Entity Title” of the Advantage Workstations is its ”hostname”.
7. AW4.2 declaration on AW3.1 and AW4.0.

D AW1.2, AW2.0, AW3.1 and AW4.0 are not DICOM Query/Retrieve Provider.
AW4.2 is DICOM Query/Retrieve Provider.
D Use the DICOM3.0 protocol to connect to AW4.2.
Note: On the AW4.2, you can use the SdCNet3.1 or 4.0 protocol to Query/Retrieve an AW3.1 or
an AW4.0 (which are not Dicom Query providers)
8. AW4.2 declaration on AW4.1 / 4.1P and AW4.2.

D AW4.1 and AW4.2 are DICOM Query/Retrieve Provider.
D Use the DICOM3.0 protocol to connect to AW4.2.
DO NOT use any of the SdCNet protocols !!!
17
78
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
JOB CARD IST 008 – Insite Installation
INSTALLATION
1 INSITE OVERVIEW
D Installation
The InSite software is not included in the AW4.2 system/Application software set, but must be
loaded from a separate Class–M (proprietary) CD–ROM.
This Cdrom is distributed to FEs through Tab code 1380.
However, the class A (non–proprietary) part of the software is already preloaded on the
workstation from the factory.
This can allow remote installation of the Class M package by your OLC, if the other systems
(CT, MR, etc ...) of the site are already connected through a ”Broadband connection”.
(See Renewal Parts chapter for the Part Number information). Basically, all Field Engineers
who are eligible to install Advantage Workstation are automatically sent the Class–M CDROM.
Any AW4.2 system, which has a modem physically attached to it must have a PPP (serial port) and an
IP address allocated. This PPP IP address has to be unique and is totally independent of the AW’s
LAN network address. However the LAN and the PPP IP addresses must be the same if other Hosts
will be using the modem that is physically attached to your AW to get reached by OLC (systems that
use InSite via a secondary modem must have a unique LAN IP address that will be used as PPP IP).
To allocate this address .... 2 CASES:
1) The network administrator of your site gave you a registered (unique) IP address to setup your
AW4.2 that will be used by your OLC to connect to the system through InSite as well.
2) The site has NO internet network. In this case the support center will allocate a predefined address
class A (10.xxx.yyy.zzz).
CAUTION
This installation only concerns the regular InSite software and not the
Interactive InSite (iLink). The iLink icon will remain disabled.
For iLink installation, contact your Service Marketing representative, in order to
have the appropriate license keys to enable the iLinq software.
2 SUPPLIES
Within the AW workstation delivery
D One RS–232 cable (refer to Renewal Part chapter for part number information).
To be ordered/supplied
D One ”Global Multi–Tech” modem if applicable (refer to Chapter 6 for part number information).
D inSite/iLinq v3.2 Cdrom (refer to Renewal Part chapter for part number information).
79
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
JOB CARD IST 008 – Insite Installation 2 of 16

INSTALLATION
To be supplied (hospital responsability)

D A nearby AC power outlet for the modem.
D A nearby telephone line jack.
3 TOOLS REQUIRED
D None
D Never install telephone wiring during a lightning storm.
5 HARDWARE INSTALLATION
These steps are only necessary for a direct connection through a modem
D Shutdown the workstation, and turn off power.
D Connect the RS232 serial cable to the computer serial port A or B, and connect the other end to
the back of the modem.
D Connect the line cable into the modem’s ”LINE” jack (not the ”PHONE” jack) and the other end into
a phone line wall jack.
CAUTION
There are two jacks available at the rear of the modem. One is labeled ”PHONE”,
the other one ”LINE”. The modem’s ”LINE” jack is not interchangable with the
”PHONE” jack. Be carreful then not plugging your line cable into the modem’s
”PHONE” jack.
D Connect the modem power supply cable to the back of the modem.
D Plug in the power supply cable to any open AC plug.
D Turn the modem on (first).
D Turn the workstation on.
6 SOFTWARE INSTALLATION
6-1 Prerequisites
D Case 1 : Direct connection through modem
The modem is connected to Serial port A or port B of the workstation, and powered up.
The Multitech Global modem does not require any particular hardware internal switch setting.
D Case 2 : Indirect connection through Modality
The Image Source system (CT, MR, ...) inSite ”connection” has already been checked out by your
OLC and is operational.
In this case, the AW will be ”inSiteable”, through ”telnet” remote login.
Declare the IP address of the Image source system as gateway.
80
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
INSTALLATION
D Case 3 : Direct connection through ”broadband connection ”: same subnetwork
The gateway or router is operational (ISDN, beyond modem, ...).
Declare the IP address of the ”broadband” router for the connection.
D Case 4 : Direct connection through ”broadband connection ”: different subnetwork
The gateway or router is operational (ISDN, beyond modem, ...), but is not on the same
subnetwork as the AW.
Declare the IP address of the gateway for the connection.
Refer to 2327643–100 for more information on the broadband routers/gateways
GEMS – Americas GEMS – Europe GEMS – Asia
On Line Center O.L.C.–E O.L.C.–A
Phone : 1–800–321–7937 (33) 1–3920–0007 81–426–56–0033
Fax : (414) 524–5305 (33) 1–3070–9970 81–426–56–0053
CAUTION
Case 3 & 4: The Gateway (or Router) MUST be previously declared, prior to run
the insite.config script. Refer to Chapter 9, Section 3.2–1.2 to declare the default
router, started at boot and properly backup’ed on the Configuration Cdrom.
6-2 Install Insite script

D Login as sdc. When AW has completed its startup, click on the Admin button, then on the
Command Window button to open a Command Window:
D Switch User to Root in the Command Window.

Enter the root password
D Insert the inSite/iLinq Cdrom into the drive.
D Change to the installation directory and start the installion.
6-2-1 Preload the class A package
D Preload the InSite class A package.
./preload.insite [Return]
Note: This first step needs to be done ONLY in case of software reinstallation (Load from
Cold or Load From Warm). The Insite class A package is already preloaded from the
factory.
81
REV 2 sm 2381096–100

INSTALLATION
Beginning INSITE installation ...

Uncompressing preload_linux.tar file ...
..............................
Installing InSite...
..................
Installing Backup and Restore files ..
Installing cron ...
Updating /etc/gateways file ...
********* INSITE preloaded *********
6-2-2 Load the class M package
CAUTION
If you have just preloaded InSite (step 6–2–1), you must close the previous
Command window, and open a new one. Failing to do so, you would get error
messages when running the install.insite script.
D Open a new Command Window
Switch user to root, and change to the install directory. (see 6–2)
D Load the Insite/ILinq/RCOC class M (proprietary) package
./install.insite [Return]
Note: If insite had been previously installed, you will get the following message, and have to type
okay [Return] to accept the uninstallation / reinstallation.
WARNING! This command will uninstall InSite and remove all
files in ~insite. This is a serious action!
You must enter ’okay’ in order to continue: \c
..............................
/export/home1/insite...
INSITE installed.
6-3 Set the ip_forwarding parameter to ”on”
Note: IP forwarding is intentionnaly set to OFF, in order to increase network security.
You have to set it to ON in order to allow the indirect connection.
Bypass this step if you do not intend to use the indirect connection through modem.
D Make sure you are still logged as root.
D Edit the /etc/sysctl.conf file with the Vi editor, or any other suitable editor:
vi /etc/sysctl.conf [Return]
modify the line
net.ipv4.ip_forward = 0 to net.ipv4.ip_forward = 1
Save and quit the editor :
<Esc> : wq! [Return]
D In order to allow indirect connection now, type the following command to apply the change:
sysctl –e –p /etc/sysctl.conf [Return]
The result must now show
net.ipv4.ip_forward = 1
82
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
18
INSTALLATION
6-4 insite.config script
CAUTION
At the end of this step, you will have to perform a ”Checkout ” test with your
OLC. Be prepare to call for an OLC support, with the System ID, phone number
of the modem (if applicable), or IP address of the Image Source system (in case
of remote connection).
D Switch User to Root in the Command Window (if not done already).
D Change to the installation directory and run the configuration script.
./insite.config [Return]
Sourcing ~insite/.insiterc file ...
Updating /root/.cshrc file ...
Executing configuration ...
Warning: Cannot convert string ”<Key>Escape,_Key_Cancel” to type VirtualBinding
Warning: Cannot convert string ”<Key>Home,_Key_Begin” to type VirtualBinding
Warning: Cannot convert string ”<Key>F1,_Key_Help” to type VirtualBinding
.....................................
D The following screen pops up. The user is prompted to click on DECLINE if not a GE employee or
click on ACCEPT 3 times if the user is a GE employee.
CLICK 3 TIMES
ON THE ACCEPT
BUTTON
83
REV 2 sm 2381096–100

INSTALLATION
D After ACCEPT has been clicked on three times, the main tabs are initialized.
D Your workstation must be configured to support ProDiags and Sweeps.

Click on the ProDiags tab. The ProDiags configuration window displays.
Click on Custom
D Click on the Custom button.

The Netscape Proactive Diagnostics configuration window starts loading, then displays after a few
seconds.
84
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
INSTALLATION
Click on Apply
D The following confirmation window displays. Click on Yes to accept.

Java applet Window
? Are you sure you want to apply changes ? Click on Yes
Yes No
There will be a pop–up Java applet window with a status bar during a few seconds, before the
configuration is complete.
Quit the ProDiags window when done.
CAUTION
In order to have SWEEPS operational, a DNS server must be declared on the
workstation. This should be done by your OLC.
Device connection
The next step to perform is either to configure the Modem (case 1) directly connected to your
workstation, or to configure the Network gateway/router parameters (case 2, 3 or 4).
When this is done, you will have to call your OLC for the ”checkout” phase.
The Checkout phase is a common step for the 4 cases.
Note: Bypass the Checkout phase when restoring the parameters and iLinq licenses (insite.restore)
from the floppy diskette (see section 8–2).
85
REV 2 sm 2381096–100

INSTALLATION
6-4-1 Case 1: Direct connection through modem

D Click onto ”Device Connection” tab. Make sure MODEM is selected. The Device Tab allows the
user to configure and set up the serial port and modem for use with InSite. You must set eight (8)
items for configuration to be applied. The items are: Device Connection Type, Dial–out
Prefix,, Modem Type, CPU Serial Port Name, Dialing Mode, Country, Serial
Port Speed.
1. Device Connection Type: You must be set to ”Modem” if there is a modem that is physically
attached to your AW workstation (direct connection). Select ”Network” if your AW system is
”InSiteable” through another system (indirect connection) that has been previously checked–out
by your OLC. If you choose ”Network” you will then be asked to enter the IP address of the
system that can connect to the OnLine Center (the one that has the modem physically attached to
it, and that has been previously checked out by your OLC).
2. Dial Out Prefix: You must either select a Dial Out prefix or enter a site specific one if it is not
in the list. Dial Out Prefixes may be required on some sites to get a line outside of the hospital. If
you do not need any Dial Out Prefixes at all to get the line outside, just erase the one that appears
per defaulft in the Dial Out Prefix field.
86
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
INSTALLATION
3. Dialing Mode: You must select a dialing mode Tone or Pulse. Tone is selected by default.
4. Modem Type: You must select ”MultiTech MT5634ZBA V.90” (GEMS Multi–Tech global
modem).
5. Country: You must set the country in which the site is located. ”Default – All Others” is
selected by default. If your Country is not listed in the pull down menu, then the correct selection is
”Default – All Others”.
6. CPU Serial Port Name: You must select the Serial Port Name (/dev/ttyS0 for port A or
/dev/ttyS1 for port B) that is used for the modem connection.
Note : Use Serial Port A by default.
7. CPU Serial Port Speed: You must select the CPU serial Port Speed. By default, the speed is
set to 38400 Bauds.
D After all selection is made, click onto ”Apply” button to set up the serial port and set up the
register on the modem, and store the values to the modem’s NVRAM. When the ”Apply” button
is pressed, another screen will be displayed meanwhile you should see the following status that
appears into the status area of the IIP Config window:
”Waiting for Port Monitor to become ready... The modem is ready to
accept commands...seting Modem Registers... Modem Configuration:
Completed Successfully”.
When this is done, the Checkout window pops up:
Note: Bypass the Checkout phase (click on Exit) when restoring the parameters and iLinq licenses
from the Insite backup diskette, using the script insite.restore (see section 7–2).
Click on
Checkout
Now
D Click on Checkout Now . Go to 6–4–3 : Checkout Common Steps
87
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
19
INSTALLATION
6-4-2 Case 2, 3 and 4: Broadband connection or indirect connection through modem :

D Cick onto ”Device Connection” tab. Make sure NETWORK is selected.
The Device Tab allows the user to configure and set up the Router or Gateway IP address.
D Enter the Gateway address (indirect connection through Modem) or Router address (Broadband
connection) in the Gateway to OLC address field.
– If your AW uses the indirect connection through modem, you have to enter the IP address of
the system that can connect to the OnLine Center (the one that has the modem physically
attached to it, and that has been previously checked out by your OLC).
– If your AW uses the direct connection to the Broadband router , you have to enter the IP
address of the Router system that can connect to the OnLine Center, and which has been
previously checked out by your OLC.
D After all selection is made, click onto ”Apply” button to set up the network parameters.
The following status that appears into the status area of the IIP Config window:
”Network Configuration: Completed Successfully”.
When this is done, the following window pops up:
i CAUTION: The system you entered the

Click on
OK
IP address for must complete an InSite
Checkout, before attempting an InSite
conection on this system.
OK
88
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
INSTALLATION
D Click on OK to accept.
The following window pops up:
Note: Bypass the Checkout phase (click on Exit) when restoring the parameters and iLinq licenses
from the Insite backup diskette, using the script insite.restore (see section 7–2).
Click on
Checkout
Now
D Click on Checkout Now . Go to 6–4–3 : Checkout Common Steps
6-4-3 Checkout : common steps

D At this time, you have to call your OLC, in order to run the Checkout process of the inSite link.
Note: Your OLC may at the same time download the 1 to 4 iLinq license(s), based on the level of
service contract purchased by the customer, in order to enable the iLinq/RCOC features.
The Configure Insite Now dialout test menu pops up.
Configure InSite Now
Please call your local OnLine Support Center
? to complete the InSite Checkout Process
Press OK to perform a dial out test to the OLC

after the InSite Checkout is completed
(Prefered selection) Select ”Cancel”, to
bypass the dial–out test.
Press CANCEL to bypass the dialout test
OK Cancel
89
REV 2 sm 2381096–100

INSTALLATION
Select ”Cancel”, to bypass the dial–out test.

D Once the Checkout has been successfully performed by your OLC, click on the Exit button to
close the Insite Interactive Platform configuration window
Click on
Exit
............................................
Adding insite browser in application list and adding a script to launch it
********* End of INSITE modem (or network) installation *********
Please, Restart Browser to take into account the new configuration
D Restart AW to validate the installation.
After restart completion, you should see the iLinq button activated (red) if the iLinq licenses have
been installed on your site by the OLC.
7 ILINQ & RCOC/TVA START UP

Note: The following screenshot are given for reference only, as they may vary depending on the
iLinq/RCOC releases. They are only accessible with the iLinq licenses installed.
D Click on the red iLinq button to start the iLinq application.
The iLinq Browser pops–up.
Contact GE
RCOC / TVA
90
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
20
INSTALLATION
Based on the iLinq licenses downloaded on your system, depending on the level of services
purchased for your site, you will be able to access some or all the services, as well as the Remote
Console Observation & Control / Tip Virtual Assist (RCOC/TVA) feature.
D Click on the Contact GE button. The Contact GE window pops up.
D Click on the Tip Virtual Assist button. The Tip Virtual Assist window pops up.
Preparing to start Training Mode
ATTENTION
Your GEMS Applications Specialist has launched a Tip Virtual Assist
(TVA) program that will allow access by the applications .......
....................................
Accept Cancel
D Click on the Accept button. The Remote training window pops up.
D Your iLinq and RCOC/TVA link is ready for operation. You may exit the link at this time by clicking
on the Exit Training button, then quit the iLinq Main menu.
91
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
21
INSTALLATION
8 INSITE CONFIGURATION BACKUP AND RESTORE
CAUTION
DO NOT CHANGE THE ”insite”, ”sdc”, OR ”root” PASSWORD WITHOUT
NOTIFYING YOUR SUPPORT CENTER: OLC (ON–LINE CENTER), OLC–E
(EUROPEAN SUPPORT CENTER), OLC–A (ASIA SUPPORT CENTER).
8-1 Configuration Backup on Diskette

Once the installation is completed, save the Insite parameters on a blank diskette, and store in a safe
place for future use.
D Open a Command window and type in:
cd /export/home/sdc/scripts [Return]
./insite.backup [Return]
Please enter the Insite password:
Password: 2getin [Return]
Welcome InSite
Creating the the configuration file...Ok
WARNING : The floppy content will be erased.
The floppy presently in the drive will be erased.
Do you want to continue [y,n,?,q] y [Return]
Do you want to format the floppy [y,n,?] y [Return]
mkdosfs 2.8 (28 Feb 2001)
Saving Insite configuration on floppy.
Your floppy is ready
Eject the backup diskette from the drive, and store it in a safe place.
Note: Only the installation parametres and the ”Checkout” information are backup’ed.
However the iLinq licenses are also stored on the diskette, starting the iLinq feature will fail,
as the GenII program must be downloaded again by your OLC after you have reinstalled the
software (LFC or LFW).
8-2 Configuration Restore from inSite configuration Diskette

After software reload, you may reinstall the Insite parameters and the licence keys from the diskette, if
the Checkout process and iLinq licenses have already been done once by your OLC at the time of first
InSite/iLinq installation.
passwd : operator [Return]
./insite.restore [Return]
92
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
INSTALLATION
Restoring IIP files from file:
/tmp/restore/insite.restore.3260/config_insite.Z ...
Usage: grep [OPTION]... PATTERN [FILE]...
Try ‘grep ––help’ for more information.
/export/home1/insite/classes;
Exception in thread ”main” java.lang.NoClassDefFoundError:
com/ge/med/iip/prodiags/IIPProdiScheduler OK
Restart Browser to take into account new configuration.
D Restart the Software to validate the new configuration.
Note: Only the installation parametres and the ”Checkout” information are backup’ed.
However the iLinq licenses are also stored on the diskette, starting the iLinq feature will fail,
as the GenII program must be downloaded again by your OLC after you have reinstalled the
software (LFC or LFW).
8-3 InSite uninstallation

To uninstall the inSite / iLinq applications from your AW workstation, switch User to root and run the
uninstall.insite script
passwd : operator [Return]
./uninstall.insite [Return]
\nSourcing /export/home1/insite/.insiterc file ...\n
Are you sure to uninstall insite ? (y/n) y [Return]
\nUninstalling insite configuration ...\n
....................................
Using INSITE_HOME: /export/home1/insite as found in
/export/home1/insite/.insiterc
WARNING! This command will uninstall InSite and remove all
files in ~insite. This is a serious action!
You must enter ’okay’ in order to continue: \c
Uninstalling InSite...
...Removing ALL InSite Files...
...............
\n********* Insite succesfully uninstalled *********\n
\nWarning : Restart AW to take into account this uninstallation ...
93
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
Blank page.
INSTALLATION
22
94
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
JOB CARD IST 009 – Turnover to the Customer
INSTALLATION
1 SUPPLIES
A blank CDROM or a rewritable CDROM.
2 TOOLS REQUIRED
None.
None.
4 PREREQUISITES
SCSI hardware options are installed (Job Card IST 003, IST 004).
Other options are installed (Job Card IST 005, IST 006) and the Network is configured.
5 PROCEDURE
D Login as sdc
sdc [Return]
Wait for the Patient List (Browser) window to pop up.
5-1 Reinstall setups from AW3.1 or AW4.0 upgrade

At this time, you may reinstall the compatible setups of your older AW3.1 or AW4.0 (upgraded systems
if applicable). Insert your AW3.1 or AW4.0 Configuration diskette into the drive, then open a
Command Window and type in :
D su – root [Return]
Password : Enter the root password
D /export/home/sdc/install/AWrestore all from floppy [Return]
Refer to Chapter 2 section 8 for more details on the compatible setups that can be reinstalled.
Eject the diskette when done
5-2 Demo Exam Checks

Open the Patient List (Browser) and check to see if some DEMO Exams are loaded. If not, you can
either select to install the SMPTE pattern, or refer to IST 012 to install the Demo exams.
95
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
JOB CARD IST 009 – Turnover to the Customer 2 of 10

INSTALLATION
Select some of these exams and check that they can be fully displayed with the VIEWER. Try some of
the System’s viewing functionalities and tools to make sure that your AW is fully operational.
5-3 Define User(s) Login Accounts

Select User Management Tools from the Security menu.
To access the Root menu, press simultaneously the <Alt> and <Props> keys:

Note: This tool is also accessible remotely by opening a Command window and switching to
sdc_admin as shown:
su – sdc_admin [Return]
A command window pops up with the User Management menu.
Main MENU
CONFIGURATION......................................4
=================================================================
Type 1 [Return] to enter User Management menu.
USERS MANAGEMENT
display the list of users..........................11
add a user.........................................12
remove a user......................................13
rename a user......................................14
set a user password................................15
restore users from a config cdrom..................16
=================================================================
96
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
INSTALLATION
Type 12 [Return] to create a User account.
Enter the user name [?,q] (this will be the logging name)
e.g.: dr jones [Return]
Enter the user family name [?,q]
e.g.: jones [Return]
Enter the user given name [?,q]
e.g.: jones [Return]
Enter the user midle name [?,q]
e.g.: a [Return]
Enter the user name prefix [?,q]
e.g.: b [Return]
Enter the user name suffix [?,q]
e.g.: c [Return]
Account successfully created for jones
Enter the password [?,q]

e.g.: jone1s [Return] (mute typing of the password)
Enter the password again [?,q]
e.g.: jone1s [Return] (mute typing of the password)
Enter the other users the same way and when done, type 0 to return to the Main menu or q to quit, or
2 to enter the Shared Protocols menu etc...
Note: To enter the new User account, click on Logout from Exit menu. Click on Yes button in the
pop up confirmation window and enter the User login and password in the Login window.
Note: Refer to the Operator Manual for more information about User Management, Shared
Protocols Management, Exam Codes Management and Configuration.
You may now wish to setup other parameters through the Administration Menu.
See the following examples (note that some of them have already been set up during the install.site
phase (see IST002)
Choose a command [?,??,q]: 2 [return]
SHARED PROTOCOLS MANAGEMENT
display the list of the shared protocols...........21
add a shared protocol in the library...............22
remove a shared protocol from the library..........23
rename a shared protocol in the library............24
restore shared protocols from a config cdrom.......25
EXAM CODES MANAGEMENT
display the list of the Exam Codes.................31
define new Exam Codes..............................32
remove Exam Codes definition(s)....................33
restore Exam Codes from a config cdrom.............35
97
REV 2 sm 2381096–100

INSTALLATION

CONFIGURATION
configure the autolock function....................41
configure the screen–saver function................42
configure the autodelete function..................43
D The auto–delete activity is disabled by default. Configure it if necessary: 43 [Return]
Please choose the autodelete activity ?(off/on) :[off] on [Return]
Enter the amount of free disk space under which autodelete starts (in MB) : [200] 12300 [Return]
Enter the amount of free disk space above which autodelete stops (in MB) : [400] 30000 [Return]
–––> To activate this setting, you will have to restart AW.
Note: del start=5200 (delmin) and del stop=12000 (delmax) are current values for the X4000
workstation. Use delmin=12300 and delmax=30000 for the XW8000 workstation.
D The screen–saver function is ON by default. Configure it if necessary: 42 [Return]
Please choose the screensaver activity ?(off/on) :[off] on [Return]
Please enter the screensaver delay in minutes : [5] i.e : 20 [Return]
D The autolock function is OFF by default. Configure it if necessary: 41 [Return]
Please choose the autolock activity ?(off/on) :[off] on or off [Return]
D Quit the Administration menu
Choose a command [?,??,q]: q [return]
5-4 Create a boot diskette

Once the system is installed, it is safe to create a boot diskette in order to be able to boot the
workstation in case the MBR (master boot record) would be corrupted.
Note : This is only possible with the X4000 workstation, as the kernel for the XW8000 is too
large to hold onto a floppy diskette.
In order to create a boot diskette, proceed as follows :
D Switch user to root
Enter root password
D Search for the current version of the kernel
uname –r [Return]
i.e : 2.4.18–10smp (X4000) or 2.4.18–24SGI_XFS_1.2smp (XW8000)
D Insert a blank floppy into the drive and type in :
mkbootdisk ––device /dev/fd0 <kernel version>[Return]
i.e : mkbootdisk ––device /dev/fd0 2.4.18–10smp [Return] (Linux red Hat 7.3)
i.e : mkbootdisk ––device /dev/fd0 2.4.18–24SGI_XFS_1.2smp [Return] (GEMS Linux 1.7.7)
Extract the diskette from the drive and store it in a safe place for future use.
98
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
INSTALLATION
5-5 Save all Site’s Parameters on the Configuration Cdrom
Note: The blank CD can be either a CDROM or a rewritable CDROM.

In case you want to use a non–blank rewritable CDROM media, you should erase the media
before being able writing it again. See procedure below
Procedure to erase a non–blank rewritable CD–RW before saving the configuration
To erase a non–blank rewritable Cdrom, open a Command window and type the following command.
Note that it will take about 15 to 20 minutes to erase the Cdrom.
During this time, nothing seems to be happenning. Please be patient.
D cdrecord dev=2,0,0 blank=all [Return]
.........................
Saving the configuration
Click on the Admin button, then on the Display Configuration or Save Configuration button :
This allows you to display (screen) or save on a blank Cdrom all the installed Options protection keys,
and the Hosts files to simplify a future reinstallation. Select Save Configuration at this time.
The Save Configuration on CD window pops–up.

Please enter the administrator’s password : administrator [Return]
Users to backup: sdc user1 user2 user3 usern
backup of sdc...
backup of user1...
.............
backup of usern...
..........................
Please insert a blank CD in the cd writer, and press <ENTER> [Return]
....................
99
REV 2 sm 2381096–100

INSTALLATION
Note: The following is an example, to later restore the whole configuration from the Backup Cdrom.
Click on the Admin button, then click on the AW Administration button.
Enter the Administrator’s password: administrator [Return]
From the Main Menu, type 1 [Return] to enter the User Management submenu.
Main MENU
CONFIGURATION......................................4
=================================================================
6 [Return]
WARNING: The current config will be overwritten
Please type ’restore’ then <Enter> to confirm
or just <Enter> to abort.
restore [Return]
Note: The following is an example, to later restore the Users parameters configuration from the
Backup Cdrom.
From the Main Menu, type 1 [Return] to enter the User Management submenu.
USERS MANAGEMENT
display the list of users..........................11
add a user.........................................12
remove a user......................................13
rename a user......................................14
set a user password................................15
restore users from a config cdrom..................16
=================================================================
Enter your choice or <Enter> to display the current menu [?,q] 16 [Return]
Please insert the backup CD and type <Enter> [Return]
–– List of users on cdrom ––
user1
........
usern
Please enter the name of the user to restore (or ’no user’ to finish) : user1
[Return]
restoring password for user user1 ...
restoring user user1 ...
100
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
INSTALLATION
5-6 LCD or CRT Color Monitor(s) Adjustments
D Install the SMPTE test patterns from the Admin menu. This takes a few seconds to appear in the
Patient List (Browser) window (refer to Chapter 3, section 2-7 for more information).
D Select the SMPTE MR pattern from the Browser menu by clicking on the image.
D Display the SMPTE pattern by clicking on the VIEWER button of the Browser. The correct viewing
levels are WW=100 WL=1024.
Choose the 1 x 1 format by selecting it from the Format icon on the Viewer.
Note: To display the SMPTE pattern, use the Layout Manager and drag & drop the SMPTE icon
into the 2nd screen icon.
Choose the 1 x 1 format by selecting it from the Format icon (number of images per viewport)
on the Layout Manager in order to enlarge it on the screens.
D Check for correct adjustment of linearity, brightness and contrast of the monitor. Readjust if
necessary.
For detailed instructions concerning the monitors controls, refer to the monitor’s Users manual
supplied with the monitor.
5-7 CRT Color Monitor(s) Calibration

For color calibration of the CRT monitor(s), please order tool 0155 ”CRT color analyzer” from the
”pool of tools” and refer to Service note SNIIS00–003 instructions delivered with the Tool or available
from the AW–IB web site @ http://aw–ib.euro.med.ge.com
5-8 LCD Color Monitor(s) Calibration

For color calibration of the LCD monitor(s),, please order tool 216 ”LCD color analyzer” from the
”pool of tools” and refer to Service note SNAW2002–009 and SNAW2002–012 instructions delivered
with the Tool or available from the AW–IB web site @ http://aw–ib.euro.med.ge.com
101
REV 2 sm 2381096–100

INSTALLATION
5-9 Postscript Printer(s) Checks

– Open the Filmer by clicking on the Filmer button of the Browser.
– Click on Option button to select the right type of printer (Color or Greyscale printer(s) #n).
– Select 1x1 format.
Note: The output device can be changed when images are loaded in the Film Composer if the
currently selected format is compatible with the new output device being selected.
– Move the pointer of the mouse to the displayed SMPTE image, press on the mouse left button
and slide the cursor to the Film Composer image field before releasing the mouse button.
The SMPTE pattern appears in the Film Composer image field.
– Click on the PRINT button. The message in the Film Composer ”Current Status” changes to
”Printing”.
Note: The SMPTE pattern is printed in black and white on the Color Printer. To check the color
rendering, you need to make a 3D reconstruction.
– Stop the SMPTE image VIEWER.
5-10 Dicom Print Test

– Open the Filmer by clicking on the Filmer button of the Browser.
– Click on Option button to select the right type of printer (Dicom printer #n).
– Select 1x1 format.
Note: The output device can be changed when images are loaded in the Filmer if the currently
selected format is compatible with the new output device being selected.
– Move the pointer of the mouse to the displayed SMPTE image, press on the mouse left button
and slide the cursor to the Film Composer image field before releasing the mouse button.
The SMPTE pattern appears in the Film Composer image field.
– Click on the PRINT button. The message in the Film Composer ”Current Status” changes to
”Printing”.
– Stop the SMPTE image VIEWER.
5-11 Communication Test

– Test the Ethernet connection by pulling images (or pushing from an image source). Remember
that the scanning system data base must be active, to query remote host and pull images.
The Network Icon becomes active.
102
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
INSTALLATION
6 EXAMPLE OF AW CONFIGURATION SCREEN
– Click on the Admin button and select Display Configuration. The system displays a window
containing all the configuration information of your workstation and its peripherals.
The following is a configuration example for the XW8000 workstation.
Site Identification
–––––––––––––––––––
Hospital name : BUC
Local language : english
S/N : 10334000
System ID : 72496M01
Appli. support : 01 30 70 40 40
Sales support : 06 80 55 00 13
Station Configuration
–––––––––––––––––––––
date : Mon Oct 6 15:12:44 CEST 2003
Operating system : Linux 2.4.20–19.7.smp (Red Hat Linux release 7.3 (Valhalla))
machine type : hp workstation xw8000
processor type : i686 (Intel (R) Xeon (TM) CPU 3.06GHz)
number of processors :2
processor 1 clock : 3056.494 MHz
processor 2 clock : 3056.494 MHz
graphic card number :1
graphic card 1 : nVidia Corporation Quadro4 200/400NVS (rev a3)
Memory size : 2015 MB
hostname : aw–01
Internet address : 3.249.12.110
Internet netmask : 255.255.0.0
licenseid : 610064d9
A.W. Configuration
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
Option Hard Copy lexmark (hostname lexmark)
Installed Application(s)
––––––––––––––––––––––––
Functool Performance : 2167781863 Unlimited (version 2.6.0a)
Volume Viewer : 334562377 Unlimited (version vxtl_3_0_63)
Advantage Paste : 1541108020 Unlimited (version unknown)
Advantage 3D X–Ray : 1541108532 Unlimited (version unknown)
Advantage Straight : 1765020928 Unlimited (version unknown)
Note: If only the license key has been reloaded from the Configuration Cdrom, but the application
has not been yet reinstalled, you will read (version unknown) after the the license key.
In this case, reinstall the application(s) from the concerned Application Cdrom.
103
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
23
INSTALLATION
SdC Account Configuration

–––––––––––––––––––––––––
SdC Version : AW4.2_XXXX
Software Key : 8e11fbb8
Autodelete Activity : on
Free disk space under which autodelete starts : 12300MB
Free disk space above which autodelete stops : 30000MB
Screen–saver function : on
Screen–saver delay : 5 min
Autolock function : off
The window automatically disappears after a few minutes.
IT IS NOW TIME TO COMPLETE A.W CONFIGURATION FORM LOCATED AT THE BEGINNING OF

THIS MANUAL.
ALSO MAKE SURE THAT YOU HAVE SAVED THE SITE PARAMETERS ON THE
CONFIGURATION CDROM, AS SHOWN SECTION 5, AND STORE IT TOGETHER WITH THE
SOFTWARE CDROMS AND THE SERVICE MANUAL.
24
104
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
JOB CARD IST 010 – AW Application Software Reload
INSTALLATION
Time: 0 h 30 min to several hours – Personnel: 1 field engineer 1 of 12
Before you start, you must determine if the customer requests that you reinstall the existing images,
present on both internal disks.
If it is the case, be prepared for long reinstallation time.
i.e.: it takes about 1 hour to reinstall 126 000 images (35 images per second).
1 SUPPLIES
D Advantage Workstation 4.2 CDROM.
D Advanced Applications CDROMs.
D Site Configuration CDROM.
D Demo exams CDROM(s) if necessary
D InSite Cdrom
2 TOOLS REQUIRED
None.
BEFORE YOU START, MAKE SURE YOU WILL BE ABLE TO RE–INSTALL ANY
WARNING
NON–RESIDENT SOFTWARES AND DATA SUCH AS ADVANTAGE SIM OPTION,
SO CHECK THAT YOU HAVE SAVED ALL THE NECESSARY DATA BY THE
APPROPRIATE MEANS.
D Whenever possible: save system configuration on Cdrom before: Refer to IST 009.
D Whenever possible: save InSite configuration on diskette before: Refer to IST 008 section 8.
D This procedure should only be used to reload AW application software.
It can only succeed if the O.S is fully operational and if Frame Buffers drivers and Disk Striping
software are still running properly. In this case, images can be preserved.
D In case of doubt on the OS integrity, preferably use IST 011 to reload both O.S and application
software. In this case make sure Customer did not load personal files on disk that he should save
before. All images will also be lost.
D The Site Configuration parameters (license keys, customer presets and protocols, etc ...) are
saved under the /export/home/backup directory at the beginning of the Load From Warm
procedure, and will be automatically reinstalled at the end.
Therefore the Configuration Cdrom does not need to be used, and should be considered as a
backup solution, in case all configuration parameters would not have been properly restored.
D The license keys for applications will be automatically recalled while you will be reloading the
applications from their respective Cdroms.
105
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
JOB CARD IST 010 – AW Application Software Reload 2 of 12

INSTALLATION
4 LOAD FROM WARM: RESTORE CONFIGURATION GUIDELINES

The following guidelines intend to summarize the procedures to restore the Site Configuration
parameters after Load From Warm..
Start Load From Warm

IST010 Part 1: Software reload
The configuration is saved on the
workstation hard disks, then
restored when the software reload
process has completed.
The workstation reboots
Preload all (preloadable) Applications from the Cdroms

(refer to IST010 part 2 and to the Application(s) Installation manual(s))
The license keys of the Applications purchased (and previously

installed) will appear in the Installation windows.
These applications will be reinstalled at the same time, while loading.
Other applications will simply be preloaded.
Refer to IST002: Run install.site

(option all) and check that the Site
parameters were properly reinstalled.
Refer to IST004: Install Dicom MOD

option if applicable
Run install.dicmod
Refer to IST006: Check that the

printers have been properly reinstalled.
Refer to IST008 : Proceed with InSite installation
Refer to IST009 : Turnover to Customer
106
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
25
INSTALLATION
5 PREREQUISITES
D LINUX Operating System should be installed and running on the workstation (see IST 011).
D All Site information such as Software protection keys are available on paper and/or on the
Configuration diskette.
6 LOAD FROM WARM PROCEDURE
6-1 PART 1: AW software reload

Note: AW4.2 application software is factory loaded so the following ONLY has to be done when
reinstalling or upgrading.
CAUTION
BEFORE YOU START THE AW SOFTWARE LOAD PROCEDURE, YOU MUST
POWER ON THE EXTERNAL SCSI DEVICES.
D Shutdown workstation if it is not already shutdown (Power down indicates system is shutdown):
– If you are logged in as ”sdc” and AW is running, you can click on the ”shutdown” button
available on the browser in tools menu.
– If you are logged in as ”root”, open an Xterm from the Workspace menu called Root Menu,
(press on the left button of the mouse and select Xterm), then type in :
init 0 [Return]
D Make sure that the external SCSI devices are turned on.
D Turn on and reboot workstation.
Wait for boot completion.
D Login as root
<hostname> console login: root [Return]
Password: operator [Return]
CAUTION
!!! DO NOT RUN THE install.aw SCRIPT LOGGED IN AS sdc OR AS ANY OTHER
USER !!! LOGIN AS root TO PERFORM install.aw SCRIPT!!!
The Windows Manager is starting.

D Open an XTerm from the Root menu
D Type the following command to go to installation directory:
cd /export/home [Return]
D Insert the AW application CDROM into drive.
D Run Advantage Workstation installation script
./install.aw [Return]
WARNING : You are about to reinstall AW software.
If the release is on a CDROM, just press <ENTER>.
Otherwise, please enter the path of the directory containing the rpm
packages or enter q to quit
107
REV 2 sm 2381096–100

INSTALLATION
D Press [Return]
Note: If message /export/home/install.aw: Command not found pops up, it will not be possible to
successfully complete this procedure. Do the Load From Cold procedure as shown in Job
Card IST 011 instead.
Note: If the Application CDROM is not already inserted into the drive, the following text appears:
Please wait .....................
*** ERROR : CDROM not found. Try again...
Please insert Application CDROM and type y when ready [y,?,q] :
y [Return]
Note: If you typed q (for quit) the following text appears:

cdrom: No such file or directory
........................
INSTALLATION ABORTED : CONSULT YOUR SERVICE MANUAL.
........................
Restart installation by typing the command : ./install.aw [Return]
Note: If a wrong CDROM is inserted instead of Application software, the following text appears:
Please wait ..........
*** ERROR : Missing file(s) on CDROM media.
Check that the loaded CDROM is the one of the Application.
Would you like to try again [y,n,?,q]
Replace the wrong Cdrom by the Application Cdrom and type: y [Return]
The install.packages script then starts to install the AW software:
The screen turns dark and displays a rolling ball
CAUTION
LEAVE THE MOUSE IDDLE DURING INSTALLATION OF THE PACKAGES IN
ORDER TO AVOID POTENTIAL SYSTEM CRASH.
When the AW software reload process has completed, the system shutdowns and reboot.
Note: You can review the installation logfiles later by typing the command:
more /export/home/installaw.log [Return]
The CDROM is ejected. The installation is now complete. The system shutdowns.
Advantage Workstation Operating System and AW basic software are now loaded.
Proceed now with the next step:
Applications software preload / install.
D Reboot the workstation and start AW application.
108
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
INSTALLATION
6-2 PART 2: Advanced applications software preload / install
D Volume Viewer Applications vxtl_3.0.64m CDROM (or up).
D Functional Analysis Applications v2.6.6 CDROM (or up).
D Fusion Applications fus_1_0_56 CDROM (or up).
D Xray Applications 2353833–2 CDROM (or up).
D Smartscore v 3.5–L–4011 CDROM (or up).
D MR Pasting v 1.1.3 CDROM (or up).
1. Login as sdc if not already logged in as sdc:

2. Select Install package from the Services menu in the Browser.
6-2-1 Volume Viewer Applications preload / install

3. Insert the Volume Viewer software CDROM into the drive.
109
REV 2 sm 2381096–100

INSTALLATION
The Easy Install window pops up.

Easy install

........................
........................
........................
........................ Hard disk
CDRom
Floppy
Driver Hard disk
Contents
Install Quit
4. Move the arrow to Driver Hard disk / Floppy / CDRom button and select CDROM.
5. Click on Contents button. The name and version of the software contained in the CD–ROM
appears in the Easy Install window.
The installation window is updated and the Install is enabled and the Contents button changes
to Eject CDRom .

Note: If any of the following windows
Installation of ’Volume Viewer Ap- pop–up, you probably have selected
plications’ software for AW4.2 the wrong media (Floppy / Hard
Disk) or the concerned drive is
Press ’Install’ button to install defective
it or ’Eject’ to cancel.
Notice
version : vxtl_X.XX
! Malformed package
OK
Notice
Eject CDRom Driver CDRom ! Error : Cannot access to media
Install Quit OK
At this point, you can directly install one or several Volume Viewer Applications using the Licence keys
stored onto the Configuration Cdrom. If you have not restored the configuration from the Site
Configuration cdrom (PART 2), the applications will be simply preloaded on the workstation.
6. Click on the Install button.
110
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
INSTALLATION
The following window pops up.
Volume Viewer Applications Installation

Select the applications you want to install :
xxxxxxxxxx
Volume Viewer
Advanced Vessel Analysis xxxxxxxxxx
CT Colonography xxxxxxxxxx
Advanced Lung Analysis xxxxxxxxxx
CardIQ2 xxxxxxxxxx
CardEP xxxxxxxxxx
Autobone xxxxxxxxxx
The Volume Analysis is not installed on this machine

The version that will be installed is X.XX
Reload Software OK Abort

License keys
Note: Volume Viewer for AW4.2 is NOT automatically enabled and therefore requires a Licence key.
Volume Viewer is a pre–requisite to run the other Volume Viewer applications.
7. If you have restored (PART 2) the configuration from the Site Configuration cdrom, the previously
installed applications license keys will be displayed in the corresponding license fields.
Click on the OK button. The applications selected (whose license keys are in the corresponding
licence fields) will be reinstalled. The other non–selected will simply be preloaded onto your
workstation’s hard disk.
This will allow to have all the above mentioned Applications ready to be installed from the Hard
disk, any time when needed.
================== Start Install ======================
Build packages ...
..................
./install/installreport–root.ala
./install/install.ava
...................................
..................................................
Setting up Volume Viewer environment
.....................................
’Volume Viewer’ package is now installed.
To actually run the package, restart the browser.
CD Installation finished !
=================== End Install =======================
You can now quit this installation tool.
Then, restart the browser to declare newly installed applications.
8. When the installation is finished, click on Eject CDROM to eject the CDROM from the drive.
Proceed with the preload/install of the next Applications Cdrom.
111
REV 2 sm 2381096–100

INSTALLATION
6-2-2 Functional Analysis Applications preload / install

1. Insert the Functional Analysis software CDROM into the drive.
2. Make sure that Hard disk / Floppy / CDRom button still has CDROM selected.
Easy install

........................
........................
........................
........................ Hard disk
CDRom
Floppy
Driver CDRom
Contents
Install Quit
to Eject CDRom .
Installation on Workstation ’hostname’ Note: If any of the following windows
pop–up, you probably have selected
the wrong media (Floppy / Hard
FuncTool and CT Perfusion applications Disk) or the concerned drive is
Notice
version : X.XX ! Malformed package
target : AW4.2 (linux)
OK
Notice
Install Quit OK
At this point, you can directly install one or several Functional Analysis Applications using the Licence
keys stored onto the Configuration Cdrom. If you have not restored the configuration from the Site
4. Click on the Install button. The following window pops up.
112
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
26
INSTALLATION
FuncTool and CT Perfusion Installation

CT Perfusion 2 xxxxxxxxxx
CT Perfusion 3 (Neuro) xxxxxxxxxx
CT Perfusion 3 (Body) xxxxxxxxxx
CT Perfusion 3 (Multi–organs) xxxxxxxxxx
Functool Performance xxxxxxxxxx
Functool Spectroscopy xxxxxxxxxx
Functool Diffusion Tensor xxxxxxxxxx
Functool / CT Perfusion is not installed on this machine

New Functool / CT Perfusion version is X.XX

License keys
================== Start Install ======================

Extracting packages...
x ., 0 bytes, 0 tape blocks
x fctlNUI.tar.gz,
x install/install.ctperf2
..........................
x install/install.fctl2
x install/install.fctlmrsi
...........................
CD Installation of FuncTool and CT Perfusion Applications ...

CD Installation successful.
=================== End Install =======================
113
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
27
INSTALLATION
6-2-3 Fusion Applications preload / install

1. Insert the Fusion Applications software CDROM into the drive.
Easy install

........................
........................
........................
........................ Hard disk
CDRom
Floppy
Driver CDRom
Contents
Install Quit
to Eject CDRom .
Installation on Workstation ’hostname’ AW Note : If any of the following windows
Fusion for Avantage Windows the wrong media (Floppy / Hard
Press ’Install’ button to ....... Disk) or the concerned drive is defec-
................................. tive
Version : X_XX
Notice
! Malformed package
OK
Notice
! Error : Cannot access to media
Install Quit OK
At this point, you can directly install one or several Fusion Applications using the Licence keys stored
onto the Configuration Cdrom. If you have not restored the configuration from the Site Configuration
cdrom (PART 2), the applications will be simply preloaded on the workstation.
114
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
28
INSTALLATION
Advantage Fusion Applications Installation

Fusion xxxxxxxxxx
CT/PET Fusion xxxxxxxxxx
XA/MR Fusion xxxxxxxxxx
No Fusion application is installed on this machine


License keys
================== Start Install ======================

x fusion.tar.gz,
x install/install.fusion
x install/install.ctpet fusion
..........................
...........................
x install/uninstall.fusion
x install/uninstall.ctpet fusion
...........................
CD Installation of Fusion Applications ...

=================== End Install =======================
115
REV 2 sm 2381096–100

INSTALLATION
6-2-4 XRay Analysis Applications preload / install

1. Insert the XRay Analysis software CDROM into the drive.
Easy install

........................
........................
........................
........................ Hard disk
CDRom
Floppy
Driver CDRom
Contents
Install Quit
to Eject CDRom .
Installation of X–Ray applications Disk) or the concerned drive is
or ’Eject’ to cancel.
Advantage Paste version : X.XX Notice
Advantage 3D XR version : X.XX ! Malformed package
Adv 3D XR coils&clips version : X.XX
Advantage Straight version : X.XX OK
Notice
Install Quit OK
At this point, you can directly install one or several X–Ray Applications using the Licence keys stored
116
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
29
INSTALLATION
X–Ray Applications Installation
Only selected applications are installed :

Advantage Paste Auto–start xxxxxxxxxx
Advantage 3D XR xxxxxxxxxx
Advantage 3D XR Coils Clips xxxxxxxxxx
Advantage Straight xxxxxxxxxx
All applications are preloaded.

Only selected applications are installed.

License keys
================== Start Install ======================

Build packages...
..................
x install/description.paste
x install/description.spin3d
x install/description.spin3dcoil
..........................
...........................
CD Installation of X–Ray Applications ...

CD Installation finished.
=================== End Install =======================
117
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
30
INSTALLATION
6-2-5 Smartscore preload / install

1. Insert the Smartscore software CDROM into the drive.
to Eject CDRom .
SmartScore Cardiac Calcification Scoring Version 3.XX
defective
Notice
! Malformed package
OK
Notice
Contents Driver CDRom ! Error : Cannot access to media
Install Quit OK

Enter the SmartScore application key code for this workstation,
or enter 0 and insert a key diskette.
To simply preload the Application,

erase the ”0” and type in preload
installed application license key will be displayed in the license field.
Click on the OK button. The application selected will be reinstalled.
In the other case, it can be preloaded onto your workstation’s hard disk. This will allow to have the
Application ready to be installed from the Hard disk, any time when needed.
Move the mouse cursor into the ”software Key” field, erase the ”0” (zero) and type in: preload
================== Start Install ======================
118
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
31
INSTALLATION
No match
copying package to AW....
SmartScore package preloaded
=================== End Install =======================
You can now quit this intallation tool.
Proceed with the preload of the next Applications Cdrom.
7. When the installation is finished, click on Quit.
The Cdrom is ejected and the following Warning window pops up. Click on OK to close.
Do not forget to restart the Browser to de-

i clare your new installed option
OK
8. Restart the software from the Exit menu.
Advantage Workstation basic software and Applications software are now loaded /
installed.
Proceed now with the next step: InSite class A software preload.
6-3 PART 3: InSite class A software preload

Preload the InSite class A software from your InSite/iLinq/RCOC Cdrom, even though you do not
intend to connect your site through InSite at this time.
Preloading the class A (non–proprietary) package, will allow OLC to download the class M
(proprietary) package at any time when needed in the future.
Note: Insert the InSite class A Cdrom (2399064) or FE proprietary class A/classM Cdrom
(2396485–248), if you have loaded the AW4.2_03.10_EXT release , using the 2 LINUX RED
HAT 7.3 CDROM #1 (2381110) and CDROM #2 (2381111) and AW4.2_03.10_EXT Kickstart
floppy diskette (2381109–2)
Note: Insert the InSite class A Cdrom (2399064–2) or FE proprietary class A/classM Cdrom
(5111058–248), if you have loaded the AW4.2_04.10_EXT Cdrom, using the GEMS Linux
1.8.12 CDROM (5111059) without Kickstart diskette.
119
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
32
INSTALLATION

./preload.insite [Return]
iip–dist.tar
Uncompressing Insite installation files ...
.insiterc.local
iipadmin
..............................
..................
Installing insite.config ...
Installing cron ...
7 SITE PARAMETERS AND OPTIONS REINSTALLATION CHECKS

Refer to Job Card IST 002 for Site parameters and Network Hosts reinstallation checks.
Refer to Job Card IST 003 for connection of the SCSI hardware options.
Refer to Job Card IST 004 for SCSI harware options reinstallation checks.
Refer to Job Card IST 005 for Applications reinstallation checks.
Refer to Job Card IST 006 for Printers reinstallation checks.
Refer to Job Card IST 007 for Network hosts reinstallation checks.
Refer to Job Card IST 008 for InSite/iLinq/RCOC installation.
Refer to Job Card IST 009 for Turnover To Customer checks.
33
120
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
JOB CARD IST 011 – Load from Cold

Time: 1 h 30 min – Personnel: 1 field engineer
INSTALLATION
1 of 24
1 FOREWORD
Advantage workstation are delivered with LINUX Operating System and AW4.2 application software
loaded from factory. Most current Applications, as well as InSite Class A (non–proprietary) software
are also preloaded from the factory.
The procedure described here should only be used in case of software reload. In this case, the
operating system is first loaded from the LINUX CDROMs, then patches and Application software are
loaded from the Application CDROM.
If you have the Site Configuration Cdrom available, you will be prompted to insert it, and the Site’s
parameters (License keys, customer’s presets and protocols, etc ..) will be automatically reinstalled.
Finally, you will have to reload and install the Applications from their respective Cdroms.
2 TOOLS REQUIRED
UP TO THE AW4.2_03.10_EXT RELEASE, THE LINUX RED HAT 7.3 OPERATING
WARNING
SYSTEM CDROMS #1 AND #2 MUST BE USED AND THE KICKSTART DISKETTE
IS NECESSARY.
D LINUX RED HAT 7.3 CDROM #1 (P/N: 2381110) and CDROM #2 (2381111)
D AW4.2_03.10_EXT Kickstart floppy diskette (2381109–2)
D AW4.2_03.10_EXT CDROM (2381104–2).
D InSite class A Cdrom (2399064) or FE proprietary class A/classM Cdrom (2396485–248)
OR
FROM AW4.2_04.10_EXT RELEASE, THE GEMS LINUX 1.8.12 OPERATING

WARNING
SYSTEM MUST BE USED AND THE KICKSTART DISKETTE IS NO LONGER
NECESSARY.
D GEMS Linux 1.8.12 CDROM (P/N: 5111059)
D AW4.2_04.10_EXT_EXT CDROM (2381104–3).
D InSite class A Cdrom (2399064–2) or FE proprietary class A/classM Cdrom (5111058–248)
AND
D Advanced Applications CDROMs.
D Site Configuration CDROM.
3 PREREQUISITES
Before you start, make sure you will be able to re–install any non–resident
WARNING
softwares and data such as Advantage SIM option, so check that you have
saved all the necessary data by the appropriate means. Refer to the appropriate
Service Manuals of these options for details.
121
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
JOB CARD IST 011 – Load from Cold 2 of 24

INSTALLATION
D Before starting the installation, make sure that the following information is available (see AW
Configuration Form at beginning of manual or Chapter 3, Section 2-1-12) :
– Hostname of workstation.
– Internet Protocol Address of workstation.
– Netmask Value (if applicable) of workstation.
– AW Software Licence key.
D Whenever possible: save system configuration on CDROM before proceeding. Refer to IST 009.
D Whenever possible: save InSite configuration on diskette before: Refer to IST 008 section 8.
IF YOU ARE WISHING TO RESTORE THE CONFIGURATION CDROM FROM AN

WARNING
UPGRADE (I.E: UPGRADE FROM AW4.1), MAKE SURE THAT YOU KEEP THE
SAME IP ADDRESS AND HOSTNAME, TO AVOID SYSTEM DISCREPANCIES.
i.e:
your AW4.1 hostname was ADW01 and IP address was 192.10.56.3
your AW4.2 hostname MUST BE ADW01 and IP address MUST BE 192.10.56.3
Failing to do so would corrupt your /etc/hosts file. You may face problems with the HTTP Server or
some other Network problems, because the old host file is restored from the Configuration Cdrom
You may change later on the IP address and hostname using the sys–reconfig script (see chapter 3,
section 2)
122
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
INSTALLATION
4 LOAD FROM COLD: RESTORE CONFIGURATION GUIDELINES
The following guidelines intend to summarize the procedures to restore the Site Configuration
parameters after Load From Cold. Choose the ”preferred procedure” if you have a Configuration Cdrom
available for your site.
Start Load From Cold

IST011 Part 1: Software reload
At the question: ”Do you want to restore the

Configuration from a Cdrom ? (y/n)”
Preferred Procedure
Yes Restore No
configuration
?
Insert the Site Configuration No Site Configuration cdrom is
Cdrom and type: y [Enter] available, or you want to restore
the Site parameters later
type: n [Enter]
The configuration is restored from

the Cdrom, and the software reload Answer to the following questions
process gets completed. when prompted:
– AW software key
– Language
– Number and type of monitors
The software reload process

gets completed.
The workstation reboots
Preload all (preloadable) Applications from the Cdroms

(refer to IST011 part 2 and to the Application(s) Installation manual(s))
The license keys of the Applications Applications will be simply proloaded, un-
purchased (and previously installed) will less you enter at this time the license keys
appear in the Installation windows. of those which have been purchased by the
These applications will be reinstalled at the site..
same time, while loading.
Other applications will simply be preloaded.
A B
123
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
34
INSTALLATION
A B
Preferred Procedure Insert the Site Configuration

(continued) Cdrom now (if available)
If the Site Configuration Cdrom

is available :
Select from Admin button the
AW Administration submenu.
Enter password : administrator
select option 6 (Restore the whole
config from cdrom)
If the Configuration Cdrom is not
available , you will have to enter
all Site parameters manually.
Refer to IST002: Run install.site Refer to IST002: Reinstall Site

(option all) and check that the Site parameters manually.
parameters were properly reinstalled. Run install.site (option all)
Refer to IST004: Install Dicom MOD Refer to IST004: Install Dicom MOD
option if applicable option if applicable
Run install.dicmod Run install.dicmod
Refer to IST006: Check that the Refer to IST006: Reinstall the Dicom
printers have been properly reinstalled. Printers, then run the install.printers
script to reinstall the Postscript printers.
Refer to IST008 : Proceed with InSite installation
Refer to IST009 : Turnover to Customer
124
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
35
INSTALLATION
5 PROCEDURE
Note: The Kickstart diskette should be used ONLY up to the AW4.2_03.10_EXT release
5-1 Load From Cold PART 1: Software reload

D Insert the kickstart diskette (up to AW4.2_03.10_EXT) into the floppy drive of the workstation.
D Switch on the workstation.
D Insert the LINUX RED HAT 7.3 CDROM #1 (up to AW4.2_03.10_EXT) or GEMS Linux 1.8.12
(from AW4.2_04.10_EXT) CDROM media into the CDROM drive.
D Reset the workstation by pressing on the Reset button of the workstation.
The systems starts the Power On Selft Tests.
D Press on the <Esc> key when prompted.
– Check that the Firmware version is 1.14 (X4000).
– Check that the BIOS version is IU.W1.15US (X4000) or JQ.W1.09US (XW8000).
or JQ.W1.11US (XW8000 from AW4.2_04.10_EXT release)
If not, you must ”flash” the Firmware and BIOS before going any further.
Refer to Chapter 4, TSG 012.
This can be the case after replacement of the workstation, for instance.
– Make sure the Main tab is selected and change the Reset configuration Data from its
default value [No], to [Yes], following the instructions given in the setup menu.
Note that the consecutive boot up will take longer, time for the system to scan for new
hardware devices.
– Also make sure (XW8000) that the Installed O/S parameter is set to [Other/NT/Linux], and
that Legacy USB Support is set to disabled. (see Chap 4, TSG012 section 5 for details)
The system settings display, followed by hard disks size, memory size and other information on the
internal hardware devices.
5-1-1 Steps for AW4.2 workstation up to AW4.2_03.10_EXT release
(using LINUX RED HAT 7.3 CDROM #1 (2381110) and CDROM #2 (2381111) and AW4.2_03.10_EXT
Kickstart floppy diskette (2381109–2)
The LINUX RED HAT 7.3, Welcome Menu displays:
Welcome to Red Hat Linux 7.3 kickstart for Advantage Workstation
Version : AW4.2_XXXX
To automatically install RedHat Linux for Advantage Workstation,
Insert the first Red Hat Linux 7.3 CDROM provided by HP and enter the type of
the station.
Supported stations are x4000 xw8000
125
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
36
INSTALLATION
WARNING : Please note that ALL THE DATA ON ....

You will have to remove the floppy at the end ...
.........................
In this case, remove the floppy and the CDROM now, and press <Enter> twice.
boot :
D At the boot : prompt, type:

boot : x4000 [Enter] to install on the HP X4000 workstation or
xw8000 [Enter] to install on the HP XW8000 workstation
Loading initrd.img ....
Loading vmlinuz ....
......
Lots of messages are displayed. Then the Windows Manager is starting.

Welcome to Red Hat Linux
Loading SCSI drivers .....

...........................
Note: If you have NEC LCD monitor(s), you will get the ”Resolution Notifier” screen popping up
regularly. This message screen is cleared automatically after a while.
The Red Hat installation screen pops up.
Red Hat Linux installation Manager
Installing Packages
Installing Pack- Package : XXXX
ages
Package Progress :
We have gathered Total Progress :
....
.................. Status Package Size Time
... Total X X X
..................
... Completed X X X
Remaining X X X
Release Notes < Back > Next
When the Linux Red Hat 7.3 Cdrom #1 content is loaded, it is ejected and the system prompts you to
insert the Linux Red Hat 7.3 Cdrom #2 into the drive.
126
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
INSTALLATION
Insert Linux RED Hat 7.3
Please insert disc 2 to continue Cdrom #2 and click on OK
when done
OK
The LINUX RED HAT 7.3 installation takes about 9 minutes to complete.
When it is done, the installation window changes to the Exit window.
Red Hat Linux
Congratulations
Congratulations .................
.................................
Remove any floppy diskettes you used and
press <Enter> to reboot
If you created ..................

.................................
For information .................
.................................
Information .....................
.................................
Exit
CAUTION
Eject the kickstart diskette before clicking on the Exit button.
If you fail to do so, the system will reboot from the kickstart diskette and will start
the LFC procedure again.
5-1-2 Steps for AW4.2 workstation starting AW4.2_04.10_EXT release
(using GEMS Linux 1.8.12 CDROM (P/N: 5111059)
The GEMS LINUX 1.8,12 Welcome Menu displays:
– To install the standard GEMS distribution, type {i}GEMS{0,2} <ENTER>
...............................................................
For example a US install of a CT dual–head HP uses ........
..........................................................
Alternatively, type aw41 <ENTER> for the AW41 install, or
aw42 <ENTER> for the AW41 install, or
DL2x0 <ENTER> for the DL server install, or
CTDARC <ENTER> for the CTDARC install.
– To enable rescue mode, type: linux rescue <ENTER>
Press <F5> for more information about rescue mode.
– Use the function keys listed below for more information ...
...................
boot :
127
REV 2 sm 2381096–100

INSTALLATION
D At the boot : prompt, type:

boot : aw42 [Enter]
Loading initrd.img ....
Loading vmlinuz ....
PCI .......
...... lots of installation messages display ...
... then 2 blue screens will display for a minute or so, with the following headers
Welcome to GEMS LINUX installation
Anaconda Linux Loader
Package Installation
Name : XXXXXXXX
Size : XXXX
Summary : XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
Total : XXX XXX X:XX:XX

Completed : XXX XXX X:XX:XX
Remaining : XXX XXX X:XX:XX
<Tab>/<Alt Tab> Between Elements | <Space> selects | <F12> Next Screen
The GEMS LINUX 1.8.12 installation takes about 8 minutes to complete.

When it is done, the installation window changes to the Exit window.
Complete
Congratulations your GEMS Linux installation.............

.................................
Remove any floppy diskettes you used and press
<Enter> to reboot
For information on errata ..................
....................................................
Information on using your system.....................
.................................
OK
<Enter> to reboot
D Press <Enter> to reboot the workstation
128
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
INSTALLATION
5-1-3 Common steps to all releases
CAUTION
The system will start to shutdown. The Cdrom drive opens. Quickly remove the
Linux Cdrom from the drive, before the carriage closes again and attempts to
boot from the Cdrom, starting a new installation sequence. In case you have not
removed the CD immediately, reboot the station pressing on <Ctrl>+<Alt>+<Del>
and press on the Eject button to remove the CD.
D Remove the LINUX Cdrom from the drive.
The system now reboots. At the end of the boot up sequence, the following message displays
cold_installation login : root [Enter]
Password : operator [Enter]
Do you want to manually update any system files ? (y/n) n [Enter]
Now we must set a few configuration parameters.

You will have to confirm or re–enter the data at the end.
Please enter the hostname: i.e: aw–01 [Enter]

Please enter the IP address: i.e: 3.45.12.145 [Enter]
Please enter the netmask: i.e: 255.255.252.0 [Enter]
hostname = aw–01
IP = 3.45.12.145
netmask = 255.255.252.0
Apply these settings ? (y/n) y [Enter] to accept,
or n[Enter] if you wish to modify the settings
Setting hostname = ............

Setting IP = ...............
Setting netmask = ............
Checking the cdrom

Please insert the AW cdrom and press <ENTER>
D Insert now the AW Cdrom into the drive and type: [Enter]
Note: Insert the AW4.2_03.10_EXT Cdrom if you have used the 2 LINUX RED HAT 7.3 CDROM
#1 (2381110) and CDROM #2 (2381111) and the AW4.2_03.10_EXT Kickstart floppy
diskette (2381109–2)
Note: Insert the AW4.2_04.10_EXT Cdrom, if you have used the GEMS Linux 1.8.12 CDROM
(P/N: 5111059) without Kickstart diskette.
The installation process displays lots of messages while installing.
AW installation takes about 5 minutes to complete.
The system reboots again. Lots of messages are displayed on the screen.
When the boot sequence has completed, the Window manager is starting.
129
REV 2 sm 2381096–100

INSTALLATION
The Console and the Date & Time windows pop–up.

Check and adjust
Console
Time Zone
.......................
....................... Date and Time
Date & Time Time Zone
.......................
.......................
Check and adjust
Date & Time
Enable Network Time Protocol
Do not select
OK Apply
D Set the date and time first, then click on the Time Zone tab to select the appropriate time zone for
your system.
When this is done, click on the Apply button.
The Application Install window pops–up. Lots of installation messages are displayed.
5-2 PART 2: Restore Configuration from the Site Configuration Cdrom

The AW Cdrom is ejected from the drive. The following message displays:
Do you want to restore the configuration from a cdrom ?(y/n)
IF YOU ARE RESTORING THE CONFIGURATION FROM AN UPGRADE (I.E:

WARNING
UPGRADE FROM AW4.1), MAKE SURE YOU HAVE KEPT THE SAME IP
ADDRESS AND HOSTNAME, TO AVOID SYSTEM DISCREPANCIES.
Note: At this time, if you have the Site Configuration Cdrom available, you may choose either to
restore the configuration now (answer y[Enter]), or if you don’t have the Site Configuration
Cdrom, or want to restore the configuration at a later time (answer n[Enter]).
D Preferred procedure: Insert the Site Configuration cdrom and type :
Do you want to restore the configuration from a cdrom ?(y/n) : y [Enter]
The Site configuration parameters will be extracted from the Configuration Cdrom, and reinstalled in
the ”Prefs” and ”UserPrefs”directories, before being automatically reinstalled.
D Secondary procedure: If you don’t have the Configuration cdrom, or want to restore configuration
later type :
Do you want to restore the configuration from a cdrom ?(y/n) : n [Enter]
130
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
INSTALLATION
You will get the next set of questions
Application Install
******************************************************************
AW Software is supplied by GE pursuant to a license ....
...........................................................
******************************************************************
Please enter the software Key for AW product : [00000000] xxxxxx [Enter]
where xxxxx is the Licence key for your AW system
–––> To activate the key, you will have to restart AW
Which language do you want for AW software ?
(e)nglish, (f)rench, (g)erman, (i)talian, (p)ortuguese, (s)panish :
[english] XX [Enter]
choose the language for the AW application (default is english)
–––> To activate this setting, you will have to logout and restart AW
How many monitors are plugged on the station ? (1 or 2) (= 1L1 or 2L1)
1 or 2 [Enter]
Please choose your monitor in the list
1 NEC LCD1880SX
2 SONY CPD–G520P
Enter selection [?,??] 1 or 2 [Enter]
Note: Make sure to select the right type monitor in order to apply the convenient refresh rate to the
monitor(s) connected to your AW.
Application Install
install complete
................
Press <Enter> to finish
D Press on the [Enter] key to accept.

The system reboots.
Note: You can review the installation logfiles later by typing the command:
more /export/home/install.log [Enter]
The CDROM is ejected. Remove it from the drive. The installation is now complete.
Advantage Workstation Operating System and AW basic software are now loaded.
Proceed now with the next step:
PART 3: Applications software preload / install.
131
REV 2 sm 2381096–100

INSTALLATION
5-3 PART 3: Advanced applications software preload / install

D Volume Viewer Applications vxtl_3.0.64m CDROM (or up).
D Functional Analysis Applications v2.6.6 CDROM (or up).
D Fusion Applications fus_1_0_56 CDROM (or up).
D Xray Applications 2353833–2 CDROM (or up).
D Smartscore v 3.5 CDROM (or up).
D MR Pasting v 1.1.3 CDROM (or up).
1. Login as sdc if not already logged in as sdc:

console login : sdc [Enter]
Password : adw4.2 [Enter]
2. Select Install package from the Services menu in the Browser.
5-3-1 Volume Viewer Applications preload / install

3. Insert the Volume Viewer software CDROM into the drive.
132
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
INSTALLATION
The Easy Install window pops up.
Easy install

........................
........................
........................
........................ Hard disk
CDRom
Floppy
Driver Hard disk
Contents
Install Quit
4. Move the arrow to Driver Hard disk / Floppy / CDRom button and select CDROM.
to Eject CDRom .

Note: If any of the following windows
Installation of ’Volume Viewer Ap- pop–up, you probably have selected
plications’ software for AW4.2 the wrong media (Floppy / Hard
Notice
version : vxtl_X.XX
! Malformed package
OK
Notice
Install Quit OK
At this point, you can directly install one or several Volume Viewer Applications using the Licence keys
stored onto the Configuration Cdrom. If you have not restored the configuration from the Site
6. Click on the Install button.
133
REV 2 sm 2381096–100

INSTALLATION
The following window pops up.
Volume Viewer Applications Installation

xxxxxxxxxx
Volume Viewer
Advanced Vessel Analysis xxxxxxxxxx
CT Colonography xxxxxxxxxx
Advanced Lung Analysis xxxxxxxxxx
CardIQ2 xxxxxxxxxx
CardEP xxxxxxxxxx
Autobone xxxxxxxxxx
The Volume Analysis is not installed on this machine


License keys
Note: Volume Viewer for AW4.2 is NOT automatically enabled and therefore requires a Licence key.
Volume Viewer is a pre–requisite to run the other Volume Viewer applications.
================== Start Install ======================
Build packages ...
..................
./install/installreport–root.ala
./install/install.ava
...................................
..................................................
Setting up Volume Viewer environment
.....................................
’Volume Viewer’ package is now installed.
To actually run the package, restart the browser.
CD Installation finished !
=================== End Install =======================
134
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
INSTALLATION
5-3-2 Functional Analysis Applications preload / install
1. Insert the Functional Analysis software CDROM into the drive.
Easy install

........................
........................
........................
........................ Hard disk
CDRom
Floppy
Driver CDRom
Contents
Install Quit
to Eject CDRom .
FuncTool and CT Perfusion applications Disk) or the concerned drive is
Notice
version : X.XX ! Malformed package
target : AW4.2 (linux)
OK
Notice
Install Quit OK
At this point, you can directly install one or several Functional Analysis Applications using the Licence
keys stored onto the Configuration Cdrom. If you have not restored the configuration from the Site
135
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
37
INSTALLATION
FuncTool and CT Perfusion Installation

CT Perfusion 2 xxxxxxxxxx
CT Perfusion 3 (Neuro) xxxxxxxxxx
CT Perfusion 3 (Body) xxxxxxxxxx
CT Perfusion 3 (Multi–organs) xxxxxxxxxx
Functool Performance xxxxxxxxxx
Functool Spectroscopy xxxxxxxxxx
Functool Diffusion Tensor xxxxxxxxxx
Functool / CT Perfusion is not installed on this machine

New Functool / CT Perfusion version is X.XX

License keys
================== Start Install ======================

x fctlNUI.tar.gz,
..........................
x install/install.fctl2
x install/install.fctlmrsi
...........................
CD Installation of FuncTool and CT Perfusion Applications ...

=================== End Install =======================
136
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
38
INSTALLATION
5-3-3 Fusion Applications preload / install
1. Insert the Fusion Applications software CDROM into the drive.
Easy install

........................
........................
........................
........................ Hard disk
CDRom
Floppy
Driver CDRom
Contents
Install Quit
to Eject CDRom .
Installation on Workstation ’hostname’ AW Note : If any of the following windows
Fusion for Avantage Windows the wrong media (Floppy / Hard
Press ’Install’ button to ....... Disk) or the concerned drive is defec-
................................. tive
Version : X_XX
Notice
! Malformed package
OK
Notice
! Error : Cannot access to media
Install Quit OK
At this point, you can directly install one or several Fusion Applications using the Licence keys stored
137
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
39
INSTALLATION
Advantage Fusion Applications Installation

Fusion xxxxxxxxxx
CT/PET Fusion xxxxxxxxxx
XA/MR Fusion xxxxxxxxxx
No Fusion application is installed on this machine


License keys
================== Start Install ======================

x fusion.tar.gz,
..........................
...........................
x install/uninstall.fusion
x install/uninstall.ctpet fusion
...........................
CD Installation of Fusion Applications ...

=================== End Install =======================
138
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
INSTALLATION
5-3-4 XRay Analysis Applications preload / install
1. Insert the XRay Analysis software CDROM into the drive.
Easy install

........................
........................
........................
........................ Hard disk
CDRom
Floppy
Driver CDRom
Contents
Install Quit
to Eject CDRom .
Installation of X–Ray applications Disk) or the concerned drive is
or ’Eject’ to cancel.
Advantage Paste version : X.XX Notice
Advantage 3D XR version : X.XX ! Malformed package
Adv 3D XR coils&clips version : X.XX
Advantage Straight version : X.XX OK
Notice
Install Quit OK
At this point, you can directly install one or several X–Ray Applications using the Licence keys stored
139
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
40
INSTALLATION
X–Ray Applications Installation
Only selected applications are installed :

Advantage Paste Auto–start xxxxxxxxxx
Advantage 3D XR xxxxxxxxxx
Advantage 3D XR Coils Clips xxxxxxxxxx
Advantage Straight xxxxxxxxxx
All applications are preloaded.

Only selected applications are installed.

License keys
================== Start Install ======================

Build packages...
..................
x install/description.paste
x install/description.spin3d
x install/description.spin3dcoil
..........................
...........................
CD Installation of X–Ray Applications ...

CD Installation finished.
=================== End Install =======================
140
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
41
INSTALLATION
5-3-5 Smartscore preload / install
1. Insert the Smartscore software CDROM into the drive.
to Eject CDRom .
SmartScore Cardiac Calcification Scoring Version 3.XX
defective
Notice
! Malformed package
OK
Notice
Contents Driver CDRom ! Error : Cannot access to media
Install Quit OK

Enter the SmartScore application key code for this workstation,
or enter 0 and insert a key diskette.
To simply preload the Application,

erase the ”0” and type in preload
installed application license key will be displayed in the license field.
Click on the OK button. The application selected will be reinstalled.
In the other case, it can be preloaded onto your workstation’s hard disk. This will allow to have the
Application ready to be installed from the Hard disk, any time when needed.
Move the mouse cursor into the ”software Key” field, erase the ”0” (zero) and type in: preload
================== Start Install ======================
141
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
42
INSTALLATION
No match
copying package to AW....
SmartScore package preloaded
=================== End Install =======================
You can now quit this intallation tool.
Proceed with the preload of the next Applications Cdrom.
7. When the installation is finished, click on Quit.
The Cdrom is ejected and the following Warning window pops up. Click on OK to close.
Do not forget to restart the Browser to de-

i clare your new installed option
OK
8. Restart the software from the Exit menu.
Advantage Workstation Operating System, AW basic software and Applications

software are now loaded / installed.
Proceed now with the next step: PART 4: InSite class A software preload.
5-4 PART 4: InSite class A software preload

Preload the InSite class A software from your InSite/iLinq/RCOC Cdrom, even though you do not
intend to connect your site through InSite at this time.
Preloading the class A (non–proprietary) package, will allow OLC to download the class M
(proprietary) package at any time when needed in the future.
Note: Insert the InSite class A Cdrom (2399064) or FE proprietary class A/classM Cdrom
(2396485–248), if you have loaded the AW4.2_03.10_EXT release , using the 2 LINUX RED
HAT 7.3 CDROM #1 (2381110) and CDROM #2 (2381111) and AW4.2_03.10_EXT Kickstart
floppy diskette (2381109–2)
Note: Insert the InSite class A Cdrom (2399064–2) or FE proprietary class A/classM Cdrom
(5111058–248), if you have loaded the AW4.2_04.10_EXT Cdrom, using the GEMS Linux
1.8.12 CDROM (5111059) without Kickstart diskette.
142
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
43
INSTALLATION
./preload.insite [Enter]
iip–dist.tar
Uncompressing Insite installation files ...
.insiterc.local
iipadmin
..............................
..................
Installing insite.config ...
Installing cron ...
6 SITE PARAMETERS AND OPTIONS REINSTALLATION CHECKS

Refer to Job Card IST 002 for Site parameters and Network Hosts reinstallation checks.
Refer to Job Card IST 003 for connection of the SCSI hardware options.
Refer to Job Card IST 004 for SCSI harware options reinstallation checks.
Refer to Job Card IST 005 for Applications reinstallation checks.
Refer to Job Card IST 006 for Printers reinstallation checks.
Refer to Job Card IST 007 for Network hosts reinstallation checks.
Refer to Job Card IST 008 for InSite/iLinq/RCOC installation.
Refer to Job Card IST 009 for Turnover To Customer checks.
143
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
Blank page.
INSTALLATION
44
144
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
JOB CARD IST 012 – Advantage Workstation Demo Exams Reinstallation
INSTALLATION
1 SUPPLIES
ADVANTAGE WORKSTATION Dicom images CDROMs set.
2 TOOLS REQUIRED
None.
None.
4 PREREQUISITES
1. Advantage Workstation software is loaded and operational.
2. Enough free disk space is available to install the demo exams. Verify this by:
– Logging in as sdc:
<hostname> console login: sdc [Return]
Password: adw4.2 [Return]
– Opening a command window from the Admin menu and typing in:
df –k /export/home1 [Return]
which should display a line like this:

Filesystem kbytes used avail capacity Mounted on
/dev/md/dsk... xxxx xxx xxx xx% /export/home1
The value under the column ”avail” must be larger than 650000 if you want to install all the
exams contained in one Cdrom. If it is not, check with your customer, to see what images can
be removed, from the Patient list, until the free disk space is larger than 650000.
5 INSTALLATION OF DICOM DEMO EXAMS FROM THE CDROM MEDIAS

SET
Since the Xray Demo exams and the standard Demo exams Cdroms are Dicom Cdroms, you can use
AW Application to extract the images and install them into the database.
Therefore they can be installed as any other Dicom Cdrom media.
D Login as sdc to start AW Application if not done yet.
D Insert the desired DICOM Cdrom media into the cdrom drive.
145
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
JOB CARD IST 012 – Advantage Workstation Demo Exams Reinstallation 2 of 2

INSTALLATION
D Wait for a few seconds then click on the CD–RW icon, in the Hosts window of the Patient List
(Browser).
The CDR Browser pops up displaying the list of demo exams stored on the Cdrom.
D Select (highlight) the exam(s) or image(s) you wish to import to the AW database, then drag & drop
with the left button of the mouse into the brown icon labelled with the workstation’s hostname.
The exam(s) start loading from the Cdrom and get declared into the database.
Once the exam(s) is(are) installed, you can select more exams to import to your AW, or click on the
Close button to exit from the Archive Cdrom Browser.
D To eject the Cdrom, click on the bottom arrow of the CD–RW icon and select Detach.
45
146
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
CHAPTER 2 – UPGRADES
1 OVERVIEW
This chapter describes the various upgrade procedures linked to products order. It concerns upgrades
from AW1.2, AW2.0, AW3.1, AW4.0 and AW4.1 to AW4.2.
For 2nd monitor upgrade, refer to Chapter 8.
Note: It is possible to restore User Preferences and setup from AW3.1 or AW4.0 upgrades.
The procedure is shown in Chapter 1, Job Card IST009, and detailed .
UPGRADE
Before de–installing/removing the old AW3.1 or AW4.0 workstation, proceed with ”Save
Configuration on Floppy” procedure described in your AW3.1/AW4.0 Service Manuals,
Chapter 1, IST009.
2 TOOLS REQUIRED
None.
None.
4 PREREQUISITES
UPGRADES MUST BE DONE BY PROPERLY TRAINED SERVICE ENGINEERS.
OLD SYSTEMS WHICH ARE DESTINED FOR RECYCLING SHOULD NO LONGER

WARNING
BE USED AS ADVANTAGE WINDOWS SYSTEMS, AND SINCE PATIENTS DATA IS
CONFIDENTIAL, YOU ARE REQUESTED TO ERASE THESE FILES FROM YOUR
OLD SYSTEM BEFORE RETURNING IT TO THE RECYCLING CENTER. PLEASE
FOLLOW CAREFULLY THE GIVEN INSTRUCTIONS.
Before you start, make sure that the following information is available, as you will need it to
install your new system. Refer to your old hardware Service Manual if you do not know how to get this
information.
D Hostname of the workstation.
D Internet Protocol address of the workstation.
D Netmask to be given to the workstation if applicable. Consult your Network Administrator.
D Time Zone.
D Hospital name.
D Hosts file (other hosts connected on the network).
D Routing tables to access other networks.
Also warn the customer to store on MOD or any other archive system, the images they do not want to
loose, as well as files they could have loaded on the workstation.
147
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
5 UPGRADE PROCEDURE
AW1.2 upgrade
consists on a complete swap of the workstation and its additional 1.05 GB hard disk option.
– The Pioneer MOD option is not supported on AW4.2.
– The DASM Filming Interface is not supported AW4.2.
AW2.0 upgrade
consists on a complete swap of the workstation and its external 2.1 GB hard disk for images and
UPGRADE
additional 2.1 GB hard disk option (if applicable).

– The DASM Filming Interface is not supported on AW4.2.
Note: Some User Preferences and setup can be reinstalled from the AW3.1 and AW4.0 to the
AW4.1. The procedure is described in Chapter1, Job Card IST009, and the parameters which
can be reinstalled are described in the Section 8 : APPENDIX of this chapter.
AW3.1 upgrade
consists on a complete swap of the workstation.
– Dicom MOD option (Maxoptix) can be reinstalled if T5 2600 * series, Firmware 4.5.
– Do not reinstall the CD–R and/or the Multipack storage disks option.
AW4.0 upgrade
consists on a hardware and software upgrade.
– Dicom MOD option (Maxoptix) can be reinstalled if T5 2600 * series, Firmware 4.5.
– Do not reinstall the CD–R and/or the Multipack Storage disks option (from AW3.1 Ultra60).
AW4.1 / AW4.1 P upgrade
AW4.1 on HP X4000 and AW4.1 P on HP XW8000: consist on a complete software upgrade (Load
From Cold). User Preferences and setups, Site parameters (remote hosts, etc ...) can be reinstalled.
D Save Site parameters as instructed by the older AW type Service manual.

For AW3.1_09 (or up) and AW4.0_05 (or up), save the configuration on Floppy diskette(s), for
AW4.1, save on Cdrom, before de–installing your old system.
D Save images on MOD or CD–R if applicable or push them to another workstation on the network.
D Proceed to Patient’s Image Data files deletion (see Section 6).
D Unpack the new hardware, check that you do not miss anything and read the installation
instructions described in this manual, Chapter 1 Job Card IST 001.
D Shutdown the old workstation and turn it off. Turn off the hardware peripheral(s).
D Disconnect optional peripheral(s) (i.e. MOD) that you will have to reinstall and set them aside.
D Disconnect Mouse, Keyboard, Monitor, CPU box, 1.05 GB or 2.1 GB external hard disks and store
them with their cables in the new hardware shipping boxes.
148
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
D Install the new hardware as defined in Chapter 1 of this manual.

D Install the site parameters and Advanced Applications software packages (if applicable). Refer to
Chapter 1 of this manual.
D When this is done.
D Check installation before turnover to customer (Chapter 1 IST 009).
D Proceed with old hardware removal and shipping (see Section 7).
6 OLD SYSTEM, IMAGE FILES DELETION
UPGRADE
CAUTION
Before proceeding with file deletion of your old hardware, make sure that you
have saved all necessary files to install the new hardware.
Also make sure that the customers have saved their own files.
This should be done only for swapped workstations, as you must return them to the Recycling Center
of your area.
1. Login as root
<machine_name console login : root [Return]
password : operator [Return]
2. Delete AW and Image data files
/bin/rm –r /export/home1/* [Return]
/bin/rm –r /export/home2/* [Return]
This will erase both image files /export/home1, /export/home2 (if applicable) image files.
The procedure can take up to 30 minutes depending on the number of images stored on the disks
and the optionnal external image disk(s).
3. When this is done, return to Section 5 to continue the upgrade procedure.
7 OLD HARDWARE RETURN PROCESS

Use the shipping boxes of your new hardware to pack the parts you are returning.
Hardware parts to return are:
D Workstation CPU box + power cord.
D Color monitor + video cable + power cord.
D Keyboard + cable and Mouse + pad.
D AW4.0 External CD–R drive + disk, Multipack Storage option (if applicable).
D AW3.1 External CD–R drive + disk, Multipack Storage option (if applicable).
D AW1.2 External 1.05 GB Hard disk option (if applicable) OR
D AW2.0 external 2.1 GB standard Hard disk (and external 2.1 GB HD option if applicable).
THE RETURNED EQUIPMENT IS DESTINED FOR RECYCLING! DO NOT RETAIN

WARNING
ANY PART OF IT! ALL MISSING PARTS WILL BE CHARGED!
149
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
7-1 Return Procedure for Americas
Use the shipping boxes of new equipment to return old material.
Note: Prior to returning the equipment, contact the GEMS Recycling Center to notify them of your
equipment shipment. Tel (414) 747 6997.
Note: Be sure to write the FDO number on the outside of the equipment box so that the Recycling
Center can track the returns.
UPGRADE
Return old material and Old System Configuration Form located at the beginning of this manual to:
GEMS Recycling Center
2200 E College Avenue
CUDAHY, WI 53110
USA Tel. (414) 747 6997
7-2 Return Procedure for ASIA

1. Return procedure for Korea
Samsung GE Medical Ssystems
Mr Jae Young Cho (K0125)
65–1 Sangdaewong–dong, Chungwong–ku
Sungnam–si, Kyunggi–do
KOREA 462–120
2. Return procedure for Australia / New Zealand

GE Medical Systems,
Attn: Max Cardew
Unit 6, 13 Lord Street,
Bontany, NSW 2019
Sydney, AUSTRALIA
3. Return procedure for GEYMS

Please contact your Regional Service Head Quarters, to get instructions for returning Old Systems
4. Return procedure for East Asia countries

GE Pacific PTE Ltd
Attn: Bryan Heaney
298 Tiong Bahru Road, 15–01/06
Central Plaza, SINGAPORE 168730
5. Return procedure for other GEMS–A countries.

Please contact your Regional Service Head Quarters, to get instructions for returning Old Systems
150
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
7-3 Return Procedure for Europe

LOGIC LINE OPERATIONS
CENTRE DE RECYCLAGE
ZA La Remise
Route de Corbeil, BP 111
UPGRADE
91004 Evry–Lisses, FRANCE
If you are sending from the Region France, ship by the usual Spare Parts return process:
(Sernam – Megastore Evry)
If you are sending from other Regions, use the shuttles to return the Spare Parts. Regional
Distribution point or Local depots:
Antwerpen – Frankfurt – London – Madrid – Milano
Athina – Kobenhavn – Istanbul – Kriens – Lisboa – Mockba – Napoli – Stockholm – Wien
Transport costs will be charged by the ”Recycling Center”. Send the invoice to:
BUC, Compta fournisseur, Ref: Recyclage
8 RESTORE CAPABILITY PROCEDURE FOR AW3.1/AW4.0
8-1 AWrestore scripts

D Insert the AW configuration diskette from your AW3.1 or AW4.0 upgrade into the drive.
Password : Enter the root password
D Run the AWrestore script as shown:
./AWrestore all from floppy [Return]
WARNING : this backup was not made on this station.
The users or data stored in the backup will overwrite the installed ones,
if they have the same name
Do you really want to restore the configuration? [y,n,?] y[Return]
Getting backup files from the floppy...
.........................
Installing Printer
..................
Warning : Restart AW to take into account the printer(s) installation

D Eject the diskette when done and restart AW.
151
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
8-2 Restore capability matrix

The following matrix describes the AW3.1 and AW4.0 files/directory that can be reinstalled on your
AW4.2 workstation.
Restore capability
(Yes / No)
File or directory name Function AW3.1 AW4.0
(under /export/home/sdc/Prefs directory)
UPGRADE
SdCDicomPrintConfig Dicom Printers configuration file No No

SdCRHosts Remote Hosts configuration file No No
SdCNotification DASM remote printing file No No
SharedProtocols/* Directory of Viewer protocols shared by Yes Yes
Users
*.lp Postscript printers Yes Yes
*.dev Dicom printers Yes Yes
*.lc LaserCam (DASM) printers No No
(under /export/home/sdc/Users/user_name directory)
AdvantageUserPrefs Viewer preferences, annotation types, Yes Yes
zoom size, etc...
AwaUserPrefs Tool buttons in the Viewer No No
BrowserUserPrefs Tool buttons in the Browser No No
CurrentProtocols/* Directory of protocols created by the user Yes Yes
Protocols/* Directory of Viewer protocols created by Yes Yes
the user
SdCAppUserPrefs Application buttons in the Browser No Yes
SdCFilters Browser filters (CT, MR, ...) No Yes
SdCPreset Viewer presets WW / WL Yes Yes
Sessions/* Contains file CurrentSession : links be- Yes Yes
tween Exam types and Protocols.
(under /export/home/sdc/Users/user_name/UserPrefs directory)
ExamCodesSelected Yes Yes
PRMGRPrefs No No
SbookPrefs Scrapbook and FilmComposer No No
FCBookPrefs preferences
ViewerPresets Viewer presets Yes Yes
(under /export/home/sdc/Users/user_name directory)
Voxtool.prefs 3D preferences Yes Yes
152
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
Restore capability
(Yes / No)
File or directory name Function AW3.1 AW4.0
(under /export/home/sdc/Users/user_name/VoxtoolPrefs directory)
protocol/ABDOMEN/* Yes Yes
protocol/CARDIAC/* Note:
protocol/CHEST/* If old 3D (prior to Volume Analysis) was see Note
protocol/GENERAL/* installed on AW3.1, you will need to run
protocol/HEAD/* installproto.volan on the AW4.1, after
UPGRADE
protocol/LOWER_EXTREM- the restore is done, in order to dispatch
ITY/* the customer presets under the
protocol/NECK/* appropriate anatomy region.
protocol/SPINE/*
protocol/UPPER_EXTREM- Run :
ITY/* cd /export/home/sdc/install
protocol/images/* installproto.volan
and follow the instructions
9 RESTORE CAPABILITY PROCEDURE FOR AW4.1 / AW4.1P

All Customer presets, shared protocols, Site parameters can be restored.
Insert the AW4.1 / 4.1P Site Configuration Cdrom
The only limitation is for the hardware dependant parameters, such as License keys. As they depend
on the LicenseId of your machine, they will have to be manually changed when replacing the X4000
by an XW8000 (AW4.1 case).
Note: The root password, if changed from the default operator password, is never restored for
safety reasons.
153
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
Blank page.
UPGRADE
154
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
CHAPTER 3 – COMMON PROCEDURES
1 OVERVIEW
In this chapter, procedures are described that are commonly used with Advantage Workstation.
In the text, characters to be entered on the keyboard are shown, following the appropriate system
prompt, in bold type: e.g.: logout.
Enter the characters exactly as shown; [Return] indicates confirmation by pressing the “ENTER” or
“RETURN” key.
Expressions (such as prompts, passwords and names) between “<” and “>” characters are those
associated with each specific configuration.
As used in the following sections,
”local” means ”physically in front of” the AW workstation console, while
”remote” means electronically connected through the network to the workstation.
PROCEDURES
COMMON
2 COMMON PROCEDURES
2-1 Basic LINUX Procedures
2-1-1 Boot Advantage Workstation
Note: Make sure all peripheral devices are powered on!
D Boot station and check presence of all internal and external powered–on peripherals:
D Press on the Reset button, and enter the BIOS setup menu by pressing on the <F2> key.
D Make sure the Main tab is selected and change the Reset configuration Data from its default
value [No], to [Yes], following the instructions given in the setup menu.
This should be done mainly in case of hardware peripheral change, memory upgrade and/or if the
boot sequence did not complete for any reason, in order to force the system to reset.
Note that the consecutive boot up will take longer, time for the system to scan for new hardware
devices.
2-1-2 Login as sdc on Advantage Workstation (windowing system not running)

D If ”<hostname> console login:” is not displayed, log out (see 2-1-7).
D Login as sdc:
– <hostname> console login: sdc [Return]
Password: <sdc password>[Return] (default is adw4.2)
D Advantage Workstation will start up. To shutdown, see 2-3-2.
155
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
2-1-3 Find out what ‘true’ user you currently are
echo $USER [Return]

The machine will return the user name it is operating under (e.g. root, sdc, insite).
Note: The user ’insite’ has root privilege. Users may not directly login as either root or insite when
remote. A remote user must first login remotely as ’sdc’, then change it, if necessary.
2-1-4 Become sdc user after successful login as another user

D Make sure you are logged in on ADVANTAGE WORKSTATION.
D Become sdc:
– su – sdc [Return] ”su [space] dash [space] sdc”
Password: <sdc password> [Return] (default is adw4.2)
2-1-5 Become root user after successful login as another user (locally or remote)
PROCEDURES
COMMON
D Make sure you are logged in on ADVANTAGE WORKSTATION.

D Become root:
– su – root [Return] ”su [space] dash [space] root”
Password: <root password>[Return] (default is operator)
2-1-6 Shutdown System –– from Login Prompt

D Login as root
– login: root [Return]
Password: <root password>[Return] (default is operator)
D From the Root environment windows system, open a Term window
D In the Tem window, type in:
– init 0 [Return]
D Optional –– Wait for shutdown completion and turn power OFF to the workstation, monitor(s), and
peripherals.
2-1-7 Logout Procedure

D Click on the Logout button, or select Exit AW from the Root menu, Service Tools.
2-1-8 Login as root on Advantage Workstation (windowing system not running)

D If the Login window is not accessible, you must log out first (see 2-1-7).
D Login as root:
– Login: root [Return]
Password: <root password> [Return] (default is operator)
156
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
2-1-9 Remote Login to Advantage Workstation from a Remote Station (General Case)
D You must know the ADVANTAGE WORKSTATION’s Internet address. If you don’t, get it from the
AW itself (see 2-1-12).
D Telnet to the ADVANTAGE WORKSTATION from a remote station:
– <remote–prompt> telnet <AW Internet address> [Return]
i.e : telnet 3.45.12.135 [Return]
D If telnet succeeds, the following lines display, and you get the “telnet login prompt”:
Trying <AW Internet address> ...
Connected to <AW Internet address>.
Escape character is ’^]’.
<...other system messages...>
login: <username> [Return]
Password: <password> [Return]
2-1-10 Remote Login as root on Advantage Workstation (from a Remote Station)
PROCEDURES
COMMON
Direct remote login as root is not allowed. You must first remote log as sdc, then switch user to root.
D Telnet to ADVANTAGE WORKSTATION from a remote station (see 2-1-9).
D At telnet login prompt, you must firstly login as sdc:
login: sdc [Return]
Password: adw4.2 [Return] (sdc default password)
D Then become super (root) user (see 2-1-5)
2-1-11 Remote Login as sdc on Advantage Workstation (from a Remote Station)

D Telnet to ADVANTAGE WORKSTATION from a remote station (see 2-1-9).
D At telnet login prompt, login as sdc:
login: sdc [Return]
Password: adw4.2 [Return] (sdc default password)
2-1-12 Find the Internet, Ethernet, and Broadcast Address, Netmask Value and Host-
name
D Open a Command Window and switch User to root (see 2–1–5)
D To get the hostname, at the prompt type in:
– hostname [Return]
D To get more informations, at the prompt type in:
– About all Ethernet controllers: ifconfig –a [Return]
– About the main Ethernet controller (eth0): ifconfig eth0 [Return]
(see example hereafter)
157
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
eth0 Link encap:Ethernet HWaddr 00:E0:81:00:54:F8

inet addr:3.249.12.149 Bcast:3.255.255.255 Mask:255.0.0.0
UP BROADCAST RUNNING MULTICAST MTU:1500 Metric:1
RX packets:90056 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 frame:0
TX packets:36555 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 carrier:0
collisions:0 txqueuelen:100
RX bytes:54610697 (52.0 Mb) TX bytes:7398817 (7.0 Mb)
Interrupt:21 Base address:0xf000
Where inet is the Internet Protocol (IP) address
Mask is the host’s netmask value (in hex)
HWaddr is the Ethernet Address
Bcast is the Broadcast Address
2-1-13 Shutdown and Reboot Advantage Workstation Locally or Remotely from the
Command Line
D Make sure you are logged in as root on ADVANTAGE WORKSTATION.
PROCEDURES
D Shutdown and Reboot:

COMMON
– init 6 [Return]
Note: If remote login as root on ADVANTAGE WORKSTATION failed, remote reset is impossible.
Reset is then only possible locally.
2-1-14 Shutdown and Reboot Advantage Workstation Locally (i.e. no input from key-
board)
D Reset the workstation
– Press on the Reset button, or cycle power off and on to workstation.
USE ONLY IN CASE OF SYSTEM HANG.
CAN CAUSE LOSS OF DATA.
Database recovery process must be necessary if used while the Database was active.
(See 2–6 for Recover Database)
2-1-15 Shutdown and Reboot Advantage Workstation Locally –– Workstation “Hard

Blocked”
D Turn monitor and computer off.
D Wait about 30 seconds.
D Make sure other peripherals are powered on. Turn monitor and computer on.
D The system will bootup.
2-1-16 Changing the ”USER” Password
CAUTION
DO NOT CHANGE THE ”insite”, ”sdc”, OR ”root” PASSWORD WITHOUT
NOTIFYING YOUR SUPPORT CENTER (OLC [ON–LINE CENTER], OLC–E
[EUROPEAN SUPPORT CENTER], OLC–A [ASIAN SUPPORT CENTER]).
158
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
D Properly login as sdc, then switch user to root

– su – root [Return] ”su [space] dash [space] root”
D Run the install.passwords script
– cd /export/home/sdc/install [Return]
./install.passwords [Return]
Enter the name of the user whose password must be changed
– root – sdc_admin (administrator) sdc or type q to quit
Select the user root, sdc or sdc_admin:
Changing password for user ”user” (where ”user” = root , sdc, or sdc_adminstrator)
New password : xxxxxxxx [Return]
Retype new password : xxxxxxxx [Return]
passwd : all authentification tokens updated successfully
MAKE SURE THAT THE CAPS–LOCK KEY IS NOT ENGAGED BEFORE

WARNING
ENTERING THE PASSWORD.
PROCEDURES
Note: If you get a message like ...
COMMON
BAD PASSWORD : it (is based on) (is too short) (does not contain) ..
.... it is just a WARNING message to let you know that your choice for the new password is
not as secure as it should be. However, your password will be taken into account after typing
it a second time.
D Write the new password on the AW CONFIGURATION FORM (front of this manual).
2-1-17 Line Commands for Controlling Printer (Filming) Queues

D See Chapter 7, Filming, section 3-2.
2-1-18 Changing the Host Name

D Unconfigure the Advantage Workstation (See 2-1-23).
2-1-19 Host Identification (license ID)
CAUTION
The hostid command, formerly used for UNIX workstations must no longer be
used to calculate the keys !!!! The hostid command only shows the numeric
identifier of the hardware platform which is the same for all workstations.
i.e : HP X4000 workstation : hostid = 7f0100
The license ID number is a unique number that is hard coded in your workstation.
The A.W software protection key is factory determined from this number.
To know the License ID of your workstation, type in:
– /export/home/sdc/bin/licenseId [Return] (capital I)
2-1-20 Using the ”man” Command

On–line information about Linux commands and their usage may be obtained by using the man
command. For example, to find out more about using vi, type:
159
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
– Switch user to root

Enter root password
– /usr/bin/man vi [Return] (type q to exit when done)
To find out more about using the man pages, type in:
– /usr/bin/man man [Return] (type q to exit when done)
2-1-21 Routing Tables

D To view the routing tables and usage
netstat –r [Return]
i. e :
Kernel IP routing table
Destination Gateway Genmask Flags MSS Window irtt Iface
3.0.0.0 * 255.0.0.0 U 40 0 0 eth0
127.0.0.0 * 255.0.0.0 U 40 0 0 lo
PROCEDURES
D Editing the Routing table (see Chapter 9 for more information).

COMMON
– Login as root
– Change to the /etc/rc5.d directory, create a S93route script with the vi editor,
(see Networking chapter for examples) and add the following line:
route add –net X.X.X.X gw Y.Y.Y.Y dev eth0 metric Z
1st gateway to ethernet Number of

Destination gateways also
network or host pass through interface called “metric hop
i.e : route add –net 3.45.0.0 netmask 255.255.0.0 dev eth0[Return]

i.e : route add –host 3.45.10.234 gw 3.249.13.245 metric 2[Return]
– Reboot the workstation (see 2-1-1).
D to delete a route
route del –net 192.9.10.0
Network to delete
i.e : route del –net 3.45.0.0 [Return]

i.e : route del –host 3.45.10.234 [Return]
– Reboot the workstation (see 2-1-1).
2-1-22 Netmasks
Note: No manual edit for changing the Netmask.

Use the ”sys–reconfig” utility (2–1–23) to change hostname, IP address and netmask, or
Refer to the Networking chapter for specific examples.
No longer use the sys–unconfig utility from UNIX systems !!!!!
160
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
D Reboot the workstation (see 2-1-1).
2-1-23 Reconfiguring the Advantage Workstation (Removing all Current Hostname,

Timezone, Network, and Addressing Information)
D Login as root or switch User to root.
CAUTION
DO NOT USE the /usr/sbin/sys–unconfig utility, which leads to the LINUX Red
Hat 7.3 reconfiguration process. !!! USE the sys–reconfig script INSTEAD !!!
D Run the sys–reconfig script:
– /export/home/sdc/scripts/sys–reconfig [Return]
WARNING : THIS SCRIPT WILL SHUTDOWN THE STATION AND LET YOU MODIFY
THE FOLLOWING PARAMETERS DURING THE NEXT REBOOT:
– hostname
– IP address
– subnet mask
PROCEDURES
COMMON
– timezone
– date and time
Do you want to continue (y/n) ? y [Return]
Done.
Do you want to shutdown the station now? (y/n) y [Return]
D The system automatically performs a shutdown.
When the system displays the message Power down , you can press on the Reset button to
reboot.
D Go to Job Card IST 001, Base System Hardware Installation and Configuration.
2-1-24 Changing the Internet Address
Note: Unconfigure the AW as shown above, if not familiar with the vi editor!
D Login as root. Obtain write access before editing the /etc/hosts file.
D Using the vi editor, change the internet address in the /etc/hosts file.
Do not change the host name !!!!
D Shutdown and reboot the workstation (see 2-1-6).
2-1-25 File Systems Checks –– Windowing System not Running

D Login as root.
D Run the ”fsck” command manually
fsck /dev/sda1 [Return]
to check Slice 1 corresponding to ”/boot” file system for example.
Note: You may first use the df –k command to check for the name of the partitions.
161
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
2-1-26 Check for SCSI Devices Recognized by the Workstation during the Boot
Sequence
D Login as root.
D Display the SCSI perpherials recognized by the workstation:
<prompt> /bin/dmesg | grep SCSI [Return]
..............................
scsi0 : sym53c8xx–1.7.3c–20010512
scsi1 : sym53c8xx–1.7.3c–20010512
Attached scsi disk sda at scsi0, channel 0, id 0, lun 0
Attached scsi disk sdb at scsi0, channel 0, id 1, lun 0
scsi2 : SCSI host adapter emulation for IDE ATAPI devices
Note: If the peripherals are present (connected and powered ON), and you do not see these
messages, check connections, power, and restart workstation (see 2-1-1)
PROCEDURES
2-2 Restart Advantage Workstation Application from the Console

COMMON
2-2-1 Advantage Workstation OK, no one logged in

D Login as sdc (see 2-1-3).
D If Application is not up within 1 minute, see Troubleshooting chapter.
2-2-2 Advantage Workstation OK, sdc logged in BUT application is not running
D Select Restart AW from the Exit Menu.
D If Application is not up within 5 minutes, see Troubleshooting chapter.
2-2-3 Advantage Workstation OK, someone else logged in

D Logout (see 2-1-7).
D Login as sdc (see 2-1-3).
D If Application is not up within 1 minute, see Troubleshooting chapter.
2-3 Shutdown Advantage Workstation
2-3-1 Windowing system not running –– login prompt displayed

D See 2-1-6.
2-3-2 Advantage Workstation running –– Normal Shutdown (including computer shut-

down)
D Place cursor of the mouse over the SYSTEM icon on the Browser.
162
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
D Select Shutdown button on the Browser, and click left mouse button.
D Place cursor over Yes push button in pop–up messsage, and click left mouse button.
D Wait until shutdown has completed.
D Optional – turn monitor, computer, and external SCSI devices off.
2-3-3 Advantage Workstation running –– Stop application only

D Place cursor over LOGOUT icon on the Browser, and click left mouse button.
D Release the mouse button. Advantage Workstation will stop, a login prompt will display.
2-3-4 Advantage Workstation not running and Windowing system running

D Exit the program you are using, shutdown from login prompt (see 2-1-6). –OR–
D If that fails, or unknown, kill windowing system (see 2-3-6). –OR–
D Move the mouse outside of all the windows (into the background).
PROCEDURES
D Press a mouse button to get the Root menu, scroll to Service Tools, then to Logout.
COMMON
D Release the mouse button. The windowing system stops, a login prompt will display.
2-3-5 AW not running and windowing system running ––– Kill Application locally
D Open Console window (double click on CONSOLE icon), place the cursor inside the new window.
D Run the following script:
– /export/home/sdc/scripts/sdcapp.csh –k [Return]
D If this failed (Advantage Workstation still running), kill windowing system (see 2-3-6).
2-3-6 AW application up, down or blocked and Windowing system blocked ––– Kill
Windowing System remotely
D From a remote station, login as sdc on ADVANTAGE WORKSTATION.
If this is impossible, reboot ADVANTAGE WORKSTATION locally.
D If AW application is up, run the sdcapp.csh –k script (see 2-3-5).
D If AW application is down, become user root (see 2-1-5).
Shutdown and reboot the workstation :
init 6 [Return]
Wait for boot completion before login again.
D If remote reboot is impossible, reset the ADVANTAGE WORKSTATION locally (see 2-1-13).
163
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
2-4 Advantage Workstation and Site Configuration

2-4-1 Displaying or saving Advantage Workstation Site Configuration Information
The site configuration information can be displayed and/or saved by selecting the Display
Configuration and/or Save Configuration option from the Services menu.
PROCEDURES
COMMON
A pop up window displays information such as O.S version, processor type, internet address, installed
Applications licence keys, etc... relative to your configuration. When running the Save Configuration
process, always accept to format the diskette so it is properly DOS formatted.
2-4-2 Copy text files in DOS format onto a diskette
Copying text files into a DOS formatted diskette can be useful in order to read these files on a PC.
D Open a Command window and switch User to root:
su – root [Return] ”su [space] dash [space] root”
D Insert a blank floppy in write enable mode into the drive and format it
fdformat /dev/fd0 [Return]
Double–sided, 80 tracks, 18 sec/track, Total capacity 1440 kB
Formatting ...done Verifying ... done
D Build a DOS filesystem on the diskette
mkdosfs /dev/fd0 [Return]
mkdosfs 2.8 (Date)
D Mount the filesystem
mount /mnt/floppy [Return]
D Copy the text file into the Floppy filesystem
i.e : copy the dcslog logfile
cp /export/home/sdc/logfiles/dcslog /mnt/floppy [Return]
D When this is done, unmount the Floppy filesystem
cd [Return]
umount /mnt/floppy
D Manually eject the diskette. You can now read it with your PC
2-4-3 Changing Advantage Workstation Site Configuration Settings
Refer to Job Card IST 002, Site Configuration.
164
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
2-4-4 Creating a KICKSTART diskette

Refer to Chapter 4, Job Card TSG008
2-4-5 Reading Configuration Diskette Settings

From an operational Advantage Workstation:
su – root [Return] ”su [space] dash [space] root”
D Insert the Configuration diskette into the drive and type:
cd /mnt/floppy [Return]
more config.txt [Return]
<–– read and write down on a sheet of paper, the license key numbers
D Umount the diskette
PROCEDURES
cd / [Return]
COMMON
umount /mnt/floppy [Return]
D Eject the diskette by pressing on the ejection lever.
From an operational PC:

D Insert the Configuration diskette into the drive.
D Click on MY COMPUTER, then clickon 3 1/2 Floppy (A:).
D Double–click on the config.txt file
<–– read and write down on a sheet of paper, the license key numbers
D Eject the diskette by pressing on the ejection lever.
2-5 ADOBE ACROBAT Reader Tool

To start the Acrobat Reader tool, open a Command Window from the ROOT Menu and type in
geacroread [Return]
2-6 ADVANTAGE WOKSTATION Database Recovery

Recover the database if the application crashes when opening a series, or when the browser lists do
not match the actual set of images on the disk.
This operation resets the relational database, reads the images from the hard disks, and recreates the
database from scratch.
CAUTION
THE DATABASE RECOVERY PROCESS CAN TAKE UP TO 60 MINUTES,
DEPENDING ON THE NUMBER OF IMAGES ON THE DISK(S) OR LONGER IF
EXTERNAL STORAGE DISKS PACK OPTION INSTALLED.
MAKE SURE THAT NOBODY IS USING THE WORKSTATION BEFORE STARTING
”RECOVER DATABASE” REMOTELY.
165
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
2-6-1 Recover Database from the Root Menu
Advantage Workstation must be up and running.

If exams have no series, series have no images, or images cannot be displayed or removed, there
probably is some database corruption which has occurred. This problem can occur if the system was
powered off during images receive and database update.
The database can be recovered by selecting the Recover database option from the Services Tools
menu under the Root menu.
Note: To access the Root menu, press <Alt> <F3>
Root Menu
Refresh Screen
PROCEDURES
COMMON
Command Window
Save Configuration
Recover Database
Service Tools Enter the root password when
prompted, and type rebuild
[Return] to start.
Exit AW
CAUTION
THE DATABASE RECOVERY PROCESS CAN TAKE UP TO SEVERAL HOURS,
DEPENDING ON THE NUMBER OF IMAGES ON THE DISKS.
MAKE SURE THAT NOBODY IS USING THE WORKSTATION BEFORE STARTING
”RECOVER DATABASE” REMOTELY.
The following message displays :
Do you want to rebuild the database from the images ?
This operation can take a long time.
Please type ’rebuild’ to confirm, or just press <Enter> to quit :
rebuild [Return]
The rolling ball screen saver turns on. There is no possibility to use the system during this time.
If you click on right mouse button, The following message appears:
PLEASE WAIT .......
DATA BASE IS BEING RECONSTRUCTED
When this is done, restart Browser from the Root Menu.
166
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
DURING A RECOVER DATABASE, IMAGES WHICH HAVE FAILED TO BE

WARNING
REINSTALLED ARE STORED IN THE FAILED_TO_REINSTALL DIRECTORY. YOU
SHOULD AT LEAST CLEAN UP THIS DIRECTORY BUT FIRST, IT IS
RECOMMENDED TO CONTACT YOUR ON LINE CENTER AW SUPPORT WHICH
WILL ASK YOU TO SEND FAILED IMAGES FOR INVESTIGATION.
2-7 Using the SMPTE Pattern
This section describes how to display the SMPTE pattern to properly calibrate the monitor.
2-7-1 Displaying the SMPTE pattern.

D Start AW application if it is not currently running.
D Install the SMPTE pattern (and other test patterns) by selecting Install SMPTE from the Admin
button.
D The SMPTE pattern is loaded into the browser as an exam with the name of SMPTE Pattern.
PROCEDURES
COMMON
D Open the Browser (Patient list), then select SMPTE pattern to display.
Illustration 2 – SMPTE Test Pattern
167
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
2-7-2 Console Monitor Adjustment Procedure

The console monitor must be properly adjusted for the filmed image to accurately represent the
console monitor displayed image. The following procedure is the recommended setup of the Console
Monitors to achieve a filmed image which accurately represents the monitor displayed images. The
SMPTE (Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers) test pattern is used to provide a standard
image.
There are factors pertaining to console monitor adjustments which will affect the ability of the film to
accurately represent the console monitor displayed images. These factors, the console monitor
contrast and brightness, are adjusted so all the shades of grey are discernible without excessive
brightness under normal viewing ambient lighting. The SMPTE test pattern also enables an easy
check of focus and linearity / geometry of the display.
The final result should make the film image and the console monitor displayed image similar in
appearance. The console monitor window and level may be adjusted for viewing preference, however
the console monitor brightness and contrast should not be changed since the display is optimized for
the video signal input.
PROCEDURES
COMMON
D Display SMPTE test pattern on monitor. See Illustration 2 for sample test pattern.
D Window Width control value = 100.
D Window Level control value = 1024.
Note: To achieve the best results, it is important that this setup procedure be done under the normal
ambient lighting conditions for the console area.
D Locate the contrast and brightness control knobs on the bottom front of the monitor.
D Adjust contrast control of display monitor to extreme minimum contrast (furthermost counter
clockwise position on). No contrast results in a flat density image.
D Adjust brightness control until scanning raster is just perceptible.
D Adjust contrast control such that the brightest part of the image is at a comfortable viewing level.
All shades or grey should be discernible. The two additional areas of the grey scale, which contain
sub–patches with 5% density differences, should also be visible. See Illustration 3, circled
number 6. (i.e. Adjust until viewing of brightest area is comfortable, then adjust to ensure all
shades of grey can be seen).
D Other aspects of display to check (See circled numbers in image on Illustration 3):
– High and low contrast resolution patterns, in both horizontal and vertical directions, must be
discernible. (Numbers 3 and 4).
– In the regions of white and black windows, there should be no smearing or streaking of the
interior rectangle into the surrounding, contrasting region. Windows must appear sharply
defined. (Numbers 1, 2, 5–8)
– Focus may be checked by observing the characters embedded in the image and readjusted if
necessary using the control knob (19’ monitor) or remote control (20’ monitor).
– The size of the 512 pixels square image on the display should measure 7.25” x 7.25”
(18.45 cm x 18.45 cm). The entire display image, including grey scale and patient data, should
be centered in the window frame. (Number 9).
168
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
Illustration 3 – Schematic Drawing of SMPTE Test Pattern
PROCEDURES
COMMON
2-7-3 Create and Display a Coloured SMPTE Pattern
This can be usefull to check the color rendering of a color printer. In order to create a ”colored’”
SMPTE pattern, proceed with the following steps:
D Install the SMPTE pattern if not done yet (see 2-7-1).
D Start the VIEWER to display the SMPTE pattern.
D Click on the Display Tools button. The Display Tools window pops–up.
D Click on the WW/WL button. The Drag & drop a tool window pops–up.
D Click on the Palette button, then click on the Rainbow button.
D Press the middle button on the mouse and modify the color palette.
When this is done, you can save the coloured SMPTE pattern if you wish to use it again later:
D Select Edit from the Display Tools menu (see above).
D Click on the Save Image button.
169
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
3 ON–LINE DOCUMENTATION
3-1 Access to the Operator’s documentation
Click on Docs. The Operator’s documentation

page displays (on right screen if applicable)
PROCEDURES
COMMON
3-2 Access to Service documentation
Click on Admin, Service Docs.

The Service documentation page
displays (on right screen if applicable)
170
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
CHAPTER 4 – TROUBLESHOOTING
1 FOREWORD
The troubleshooting procedures are described in a series of job cards about the different steps,
problems encountered with their corrective actions and useful procedures, when installing and using
ADVANTAGE WORKSTATION.
CAUTION
Corrective action should be made by authorized and qualified personnel only.
2 TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE HP X4000 & XW8000
On–line access to HP Service Manuals and other additional information can be

NOTICE
obtained from the HP documentation Web site at :
XW8000: http://h200000.www2.hp.com/bizsupport/TechSupport/DocumentIndex.jsp?
X4000: http://h200005.www2.hp.com/bizsupport/TechSupport/DocumentIndex.jsp?
HP X4000 HP XW8000
TROUBLESHOOTING
SERVICE MANUAL SERVICE MANUAL
PURPOSE
2348152–100 2381099–100
CHAPTER–PAGE NR CHAPTER–PAGE NR
SOLVING HARDWARE PROBLEMS 7–147 4–86
POWER LED IS FLASHING 7–149 4–93
POWER–ON SELF–TEST (POST) 7–153 4–94

UNDERSTANDING THE DIAGNOSTIC LEDS
TROUBLESHOOTING WITH THE E–BUZZER – 4–96
HARD DISKS AND CD–RW PROBLEMS 7–150 4–90 / 4–92
CLEARING THE ADMINISTRATOR PASSWORD 7–152 4–98
POWER SUPPLY TEST 5–91 1–19
171
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
3 TROUBLESHOOTING JOB CARDS
JOB CARD NO PURPOSE
TSG 001 INITIALIZATION PHASE
TSG 002 APPLICATION IS RUNNING
TSG 003 FILES–SYSTEM CHECKS
TSG 004 REFORMATTING AND / OR PARTITIONING DISKS
TSG 005 USING HP DIAGNOSTICS TOOL CDROM
TSG 006 TROUBLESHOOTING PHYSICAL NETWORK PROBLEMS
TSG 007 HOOKING UP LAPTOP AS A TERMINAL FOR DIAGNOSTICS
TSG 008 CREATE A KICKSTART DISKETTE *

TROUBLESHOOTING
TSG 009 LOGFILES INFORMATION
TSG 010 RUNNING PROCESSES INFORMATION
TSG 011 SERVICE MENU
TSG 012 CREATE A FLASH DISKETTE FOR BIOS AND FIRMWARE
TSG 013 X4000 SYMBIOS CHANGES TO AVOID BOOT HANG UP.
* Note:
From the AW4.2_04.10_EXT release, Kickstart diskettes are no longer necessary, and the GEMS Linux 1.8.12
must be used.
172
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
JOB CARD TSG 001 – Initialization Phase

Time: x h xx min – Personnel: 1 field engineer 1 of 4
1 FOREWORD
The troubleshooting procedures describe the various steps the ADVANTAGE WORKSTATION goes
through, before using the application.
2 PROBLEMS AT POWER ON
SYMPTOMS ACTIONS SUSPECT MODULE
Screen remains blank – Check electrical and video monitor connections. Monitor
(Monitor LED is yellow) – Exchange with another monitor. Video card
– Check color of all LEDs on the CPU box. CPU
Refer to HP Service Manual
The screen blanks at the The boot sequence messages are displayed on the BIOS setup
end of the boot screen, but at the end of the boot sequence, the
sequence (XW8000) screen blanks. Refer to TSG012 , section 3.
Blurred video – Adjust the monitor. Monitor
Poor color – Disconnect for test, the video converter (if Video converter
TROUBLESHOOTING
applicable) Frame Buffer Board
– Exchange with another monitor. Cable
– Replace the video cable.
Different color tints on Calibration needs to be done. Order Tool 0155 CRT Color monitor
dual CRT monitors (Europe) from the Pool of Tools.
configuration.
Different color tints on Calibration needs to be done. Order Tool 0216 LCD Color monitor
dual LCD monitors (Europe) from the Pool of Tools.
configuration.
Display is reduced to a Pre–requisite: The workstation is turned on and the NEC 1880SX Color
small part in the center monitor is connected. Turn off the screen. monitor setup
of the screen Turn on the screen while keeping the Select 1/2
button depressed.
Push > key to go to Tab7, and press Select1/2.
Push > key to go to Magnifying Glass symbol .
With + or – keys, choose Full , then press Select 1/2
Press Exit twice to save and quit
Screen display is Re–orient the monitor. Adjust the rotation via
“twisted” Place the monitor farther away from the MR monitor controls
scanner, or power transformers.
Boot sequence hangs Check the Symbios to make sure the scanning of the Symbios
while scanning the SCSI unused SCSI addresses is disabled.
bus. refer to chapter 4, Job card TSG013
173
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
JOB CARD TSG 001 – Initialization Phase 2 of 4
3 PROBLEM ENCOUNTERED WHEN BOOTING
– SCSI bus is hung – Check that any external peripherals are switched on. disk(s)
– Check that there is a SCSI terminator on the free CPU
connector of the last peripheral. Power Supply unit
– Check SCSI cables.
– Check that you can hear disk drives starting.
– Check the power supply.
– Check devices addressing.
Blank boot issue: The Workaround 1: Open the side cover of the CPU box. BIOS setup
workstation starts The ”cover open” detection switch is activated and will
booting but the display force at the very next boot, a ”long boot” sequence.
remains blank. The ”long boot” scans the internal hardware of the
Potentially occurs after a workstation and ”redeclares” the Graphics card.
system crash. Close the side cover when done.
The ”Quick boot” mode is set by default, and it takes

about 2.5 mn to boot up the workstation.
Selecting the ”long boot” mode brings this time up to
about 4.5 mn.
If the issue is not frequent, keep the ”Quick boot”mode
set. If the issue is too frequent at your site, you may
TROUBLESHOOTING
need to set the ”long boot” mode in the BIOS. See

workaround 2
Workaround 2: Perform Workaround 1, to recover

from the ”blank boot” problem.
When the system starts to boot up, press the <F2>
key to enter the BIOS setup.
With the –> key, move to Boot tab.
With the <F7> key, change the QuickBoot Mode
parameter from Enabled to Disabled.
Press <Esc> to exit, press <Return> to choose Exit
saving changes, and Yes to confirm.
During boot operation, Check the Ethernet connection. PCI ethernet board
message: eth0 no carrier XW8000: Make sure you are connected to the PCI (XW8000)
Ethernet board (and not the Mother board )
Replace the PCI ethernet board RJ45 (TP) cable
Problems during the fsck See TSG 003. Check that external MOD drive option disk
(files system check) is properly connected and powered up. O.S
External disk option
Boot problem after the Software problems can be dealt with after booting
fsck. Core config either as single user (boot –s) or by reloading OS
problem. refer to job card TSG 003.
Boot does not start and It is possible to force the insertion of the Y video cable XW8000
the workstation beeps. upside down in the Graphics Card connector.
Correctly insert the Y cable into the Graphics card
174
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
4 PROBLEMS ENCOUNTERED DURING THE SESSION (BEFORE LOGIN

AS SDC)
4-1 Run HP Diagnostics Utility for Reliability Diagnosis
Refer to Job Card TSG 005.
4-2 For Disk Problems

See Job Card TSG 004.
4-3 For Problems Encountered Before Booting

Check the BIOS settings. Reinstall default settings if necessary and reboot.
See Chapter 1, IST011 Section 5.1 for entering and setting the BIOS procedure
5 STEPS AND PROBLEMS ENCOUNTERED AFTER LOGIN AS SDC

“Invalid Software Key for Check the software license key corresponding to the Incorrect or missing
Advantage Workstation.” licenseId number for your workstation. Reenter key software license key.
as shown in Job Card IST 002.
TROUBLESHOOTING
“Initialization of sdc failed. Check the software license key for your workstation. Incorrect or missing
Please retry.” Reenter key as shown in Job Card IST 002. software license key.
Check with command:
tail –30 ~sdc/logfiles/
netslog displays a line
like “Soft. Protection
Violation”.
No window opens. Shutdown workstation.Cycle power to workstation. X terminal not found.
Re–load AW software.
See Job Card IST 010
or preferrably reload OS first before reloading AW.
See Job Card IST 011.
password refused: Login as root /etc/passwd or
< > login: sdc <prompt> passwd sdc [return] /etc/shadow file was
Password: <Ret> <prompt> new passwd ? XXXXX [return] changed.
Sorry ! where XXXXX is the right password
No ”Starting Advantage Shutdown workstation.Cycle power to workstation. sdc environment is
Windows...” message Re–load AW software. corrupted.
displayed, system hangs See Job Card IST 010 or preferrably reload OS.
up. See Job Card IST 011.
Screen returns to white, Shutdown workstation.Cycle power to workstation. Window manager is
when the system should Re–load AW software. corrupted
start the Windows See Job Card IST 010 or preferrably reload OS.
Manager. See Job Card IST 011.
175
REV 2 sm 2381096–100

Network initialization Login as root, NETserver process
window remains 2 to 3 run ~sdc/scripts/sdcapp.csh –k [Return] remains if
minutes until this then logout from root window menu and log in as sdc. tail – 30
message appears ~sdc/logfiles/netslog
”Initialization of sdc failed. displays a line like “bind:
Please retry”. address already in use”.
Same as above Login as root, DBSserver process
run ~sdc/scripts/sdcapp.csh –k [Return] remains if tail –30
then logout from root window menu and log in as sdc. ~sdc/logfiles/db*log
displays a line like “bind:
address already in use”.
5-1 Miscellaneous Problems
Loss of root password: Proceed with a full software load (OS + AW) O.S.
Refer to Job Card IST 011
Loss of system files Proceed with a full software load (OS + AW) O.S.
TROUBLESHOOTING
Refer to Job Card IST 011
46
176
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
JOB CARD TSG 002 – Application is Running

1 FOREWORD
The following procedures describe the problems that may occur while ADVANTAGE WORKSTATION
is running.
2 PROBLEM DESCRIPTIONS AND SUSPECT MODULE
Mouse: Reboot workstation then restart Application OS Xserver.

All Clients and all
Cursor is ”late” with Servers processes
respect to actual mouse within Advantage
movements. Slow Workstation .
response to clicks on
mouse buttons. Check if images are being sent to the workstation. Network overloaded
Wait until all images have arrived.
Spread images transfer in time. OS.
TROUBLESHOOTING
Run the E–Diagtools diagnostics from the Cdrom Hardware failure
(refer to TSG005).
Replace CPU box. System Board.

Mouse: Clean the mouse. Change mouse pad. Mouse and mouse pad.
Cursor does not follow Replace the Mouse.
smoothly mouse
movements.
Mouse: Reboot workstation. OS
Xserver
Cursor stuck, does not All Clients and all
move any more. Check mouse connection to workstation. Servers processes
if, OK –> change mouse within Advantage
Workstation.
Check keyboard connection to computer.

if OK –> change keyboard
If keyboard has been disconnected, it is necessary to Mouse, keyboard.

reboot workstation.
Mouse: See “Cursor stuck” above.
No response from system
when clicking on one (any Reboot workstation.
one, or two, or all) mouse
button(s). Change mouse. Mouse, keyboard.
177
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
JOB CARD TSG 002 – Application is Running 2 of 6
Display: Strike any key on keyboard. Screensave.
Screen is black. Check for power connection to the monitor. Monitor. Monitor cable.
Check that Monitor is turned on.
Check that video cable is connected.
Check that no pin is bent on the video cable.
Check monitor power LED. If yellow >>> No video. Input select switch.
Check that the Input select switch position
corresponds to the connector, the video cable is
plugged in.
Make sure the Power supply for the Flat Panel monitor Flat panel power supply.
is operational.
Disconnect the Video Converter option (if applicable) Video Converter option.
for test.
Reboot workstation. OS.
Replace Monitor or Frame Buffer Board (see Monitor, FB Board.

Chapter 5).
Display: XW8000 Make sure you used the VGA/VGA cables and NOT XW8000 : NEC monitor
the DVI/VGA or DVI/DVI cables delivered with the NEC cables
TROUBLESHOOTING
Screen is black. monitor(s)

NEC monitor(s)
Display: The monitors but be set with the parameter NEC monitor setup
auto–adjust = OFF
Display is out of the See Chapter 1, IST001 , Section 7
screen limits with
NEC monitor(s)
Database: Resend corrupted images. Network.
Spread images transfer over time.
Some (all) images are
corrupted. Is image from Image source OK? Image source.
Does image source send Dicom3 compatible images?
Submit a Problem Report. DCServer (dicom).

Database: Select Refresh Lists in Application menu. IMServer, DBServer.
Some (all) images cannot Reboot workstation and restart apllication.

be displayed.
Run ”Recover database” from the Service Tools IMServer, DBServer.
submenu within the Root menu when logged in as sdc DCServer.
Check disks. Run fsck (see TSG 003). disk(s).

Repair or replace disk(s). See Job Card TSG 004.
Submit a Problem Report.
178
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
Database: Check for the following message in DBMS

~sdc/logfiles/db*log: “stored procedure fails –XXX
Some (all) images cannot execute failed for procedure verify image”.
be displayed. If this message appears, it means that the database
structure has been damaged. The database must be
rebuilt, and some images may be lost.
Use the Recover Database button or open a console
window:
type sdcapp.csh –k [Return]
wait for all processes to die
./reinstall.images.call [Return]
Confirm and enter root password when requested.
This can take up to several hours depending on the
number of images stored on the disks.
Quit the AW. application, then login again as sdc.

Database: Check for available image disk space. File system.
Remove some images from AW.
Images were sent fine but
never seemed to have Click on Messages button.
arrived. This will open the Message Window Browser refresh list.
Have images arrived?
TROUBLESHOOTING
–> Browser had not been updated
Restart Browser and check again. Network.

Resend image and check again
Reboot workstation and restart application. DBMS
Are you sending Dicom 3 compatible images?

Image source.
Run RECOVER DATABASE.
Any change after recover database and re–sending
images? DBMS.
yes: everything OK
–> DB was corrupted IMServer,
no: Submit a Problem Report DBServer.
Sony CRT monitor: For color calibration of the CRT monitor(s),
please order tool 0155 ”CRT color analyzer”
Dual CRT monitor from the ”pool of tools” and refer to Service note
configuration: SNIIS00–003 instructions delivered with the Tool
Cannot match the colors or available from the AW–IB web site
of the 2 monitors
@ http://aw–ib.euro.med.ge.com .
NEC LCD monitor : For color calibration of the LCD monitor(s),,
Dual LCD monitor please order tool 0216 ”LCD color analyzer”
configuration: from the ”pool of tools” and refer to Service note
Cannot match the colors SNAW2002–009 instructions delivered with the
of the 2 monitors Tool or available from the AW–IB web site
@ http://aw–ib.euro.med.ge.com
179
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
Networking : Check that the workstation is up, and that Application Workstation.
Impossible to send is running correctly and ready to receive images.
images to Advantage
Workstation from Image Run /bin/ping –c 1 Advantage workstation from Network.
source. source, then ping source from Advantage Workstation. /etc/hosts file.
Images do not seem to SdCRHosts file.
arrive and/or are not
declared into the Check Ethernet cables on both sides (image source Connectivity.
database. and AW), check network modules on Image source.
For XW8000, make sure that the ethernet cable is XW8000 only
connected to the additional Ethernet card (in the
PCI slot). This is eth0 by default. The Ethernet
connection on the Mother board will default to eth1,
and is reserved for future use.
Check that Advantage workstation is properly declared Network,

on image source; check network status (not Image source,
“suspended”) after you have pushed the images. Workstation.
Check internet addresses on both sources and
destination.
Check that Protocol is set to Dicom3 and that Port SdCRHosts file.
numbers are set to the right value (e.g.: AW=4006;
TROUBLESHOOTING
etc ...).
Check for error messages in the logfiles Workstation.
Check from Image source that images were sent fine. Image source.
Note : images are transferred to the Database, and Workstation.

appear briefly in the following directory :
/export/home1/sdc_image_pool/import/reserved/Pro
cess_name/
If then images do not show up into the patient list, they See Image source.
are probably not Dicom3 compatible images. Dicom Conformance
A pop up message will mention that they are rejected. Statement
Networking : Network controller cards used on the HP X4000 (AW4.1), Workstation.
Network performances and on the HP XW8000 (AW4.1P; AW4.2) workstations, Auto–negociation
degraded. are designed and set to fully support the Auto–negociation
Does not seem to have mode.
auto–negociated the Any potential Network communication (mode, speed)
optimum performance for issues, are most probably due to problems in the
network configuration or performance of the Site’s network.
Nethertheless, in case of Network communication issue (10
MBps or half Duplex mode selected through
auto–negociation), it is possible to force these
communication parameters to the desired values.
See emergency procedure , Chapter 9, section 3–3
180
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
Filtered Query/retrieve: Edit the .dicomrc file and modify the Dicom_list_size
value to match your purpose :
Want to modify the cd /export/home/sdc [Return]
Dicom_list_size. vi .dicomrc [Return]
.................
................
setenv DICOM_LIST_SIZE 500 Change default value
............ 500 to desired value
Save and quit :
<Esc> :wq! [Return]
Filtered Query/retrieve: Edit the .dicomrc file and uncomment the line :
NO_CFIND_CANCEL to match your purpose :
Older type PACS system cd /export/home/sdc [Return]
may not properly support vi .dicomrc [Return]
CFIND_CANCEL. .................
For these systems, you ................
may disable the option setenv DICOM_LIST_SIZE 500 Uncomment the line, by
C_FIND_CANCEL, and setenv NO_CFIND_CANCEL removing the #character
let the query sequence to ............
time–out. Save and quit :
<Esc> :wq! [Return]
Advanced Application Check if application is properly declared. Open the Advanced application.
TROUBLESHOOTING
(Volume Viewer, CTC, Configuration window from the Root Menu and check
AVA , Dentascan, ALA if application is mentionned.
etc...) do not start. Run the uninstall.<appli_name> script, then redeclare
option. Logout and login again and check.
Call OLC with licenseId number to check for Software protection key.
validity of key.
Reinstall AW application (Load From Warm), then AW software.

reinstall Advanced application.
Advanced Application When using the DVI digital mode between the Graphic NEC1880SX LCD
Volume Viewer : MIP of card and the NEC LCD monitor, the image quality is monitor.
large datasets appear degraded.
mottled regardless
resolution. Poor IQ for Workaround : NEVER USE the DVI digital mode.
MIP. Refer to chapter 1 for connecting the monitor(s) using
the exclusively the VGA video mode.
Patient list : User’s passwords have not been saved on the Automatic
Browser is restarted after Configuration Cdrom, and therefore, they were not re–installation
typing of the SdC re–installed after a Load From Cold or Load From procedure limitations.
password to unlock the Warm procedure.
screen.
Note : AW Users are created as standard UNIX users.
Therefore, they appear in the /etc/password and
/etc/shadow directories
181
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
47
Viewer: Check if ”/” or ”/export/home” filesystems are not full. File system.
Viewer starts loading of Type : df –k [Return].

images displaying XX% If any of these 2 filesystems displays 100% or more,
then stops. proceed to ”core file” and/or ”log files” cleanning.
Printing : You may wish to set the Dicom print priority to medium Dicom Print
Too long time to get the or to high for your AW.
films printed in a busy
radiology department. Edit the xx.dev file corresponding to your concerned
printer and set the priority to MED or HIGH:
AW default Dicom Print ls –l *.dev [Return]
priority is set to low. Check the exact ”xx.dev” name of the dicom printer
vi xx.dev [Return] (where xx is the name
corresponding to your printer)
.................
................
set printPriority ” ” <<< enter priority here between
quotes ”MED” or ”HIGH”
set printPriority ”MED”
............
Save and quit :
TROUBLESHOOTING
<Esc> :wq! [Return]

Printing : Check that Laser Camera is ready. Laser Camera.
Impossible to send See Laser Camera Service Manual.
images to laser camera.
Check Dicom or Postscript printer responds to ping Network
command
Check Dicom or Postscript Printer declaration (Job Installation
Card IST006)
Reload Application software. Application.

(Load From Warm: see job card IST 010).
Reload Os and Application. OS.

(Load From Cold: see job card IST 011). Application.
(see Chapter 7 for more information on Filming

option).
Shutdown : Open the computer box and check if the fan is CPU Fan.
Unexpected shutdowns operational. Computer Fan
and automatic turn OFF If the main fan does not start, replace it.
of the workstation.
48
182
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
JOB CARD TSG 003 – Files System Checks

1 RUNNING FSCK UTILITY

The fsck utility allows you to check and repair a FileSystem after an error has occured, often due to an
improper Shutdown of the workstation.
D Switch User to root
The actual values of the Filesystem of your workstation may slightly differ from the example below (given for the
XW8000 prior to the AW4.2_04.10_EXT release).
The Filesystem can be checked by using the command df –k [Return]
Filesystem 1k–blocks Used Available Use% Mounted on
/dev/md4 4192636 721516 3471120 18% /
/dev/sda1 104380 43180 61200 42% /boot
/dev/md5 1541964 32840 1509124 3% /export/cdr
/dev/md2 1541964 833956 788008 55% /export/home
/dev/md7 125351048 422660 124888388 1% /export/home1
/dev/sdb3 104412 32840 71572 32% /mnt/unused_100Mb
none 1032156 0 1032156 0% /dev/shm
D Check the Filesystem
TROUBLESHOOTING
/sbin/fsck /dev/sda1 [Return]
/sbin/fsck /dev/md4 [Return]
/sbin/fsck /dev/.......
i.e :
fsck 1.2X (Date)
e2fsck 1.2X (Date)
/dev/sda4 is mounted.
WARNING!!! Running e2fsck on a mounted filesystem may cause

SEVERE filesystem damage
Do you really want to continue (y/n)? y [Return]
/export/home was not cleanly unmounted, check forced.

Pass 1: Checking inodes, blocks, and sizes
Pass 2: Checking directory structure
Pass 3: Checking directory connectivity
Pass 4: Checking reference counts
Pass 5: Checking group summary information
/export/home: XXXX/XXXXXXX files (X.X% non–contiguous), XXXX/XXXXXX blocks
183
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
JOB CARD TSG 003 – Files System Checks 2 of 6
2 FILESYSTEM FULL ERROR

The sizes given hereafter are those of a standard AW4.2 workstation hard disks. The ”used” sizes of
your machine may differ from those shown below as they are subject to grow depending on:
– /export/home1: number of images stored on the disks
– /export/home2: number of images candidate for copy to the CD–R
– /tmp: usage of the swap partition
– /export/home: Images waiting in the printer queue and option softwares installed
– /export/home/sdc: Optional Application softwares installed.
The ”/proc” Filesystem, not accessible to the user, reflects the table of processes managed by the
system.
2-1 Procedure
D Login as root
<station_name> console login : root [Return]
D Open a Command window and click into it and type in:
df –k [Return]
Note: The example below is for a standard AW4.2 workstation on XW8000 (2 x 73GB hard disks). It
is similar for the X4000 workstation (2 x 36GB Hard disks), but the /export/home1 directory is
TROUBLESHOOTING
smaller. The values may differ from the one you can read on your system depending on the
number of files and images stored.
/dev/md4 4192636 721516 3471120 18% /
/dev/sda1 104380 43180 61200 42% /boot
/dev/md5 1541964 32840 1509124 3% /export/cdr
none 1032156 0 1032156 0% /dev/shm
Note: From the AW4.2_04.10_EXT release, the Informix database, is replaced by the PostgreSQL
database. This is not significant in the Service point of view, but the filesystem has been
slightly modified, and the /export/dbsroot partition added, as shown in the example below
/dev/md2 4187968 1638588 2549380 40% /
/dev/sda1 101089 11680 84190 13% /boot
/dev/md1 1537216 144 1509124 1% /export/cdr
/dev/md0 8412992 334192 8078800 4% /export/dbsroot
none 1032156 0 1032156 0% /dev/shm
184
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
D Search File or Directory size: Indicates size in kiloBytes

du –ks [Return]
du –ks <file_name> [Return]
i.e.: du –ks /etc/hosts [Return]
2-2 Other useful commands

D Search file(s) by name
find /<dir_name> –name <file_name> –print [Return]
i.e.: find / –name kcore –print [Return]

(find core file(s))
Note: Do not remove core directory located under /export/home/sdc directory.

D Search file(s) by size
find /<dir_name> –size +<value> –print [Return]
i.e.: find /export/home/sdc –size +1500 –print [Return]
(find files bigger than 1500KB)
2-3 Log files

D The different logfiles used by the AW software are located under the /export/home/sdc/logfiles
directory. Among them, some useful files for FEs are:
TROUBLESHOOTING
– browserlog ; browser_nuilog : (AW application)
– importimagelog : (incoming images)
– filmerlog : (Filming)
– prslog : Printer Server
– imslog : Image server
– reinstall_database.log (database recover)
– netslog : Network
– dcslog : DICOM server log)
– reviewStationlog : VIEWER log
– dbrlog , dbwlog : Read and write into image Database
– cdcomposerlog , cdpreparatorlog, cdrecordlog : CD–RW
Refer to Job Card TSG 009 for more details.
D Software installation logfiles are under the /export/home directory.

i.e : installaw.log (AW software loading)
Read the Log files
more XXlog [Return] OR
tail XXlog [Return] to read the 10 last lines of the ”XXlog” file
tail – NN XXlog | more [Return] to read the NN last lines of the ”XXlog” file.
185
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
Write the logfiles on a diskette

D Insert a blank diskette into the drive, and format it :
D Create the DOS filesystem and mount the diskette :
mkfs.msdos /dev/fd0 [Return]
D Save the desired logfile(s0 onto the diskette
cp XXXlog YYYlog ZZZlog /mnt/floppy [Return]
i.e : cp dbrlog dbrlog.* dbwlog dbwlog.* imslog /mnt/floppy [Return]
(save the dbrlog and dbrlog compressed files, dbwlog and compressed , imslog)
D When this is done, umount the diskette
D Manually eject the diskette from the drive.
To read the logfiles on a PC, rename them with a .txt extention.
3 INTERNAL SYSTEM/IMAGE DISKS ORGANIZATION

TROUBLESHOOTING
/boot: Linux Operating System files (not a serviceable part)

/export/dbsroot: From the AW4.2_04.10_EXT release, this is used by the PostgreSQL database
(not a serviceable part)
/export/cdr: Directory for the CD Recorder to temporarily store the files to record.
/export/home1/sdc_image_pool:
– ./archive: not used.
– ./cdr: not used.
– ./compress: not used.
– ./failed_to_reinstall: directory where the images that could not be properly declared to the
Database are stored.
– ./images: Logical paths to the images in the form of patient, exam, series, image
(i.e.: /p1/e2/s3/i5.1) and images.
– ./local_cdrom: not used.
– ./models: directory where 3D models are stored.
– ./network: not used.
– ./new: not used.
– ./reserved: directory managed by the system to reserve space for the processes to run.
186
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
49
/export/home/sdc:
– ./afm: directory which contains the AW fonts.
– ./apache: directory which contains the httpd.conf configuration file
– ./app–defaults: directory which contains the Application default configuration files
– ./bin: directory which contains the binaries used by Application.
– ./catalog_message: directory which contains Application messages.
– ./CD–Viewer: Is the CD–RW directory.
– ./core: Is a directory where all Application core files are dumped to in case of crash.
– ./denta, vxtl, nav, fctl etc...: These directories are created when installing Dentascan. 3D,
Navigator, FuncTool etc... Advanced Applications.
– ./doc: Is a directory where all AW4.2 documentation files are stored in PDF format.
– ./DataExport: directory which contains the DataExport application files.
– ./film: This directory is used by the Filming option.
– ./import: directory where any image is placed before , in order to be integrated into the images
directory.
– ./install: This directory contains all installation and de–installation scripts.
– ./lib: directory which contains the libraries used by Application.
TROUBLESHOOTING
– ./license: directory which contains the software licence keys.
– ./licenseServer: directory which contains the binaries to check the licence keys.
– ./logfiles: directory which contains the logfiles generated by Application.
– ./messages: directory which contains other Application messages.
– ./scripts: This directory contains all NON–installation scripts. Among them, you can find the
sdc_conf and sdc_crash scripts, the showdasm, showmod etc... test scripts, the start.sdc and
kill.sdc scripts.
– ./.options: Contains the installed Postscript printers.
– ./plugin: Contains .so system files .
– ./Prefs: Contains the basic Users preferences files or directories, and Site parameters.
It also contains files such as SdCRHosts file where is stored information about Hosts
accessible from AW, Applications preferences (FunctoolPrefs, etc ..), files named XXXX.dev ,
YYYYY.dev, ... for the Dicom Printers installed, etc ...
It also contains the .LicenseInst file with all the Applications license keys stored on the
workstation.
– ./Users: Contains other Users directories and settings.
– ./UserPrefs: As Prefs for SDC user, it contains the other Users preferences settings.
187
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
4 MAIN DIRECTORIES AND FILES
/dev/md0
dbsroot /dev/md3
/dev/md2
/export home
/boot
/dev/sda1 sdc
/dev/sda1 AW files
/bin home1
import
/dev /lost+found
/etc sdc_image_pool
/floppy archive
/home cdr
compress
TROUBLESHOOTING
/INFORMIXTMP
failed_to_reinstall
/initrd /dev/md2
images
/dev/md4
/lib /dev/md4 /dev/md7
local_cdrom
/lost+found
models
/mnt
network
/sbin
new
/var
reserved
/usr
/opt insite
/tmp cdr /dev/md1

/proc (process table, /dev/md5
managed by UNIX). Size is not significant.
/dev/sdb3 Note : In italic style, Filesystem names

from AW4.2_04.10_EXT release
/mnt/unused_100Mb /dev/sdb3 (i.e: /dev/sdb3)
50
188
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
JOB CARD TSG 004 – Reformatting and/or Repartitioning Disks

1 FOREWORD
New disks from the manufacturer are formatted and contain a list of the media
NOTICE
defects. The following SHOULD ONLY BE DONE in case of troubles and/or doubt
on an already installed disk.
2 REPARTITIONING THE DISKS

There is no need to re–partition the disks. Repartitioning the disks would corrupt all data present
on the disks. In this case, you would have to proceed with the steps described in Chapter 1, Job
Card IST0 11: Complete Load From Cold using the KICKSTART diskette which automatically partitions
the internal hard disks before loading the Red Hat 7.3 Operating System, and the Application
software.
However, you can check the partitioning of your hard disks, in order to make sure they are correctly
partitioned.
D Open a Command Window and switch User to root :
TROUBLESHOOTING
Enter root password
D Check partioning of first SCSI hard disk
fdisk /dev/sda [Return]
The number of cylinders for this disk is set to 8924(XW8000) 17366(X4000).
There is nothing wrong with that, but this is larger than 1024,
and could in certain setups cause problems with:
1) software that runs at boot time (e.g., old versions of LILO)
2) booting and partitioning software from other OSs
(e.g., DOS FDISK, OS/2 FDISK)
Command (m for help): m [Return]
Command action
a toggle a bootable flag
b edit bsd disklabel
..........................
q quit without saving changes
..........................
x extra functionality (experts only)
Command (m for help): p [Return]
The following example is for the 73GB Hard disks of the XW8000 workstation.
Partitioning of the 36GB hard disks for the X4000 workstation is slightly different, but the principle
remains the same.
189
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
JOB CARD TSG 004 – Reformatting and/or Repartitioning Disks 2 of 6
Disk /dev/sda: 255 heads, 63 sectors, 8924 cylinders

Units = cylinders of 16065 * 512 bytes
Device Boot Start End Blocks Id System
/dev/sda1 * 1 13 104391 83 Linux
/dev/sda2 14 274 2096482+ fd Linux raid autodetect
/dev/sda3 275 405 1052257+ 82 Linux swap
/dev/sda4 406 8924 68428867+ f Win95 Ext’d (LBA)
/dev/sda5 406 8208 62677566 fd Linux raid autodetect
Command (m for help): q [Return]
D Check partioning of second SCSI hard disk
fdisk /dev/sdb [Return]
The number of cylinders for this disk is set to 8924.
There is nothing wrong with that, but this is larger than 1024,
and could in certain setups cause problems with:
TROUBLESHOOTING
1) software that runs at boot time (e.g., old versions of LILO)

2) booting and partitioning software from other OSs
(e.g., DOS FDISK, OS/2 FDISK)
Command (m for help): p [Return]
Disk /dev/sdb: 255 heads, 63 sectors, 8924 cylinders
Units = cylinders of 16065 * 512 bytes
Device Boot Start End Blocks Id System
/dev/sdb1 * 1 261 2096451 fd Linux raid autodetect
/dev/sdb2 262 392 1052257+ 82 Linux swap
/dev/sdb3 393 405 104422+ 83 Linux
/dev/sdb4 406 8924 68428867+ f Win95 Ext’d (LBA)
/dev/sdb5 406 8208 62677566 fd Linux raid autodetect
/dev/sdb10 8733 8828 771088+ fd Linux raid autodetect
/dev/sdb11 8829 8924 771088+ fd Linux raid autodetect
Command (m for help): q [Return]
If disks partitioning is not as shown before, the workstation may need to be fully reloaded.
Refer to instructions detailed Chapter 1, Job Card IST011.
190
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
51
3 REFORMATTING THE SYSTEM DISK
REFORMATTING THE SYSTEM DISKS ERASES ALL DATA CONTAINED ON THE

WARNING
DISKS. THEREFORE, BOTH OPERATING SYSTEM AND A.W. APPLICATION
SOFTWARE WILL HAVE TO BE RELOADED.
THIS CAN BE DONE USING THE REGULAR LOAD FROM COLD PROCEDURE AS
DESCRIBED IN CHAPTER 1, JOB CARD IST 011.
New disks from the manufacturer are formatted and contain a list of the media
NOTICE
defects. The following SHOULD ONLY BE DONE in case of troubles and/or doubt
on an already installed disk.
3-1 Procedure for X4000 workstation

D Reboot your workstation
D Press simultaneously on <Ctrl> and <C> keys when prompted, to enter SCSI select Utility.
SCSI Card : XX.. at Bus : XX ... Device : XX...
Would you like to configure the host adapter .........
TROUBLESHOOTING
Options
Configure/View Host ..............
SCSI Disk Utility
D With the Up and Down arrows, choose the SCSI Disk Utility and type [Return] to accept.
Select SCSI Disk and press <Enter>
SCSI ID#0 : Quantum Atlas ............

SCSI ID#1 : Quantum Atlas ............
SCSI ID#2 : No device
.............................
SCSI ID#7 : Adaptec SCSI card XXX
SCSI ID#8 : No device
.............................
D Select disk 0 or disk 1 with the Up and Down arrows and press [Return] to accept.
191
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
52

Select SCSI Disk and press <Enter>
SCSI ID # 0 : Quantum Atlas ...

Firmware : XXXX
Capacity : XXXX MBytes
Format Disk
Verify Disk Media
D At this time, choose either to verify the disk or to format it.

Select with the Up and Down arrows and press [Return] to accept.
VERIFYING DISKS DOES NOT HARM DATA AND IS INTERRUPTIBLE BY

WARNING
PRESSING ON THE <ESC> KEY.
!!!! FORMATTING THE DISKS ERASES ALL DATA ON THE DISKS !!!!!
MAKE SURE YOU HAVE MADE ALL NECESSARY BACKUPS, AND THAT YOU
HAVE ALL NECESSARY SOFTWARE MEDIA TO RELOAD YOUR DISKS AFTER
FORMATTING HAS COMPLETED.
TROUBLESHOOTING
Formatting is not interruptible and takes about 30 minutes per disk to complete.
3-2 Procedure for XW8000 workstation

D Reboot your workstation
D Press simultaneously on <Ctrl> and <C> keys when prompted, to enter SCSI select Utility.
The system enters the Symbios setup utility.
LSI Logic MPT SCSI Setup Utility Version MPTBIOS–XXX
<Boot Adapter List> <Global Properties>

LSI Logic Host Bus Adapter
Adapter PCI ......
Bus ......
<LSI1030 3 28> 2000 3 Yes 0 Enabled
<LSI1030 3 29> 2000 3 Yes 0 Enabled
F1 = Help XXXXXX XXXXXX

Esc = Abort/Exit XXXXXX XXXXXX
192
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
53
D Make sure that <LSI1030 3 28> is selected (this is the controller for the 2 SCSI Hard disks), then
press on the [Return] key to continue.
The message ”Scanning devices” displays and the window changes to the Adapter Properties Menu.
Adapter Properties
Adapter PCI ......
Bus ......
LSI1030 3 28
<Device Properties>
Host SCSI ID
SCSI Bus Scan Order
.............
.............

TROUBLESHOOTING
D Make sure that Device Properties is selected, then press on the [Return] key to continue.
The window changes to the Device Properties Menu.

Device Properties
SCSI Device identifier MB/Sec MT/Sec Data Scan Scan
ID width ID Lun
0 SEAGATE ST373453LW HPS2 320 [160] [16] [Yes] [Yes]
1 SEAGATE ST373453LW HPS2 320 [160] [16] [Yes] [Yes]
2 – ..............
3 – ..............
....................
....................

D With the right and left arrows, move to Format.

With the up and down arrows, choose to format either disk 0 or disk 1
When this is done, press on the [Return] key to continue.
193
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
54
The window changes to the Format Menu

Format
SCSI Device identifier
ID
0 SEAGATE ST373453LW HPS2
Status
WARNING! Format will change the sector size to ....
Format will permanently erase all data ............
......................
Hit Enter to continue or any other key to cancel

D Hit the [Return] key to start formatting the disk.

TROUBLESHOOTING
!!!! FORMATTING THE DISKS ERASES ALL DATA ON THE DISKS !!!!!
WARNING
MAKE SURE YOU HAVE MADE ALL NECESSARY BACKUPS, AND THAT YOU
HAVE ALL NECESSARY SOFTWARE MEDIA TO RELOAD YOUR DISKS AFTER
FORMATTING HAS COMPLETED.
Formatting is not interruptible and takes about 50 minutes per disk to complete.
55
194
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
JOB CARD TSG 005 – Using HP Diagnostics Tool Cdrom

1 EQUIPMENT NEEDED
D Linux Diagnostic CD for HP X4000 : P/N : A7819–91005 OR
HP Insight Diagnostics for XW8000 : P/N : 2396486
D One formatted floppy diskette.
2 RUNNING E–DIAG TOOLS (X4000)

D Shutdown the workstation
D Insert the Linux Diagnostic CD for HP X4000 into the drive and boot the workstation.
D Press on <F12> when prompted, to enter the Boot menu.
The system starts booting from the Cdrom.
The Boot menu pops up after a while.
Boot Menu
1. +Removable Devices
2. ATAPI CD–ROM drive
TROUBLESHOOTING
3. +Hard Disk Drive
4. Network Boot
5. Intel(R) Boot Agent Version X.XX
<Enter Setup>
D With the Up and Down arrows, select 2. ATAPI CD–ROM drive and press [Return] to start
booting from the Cdrom.
The e–DiagTools menu pops up.
e–DiagTools
For HP Desktop PCs
Welcome To e–DiagTools
F1 F2 F3
D Click on F2 to continue
195
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
56
JOB CARD TSG 005 – Using HP Diagnostics Tool Cdrom 2 of 8
The e–DiagTools Warning menu pops up.
e–DiagTools
e–DiagTools
Before continuing, ensure that the following .......
a) In the Security Menu, all Hardware Protection ......
b) If the Main setup menu has an item running .........

If your system is not configured correctly, press F3 ...
F2 F3
D If you have not modified the parameters in the BIOS, no Hardware Protection items should be
disabled on our systems, nor Plug&Play OS items are running.
Click on F2 to continue.
The Detection menu pops up, then out after a while.
e–DiagTools
TROUBLESHOOTING
Detection in progress Config detect
................................
.........................
The Configuration Description menu pops up.
e–DiagTools
Configuration Description
hp workstation ....
........................... e–DiagTools has identified ...
You can save .....
F1 F2 F3 F4
D Click on F2 to start the test session.
196
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
57
The Basic System Test menu pops up.
e–DiagTools
Basic System Test

e–DiagTools will now test the operation ...
This test will take about 5 minutes .....
Press F2 to begin the test
F1 F2 F3
D Click on F2 . The Basic System test–running menu pops up.
e–DiagTools
Basic System Test–Running

XX test in progress
XXXX Test : PASSED
TROUBLESHOOTING
YYYY Test : XX%
.........
e–DiagTools ........
WARNING : ..... ....
PLEASE WAIT
The test takes about 5 minutes to complete. Please standby.

When the test has completed, the Basic System test Result menu pops up.
e–DiagTools
Basic System Test Result

PASSED
e–DiagTools ........
You can save the test result .....;
To go to the advanced system test ...
F2 F3 F4 F5
D Click on F2 if you want to run the advanced system test or F5 if you want to repeat the basic test.
In order to save the result of the test(s) into a text file, click now on F4.
197
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
The Support Ticket menu pops up.
e–DiagTools
Support Ticket
You can save your configuration information and .....;
The Support Ticket file will be saved as ”hpsuppt.txt
To create a Support Ticket, press F4...
F1 F2 F4
D Click on F4 to create the support ticket.

The Support Ticket–Specify Location menu pops up.
e–DiagTools
Support Ticket – Specify Location
Select the location where you want to store .....;

Press F12 to change : x Floppy Disk
TROUBLESHOOTING
Temporary Area
If you select a temporary area ...
If you select floppy disk ......
F2 F3 F4 F12
D Click on F12 to select either to save on a Floppy disk, or on a temporary file.

If you select to save on the Floppy disk, you need to insert now a formatted diskette into the drive.
D Click on F4 to save. In the example below, we have chosen to save on a temporary area.
A progress menu pops up, then out. The Support Ticket menu pops up.
e–DiagTools
Support Ticket
Your Support Ticket has been created on a temporary ....
You can press F7 to view...
F2 F3 F7
D Click on F7 to view the results of the test.
198
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
58
3 RUNNING HP INSIGHT DIAGNOSTICS (XW8000)

D Shutdown the workstation
D Insert the HP Insight Diagnostic CD for HP XW8000 into the drive and switch on the workstation.
The HP Diagnostics program is booting from the Cdrom:
ISOLINUX 2.04 ...............
Loading HP Insight Diagnostics CD. Please wait
boot: ....
Loading: ...
It takes about one minute before the HP Insight Diagnostics menu pops–up.
hp HP Insight
Diagnostics
Select the language to use during the Insight Diagnostics process
.. English Francais
Deutsch Italiano
TROUBLESHOOTING
Espanol Chinese
Select the keyboard to be used with this system
English
Continue
D Make sure that you keep the English Language and the English Keyboard selected.
The diagnostics tool Cdrom has only been validated with these settings.
D Click on Continue.
The End User License Agreement window displays.
D Click on Accept to continue.
The Loading HP Insight Diagnostics message window pops up.
It takes about 20 seconds to load the program, then the following window displays
199
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
59
hp HP Insight Diagnostics
SmartStar edition
Version XX.XX
Survey Test Status Log Help Save About Exit
View
Summary System
Categories
Total Memory
Communication
Logical Disks
Storage
PCI Slots
D Click on the Test tab.

TROUBLESHOOTING
The Test window pops–up.

In the example below, we keep the Quick Test selected and the Unattended mode
You can choose to test all the workstation’s hardware devices, or only some of them, and the number
of times you want to run the test (number of loops).
SmartStar edition
Version XX.XX
Type of Test Quick Test

Quick
Complete Select a device to test
Custom
All devices
. Number of loops 1
Test Mode
Interactive . Total Test (minutes)
Stop on first error
. Unattended
Begin Testing
200
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
60
D Select All devices (or choose the device(s) you want to test.
Select a number of loops (1 by default), or the number of times you want to run the test.
Choose to end the test on first error.
D Click on the Begin Testing .
The warning message window pops up.
! Please make sure all required media is installed for testing
OK
D Make sure that a formatted floppy diskette is inserted into the drive, in order to avoid the Floppy
Disk Drive test to fail, and click on OK to start the test.
The Test window pops–up.
In the example below, we keep the Quick Test selected and the Unattended mode
You can choose to test all the workstation’s hardware devices, or only some of them, and the number
of times you want to run the test (number of loops).
SmartStar edition
Version XX.XX
TROUBLESHOOTING
Test Status
Condition Legend Quick Test
Unknown Testing completed: All tests passed

100% Select New Tests Retest
. OK
. Failed Current Loop : X of XX
Device Test Status Test progress Test time
––––––––– passed 100% XXX

––––––––– running XX% XXX
––––––––– waiting
––––––––– waiting
D Click on the Select New Tests , if you want to modify some of the testing parameters.
You may wish to restart the same test by clicking on the Retest button.
Once the test are done, you can check what has been logged, by clicking on the Log tab.
All reported errors will be displayed in the log.
If you want to save the tests results, as a Text file, on a Floppy diskette, insert a blank DOS formatted
diskette into the Floppy drive.
D Click on the Save button.
The Save window pops up.
201
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
61
SmartStar edition
Version XX.XX
XXXXXX File Name Save

XXXXXX
Please enter your desired filename. The file ..........
....................................................
D Type in the name you want to give to the test file (i.e: xw8000test) in the File Name window, make
sure your formatted floppy diskette is properly inserted in the drive, and click on Save when done.
TROUBLESHOOTING
! File write complete
OK
D Click on OK to continue.
D Click on Exit to quit the Diagnostics program.
? You have decided to exit the Diagnostics Utility.

click ”OK” to exit back to SmartStart or
”Cancel” to return to Diagnostics
OK Cancel
D Eject the Floppy diskette from the drive

WARNING: Be prepared to quickly eject the Diagnostics Cdrom from the drive.
D Click on OK to exit the Insight Diagnostics Utility.
The Cdrom is ejected from the drive.
Quickly remove it before the CD drive carriage closes again and the workstation starts rebooting
from the Diagnostics Cdrom.
62
202
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
JOB CARD TSG 006 – Troubleshooting Physical Network Problems

1 MONITORING COMMAND
Note: Login as root or switch user to root (su - root) to use the following commands.
Note: Internet numbers in text are used for example ONLY. Use internet numbers for your specific
network.
D Ping: connection test
ping X.X.X.X [Return] (internet address)
i.e : ping 3.45.13.110 [Return] (internet address)
PING 3.45.13.110 (3.45.13.110) from 3.249.12.127 : 56(84) bytes of data.

64 bytes from 3.45.13.110: icmp_seq=0 ttl=255 time=761 usec
64 bytes from 3.45.13.110: icmp_seq=3 ttl=255 time=1.286 msec
64 bytes from 3.45.13.110: icmp_seq=6 ttl=255 time=5.416 msec
.............................................................
TROUBLESHOOTING
Interrup by pressing <Ctrl> <C> when desired
––– 3.45.13.110 ping statistics –––
X packets transmitted, X packets received, 0% packet loss
round–trip min/avg/max/mdev = 0.394/0.823/5.416/0.980 ms
D Telnet: open a session on remote machine

(e.g.: get the date from OC console through the network – Job id = 13)
telnet 192.9.200.1 13[Return]
Trying 192.9.200.1
Connected to mr01–oc0
Escape character is ’^]’.
Date –––––––––––––
Connection closed by foreign host.
Note: A large percentage of dropped packages is not significant of network problems. It can be due
to a heavy activity of the network or the workstation that you ”spray”.
Note: Hosts are not updated in the /etc/inet/hosts file but can be found in the
/export/home/sdc/Prefs/SdCRHosts file. For this reason, it is not possible to use “ping”,
“telnet”, and similar commands using the hostname. The internet address must be used
instead. For example, to ping the MR operator’s console from the Advantage workstation, do
not use ping MR01_OC0. Instead, use: /usr/bin/ping 192.9.200.1 [Return].
203
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
JOB CARD TSG 006 – Troubleshooting Physical Network Problems 2 of 2
Note: In case of images transfert problem during query / retreive from AW to a remote host when
selecting ”patient transfer”, (the transfert failed with error message related to the host
declaration) and successfull transfer when selecting ”series transfer”, check the provider type
screen, in Network Manager.
(refer to IST 002 section 4-4).
D Rup: connected machines “up time“ and load average:
rup [Return]
192.9.100.4 up 1 day, 21:00 load average 0.00 0.00 0.02
192.9.100.2 up 1 day, 2:50 load average 0.21 0.00 0.03
...........
<CTRL–C> to exit
D Rusers: name of users logged in on remote machines:
rusers [Return]
Sending broadcast for rusersd protocol version X...
3.7.24.115.128.6 root root
3.7.24.114.128.1 sdc sdc sdc
...........
<CTRL–C> to exit.
D Arp: current internet–to–ethernet address translation of connected machines:
arp –a [Return]
Address . HWtype HWaddress Flags Mask Iface
TROUBLESHOOTING
3.45.13.110 ether 08:00:20:C6:FC:7E C eth0

3.249.15.254 ether 00:00:5E:00:01:03 C eth0
D Ifconfig: get internet (inet) address, netmask value, broadcast:

ifconfig eth0 [Return]
eth0 Link encap:Ethernet HWaddr 00:E0:81:00:4A:2B
inet addr:3.249.12.127 Bcast:3.249.15.255 Mask:255.255.252.0
UP BROADCAST RUNNING MULTICAST MTU:1500 Metric:1
RX packets:51095 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 frame:0
TX packets:191 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 carrier:0
collisions:0 txqueuelen:100
RX bytes:7766887 (7.4 Mb) TX bytes:15189 (14.8 Kb)
Interrupt:21 Base address:0xa000
D ifconfig –a [Return] will get you information on other ethernet controllers if applicable:
For XW8000, the additional ethernet board defaults to eth0, and the Ethernet controller on the
Mother board is eth1.
2 USING HP DIAGNOSTICS TOOL

(see Job Card TSG 005)
63
204
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
JOB CARD TSG 007 – Hooking up Laptop as a Terminal for Diagnostics

1 EQUIPMENT NEEDED
D AT to Modem cable: DB9 female / DB25 male.
D Null modem adapter:DB25 male / DB25 female.
D GE Field Laptop.
2 EQUIPMENT CONNECTION
D Shutdown and turn OFF workstation.
D Disconnect Modem (if applicable).
D Connect cable(s) from CPU box ,labelled Port A or B, to Laptop Mouse port as shown.
ÀÀÀ
D Disconnect the Keyboard cable.
ÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀ
Null Modem
ÀÀÀ
AT to Modem cable adapter
25p 9p
ÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀ
TROUBLESHOOTING
9p
ÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀ
Laptop
Mouse Port
Serial Port A
Disconnect the Keyboard !!!
Note: Workstation’s Serial Port may be set up for RS232 instead of RS423 (US). Refer to
X4000 or XW8000 Service manual.
3 LAPTOP SET UP
1. Turn ON Laptop.
2. Open Windows on Laptop.
3. Select Accessories group.
4. Select Terminal then Setting on the Menu Bar.
5. Move down to Terminal emulation and select DEC VT100 mode (Click on OK).
205
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
JOB CARD TSG 007 – Hooking up Laptop as a Terminal for Diagnostics 2 of 2
6. Select Setting on the Menu Bar.

7. Move down to Communications and Select the following parameters (Click on OK):
– Connectors: COM1
– Baud Rate: 9600
– Data Bits: 8
– Parity: None
– Flow Control: XON / XOFF
– Stop Bits: 1
8. Select Setting on the Menu Bar.
9. Select Terminal Preferences.
10. Deselect the check–box at the very bottom of the window labeled: ”Use function, Arrow, and Crtl
Keys for Windows” (Click on OK).
4 TEST PROCEDURE
1. Cycle power on AW CPU box and monitor.
Boot messages will appear on Laptop terminal. Frame buffer will not be seen in boot up script as
IO is through ttyS0/ttyS1.
TROUBLESHOOTING
2. You cannot run the Window manager with this arrangement but you can navigate through the
various directories or run diagnostics. The screen gets a bit garbled with the terminal.
– Login as root root [Return].
– setenv TERM vt100 [Return].
– clear [Return].
– cd /export/home/sdc [Return]
Navigate through directories.
64
206
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
JOB CARD TSG 008 – Create a Kickstart Diskette

1 FOREWORD
It may happen, when attempting to do a Load From Cold (O.S + Application SW load), to find out that
the Kickstart diskette has been lost or corrupted. If you are close to another site with a similar
equipment, you can make a Kickstart floppy from the workstation there. If you do not easily have
access to another workstation, follow the procedure below in order to build one from a blank floppy.
Note: Kickstart floppy diskettes are compatible from one workstation to another. This means that
you can use a Kickstart diskette made at another similar workstation (and same AW software
release).
FROM THE AW4.2_04.10_EXT RELEASE, THE GEMS LINUX 1.8.12 OPERATING

WARNING
SYSTEM MUST BE USED AND THE KICKSTART DISKETTE IS NO LONGER
NECESSARY.
2 CREATE THE KICKSTART DISKETTE FROM AN OPERATIONAL AW

LINUX WORKSTATION
TROUBLESHOOTING
Note: Make sure the software release is the same as the one needed to reload your workstation.
D Insert one blank floppy into the drive.
D Insert the AW software Cdrom into the drive.
D Login as root or switch user to root
D Mount the Cdrom
mount /mnt/cdrom [Return]
D change to /mnt/cdrom/kickstart directory:
cd /mnt/cdrom/kickstart [Return]
D Run the write_kickstart script:
sh write_kickstart [Return]
This script will create a bootable kickstart floppy disk.
Please insert a floppy in the drive
The floppy will be completely erased
Press <ENTER> when ready [Return]
creating the floppy...
......................
unmounting the floppy...
OK, install floppy created
To automatically install Red Hat Linux for AW, boot from this floppy ...
Your Jumpstart floppy is ready. You can manually eject it from the drive.
207
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
JOB CARD TSG 008 – Create a Kickstart Diskette 2 of 4
D Unmount and eject the AW Cdrom

cd [Return]
umount /mnt/cdrom [Return]
eject cdrom [Return]
3 CREATE THE KICKSTART DISKETTE FROM A ”DOWN” AW LINUX

WORKSTATION
In case of missing or failing Kickstart diskette, it is still possible to reload a ”down” system.
In order to do this, you will have to load a ”basic” Linux O.S on your workstation, and therefore be able
to mount the AW Cdrom and create a Kickstart diskette.
Once your Kickstart diskette is done, proceed with Load From Cold steps as described into Chapter 1,
IST011 Job Card.
PROCEDURE
1. !! Remove any diskette from the Floppy drive !!
Insert the Linux 7.3 #1 Cdrom into the drive, and press on the <Reset> button.
The system starts booting from the Cdrom
2. At the ”Welcome to Red Hat”screen, press [Return] to continue.
3. At the ”Red Hat Linux” screen, click on the Next button.
4. Accept all the following setups by clicking on the Next button.
TROUBLESHOOTING
– Language = English
– Keyboard = Generic 105–key ; US English ; enable dead keys
– 3 buttons mouse (PS/2)
5. Installation type : Select Install and Custom . Click on the Next button when done.
6. Disk partitioning setup : Select ”Have the installer automatically partition for you”.
Click on the Next button when done.
7. Automatic Partitioning: Select ”Remove all Linux partitions on this system”.
Keep disks sda and sdb selected (highlighted in blue).
A WARNING message pops up asking for confirmation :
”You have selected to remove .... Are you sure ....” Click on the Yes to accept.
8. Disk setup screen :
Accept the current settings. Click on the Next button.
Confirmation screen : Click on the Yes to accept.
9. Boot loader config screen:
Keep Use GRUB as boot loader selected.
Select Install boot loader record on /dev/sda.
Accept the other settings. Click on the Next button when done.
10. Boot Loader Password configuration screen:
Do not enter a password : Click on the Next button.
11. Firewall configuration screen :
Select NO firewall. Click on the Next button when done.
208
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
65
JOB CARD TSG 008 – Create a Kickstart Diskette 3 of 4
12. Accept all the following setups by clicking on the Next button.
– additional language support = English (USA)
– Time Zone = ....
13. Account configuration screen:
Enter operator (use no CAPS) in the Root password and Confirm fields.
14. Package group selection:
Deselect ALL the packages. Click on the Next button when done.
Note: If you fail to de–install all the packages, the Red Hat Linux installation program will later on,
prompt you to insert the 2nd Red Hat Cdrom, to install other files.
15. About to install screen:
All packages deselected ? Ready to install. Click on the Next button.
It should take about 3 minutes to install the ”mini” Linux packages.
16. Boot disk creation:
Skip the boot diskette creation. Click on the check box to deselect.
17. Click on the Exit button.
18. Remove the Red Hat Linux Cdrom from the drive.
TROUBLESHOOTING
The workstation reboots from the ”mini” Linux. Wait for boot completion.
19. Login as root. Enter the root password.
20. Insert now a blank diskette in the Floppy drive.
Insert the AW software Cdrom in the Cdrom drive.
21. Mount the cdrom and run the write_kickstart script:
D mount /mnt/cdrom [Return]
D cd /mnt/cdrom/kickstart [Return]
D sh write_kickstart [Return]
22. Unmount the Cdrom and eject it.
D cd [Return]
D umount /mnt/cdrom [Return]
D eject [Return]
You kickstart diskette is ready.
You now have to do a complete software reload of your workstation (L.F.C.) as described in Chapter 1,
Job Card IST011.
209
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
Blank page.
66
TROUBLESHOOTING
210
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
JOB CARD TSG 009 – Logfiles Information

1 LOGFILES
1-1 Installation Logfiles
Note: Starting from the AW4.2_04.10_EXT release, the kickstart diskette is no longer necessary, as
we use a dedicated GEMS Linux OS, embedding the Kickstart mechanism.
This does not impact the following preinstall.log and install.log files.
Installation Logfiles can be found under /export/home directory.
D Change to the logfiles directory and list contents:
cd /export/home [Return]
ls –la [Return]
D preinstall.log:
This logfile gives information prior to the launch of install.aw, from the kickstart / Red Hat Linux
or GEMS_Linux OS post–installation script.
D install.log:
TROUBLESHOOTING
This logfile gives information after the launch of install.aw
1-2 Logfiles List
Note: Starting from the AW4.2_04.10_EXT release, the logfiles mechanism is slightly modified.
i.e: Prior to AW4.2_04.10_EXT : dbrlog.date.Z where date = FriSep615:15:04 for example
From AW4.2_04.10_EXT : dbrlog.n.gz where 1<n<10
The 2 mechanisms will be detailed later in this chapter
Logfiles can be found under /export/home/sdc/logfiles directory, or accessed directly through the
Maintenance menu. The size of each logfiles may be different from those of your workstation.
D Change to the logfiles directory and list contents:
cd /export/home/sdc/logfiles [Return]
ls –la [Return]
AimGatewaylog: Dedicated to log space reservations made by the Print Manager to AIM.
(For AW Engineering use only).
anonymousmakerlog: Dedicated to log actions to save exams under no_name patient.
(this is mostly used for demos or presentations where the patient’s name
should not appear).
appmanagementlog: Dedicated to log declarations of applications.
awalog: Dedicated to log actions on the Control panel of the Viewer.
browser_nuilog: Dedicated to log actions on the Control panel of the Browser.
211
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
JOB CARD TSG 009 – Logfiles Information 2 of 6
browserlog: Dedicated to log actions on the Viewer.

daslog: Logfiles for the Dicom MOD (Sony or Maxoptix).
dbrlog: Database Read logfiles.
dbwlog: Database Write logfiles.
dclimg: Mini Viewer log
dcslog: Dedicated to log data transfers in Dicom protocol.
dcspush.log: Dicom push logfiles.
dentacamera.logs: Dentascan print logfiles.
dicomPrintlog: Dicom print logfiles.
dmslog: Logfiles for the Dicom CD–R.
filmComposerProxylog: Dedicated to log the requests made by older Advanced Applications which
previously used the Film Composer, to the Scrapbook.
hostmanagementlog: Dedicated to log the process of new Hosts declaration.
importimagelog: Dedicated to log the process to import the images into the Database.
imslog: Dedicated to log the process to declare the images into the Database.
inst_startlog: Installation logfiles.
installog: Installation logfiles.
lcbuildlog: Logfiles for Printing through Advanced Applications (Batch Filming for V.A.).
logoutlog: Dedicated to log the logouts actions.
lpNetlog: Unix Logfiles for Postscript printing.
lpschedlog: Logfiles of the Unix Line printer demon for Postscript printing.
miniviewerlog: Logfiles of the Mini Viewer.
mosaicDisplaylog: Logfiles of the Mosaic display.
TROUBLESHOOTING
netlog: Network server log. All internal processes transit through the Netserver.
printManagerlog: Dedicated to log printers configurations and film generation.
prslog: Actual Print server logfiles.
queueManagementlog: Dedicated to log the Netwok and Media queues.
requestslog:
reinstall_database.log: Database reinstallation logfiles.
reviewStationlog: Logfiles of the Viewer.
sbooklog: Scrapbook logfiles.
sdcapplog: Dedicated to log start and stop of application.
sessionManagerlog: Dedicated to log the Protocols management.
testclientlog: Used by AW Engineering for software verification.
D Use either the more command if you want to read page by page the whole contents of the file, or
the tail command, (or tail –n , n being the number of lines you want to read), to see the most recent
messages logged. See example below:
more netslog [Return] or
tail dbrlog [Return] (last 10 lines) or
tail –n browserlog [Return] (last n lines)
212
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
67
Note: Logfiles are periodically ”cleaned”. It means that as soon as they grow up over a certain size,
they are compressed.
So you will also see compressed files of the form:
– Prior to AW4.2_04.10_EXT : dbrlog.date.Z where date = FriSep615:15:04 for example
These compressed files are erased every fifth day
– From AW4.2_04.10_EXT : dbrlog.n.gz where 1<n<10

These compressed files are erased after 10 occurences
To read a file, uncompress it first then read using more or tail commands as shown before:
uncompress XXlog.Date.Z [Return]
e.g.: uncompress dbrlog.FriSep615:15:04.Z [Return] OR
gunzip XXlog.n.gz [Return]
e.g.: gunzip dbrlog.6.gz [Return]
more XXlog.Date [Return]

e.g.: more dbrlog.FriSep615:15:04 [Return] OR
more XXlog.n [Return]
e.g.: more dbrlog.6 [Return]
1-3 Mostly used Logfiles and brief explanation
TROUBLESHOOTING
The first lines with the ## signs describe the system which the logfile is extracted from and the date
and time of process start.
e.g.:
## process: arslog
## date of creation: Fri Sep 15 08:32:39 2000
## hospital name: BUC_ENG
## hostname: SdC
## operating system: Linux
## operating system release: 2.4.18–10smp
## operating system version: #1 SMP <Date>
## machine hardware: i686
################################################################################
## date of process start: <Date>
################################################################################
D browserlog:
This logfile gives information about requests made to the browser such as selecting a patient
and opening the viewer, or receiving images and also returns of requests to servers.
D cdcomposerlog:
This logfile gives information about the Composer User Interface of the CD–RW.
213
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
68
D cdpreparatorlog:
This logfile gives information about the preparation steps prior to burn the CD–RW.
D cdrecordlog:
This logfile gives information about the Composer User Interface of the CD–RW.
D cdromMountlog:
cdromUmountlog:
cdromEjectlog:
These logfiles give information about the mounts, unmounts or ejects of the CD–RW.
D daslog:
This logfile gives information about the Dicom Archive (SONY Dicom MOD) Server.
D dbrlog: Database Read server

This logfile gives information about DATABASE in read mode.
D dbwlog: Database Write server

TROUBLESHOOTING
This logfile gives information about DATABASE in write mode.
D dcslog: Dicom Server Log

This logfile gives information about the DICOM Server.
D dcsstorequeryretrievelog:
This logfile gives information about the DICOM query/retrieve provider Server.
D dmslog: Dicom Media Server Log

This logfile gives information about the CD–RW drive Server.
D easyInstallLog:
This logfile gives information about the Easy Install utility.
D filmComposerProxylog:
This logfile gives information related to Filming with the Applications (Volume Viewer, Functool,
etc ...) using Film Composer compatibility files.
D filmerlog:
This logfile gives information related to Filming with the Viewer.
214
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
69
D imslog: Image Server Log

This logfile gives information related to the IMAGE Server (image file management on disks).
D mosaicDisplaylog:
This logfile gives information related to the Mosaic Display Viewer.
D netslog: Network activity Log

This logfile gives information related to the Network server.
D printManagerlog:
printManagerSlavelog:
This logfile gives information related to the Print Manager and Print Slave.
D prslog: Print Server Log

This logfile gives information related to the Print Server.
D S98sdcapp.log:
This logfile gives information related to starting AW application.
TROUBLESHOOTING
D sdcapplog:
This logfile gives information related to starting and stopping AW application.
D userlog:
This logfile gives information about the User.
D xautolocklog:
This logfile gives information about the application autolock.
2 USING SDC_CRASH UTILITY

D There is an utility under /export/home/sdc/scripts called sdc_crash. This script is an automated
process to collect all System logfiles, and dump them into a compressed file that can be
transferred through INSITE to the Support Center, or copied to a floppy diskette, or uncompressed
to be locally analysed.
D Switch User to root
Enter root password
D Build the crashlog file
/export/home/sdc/scripts/sdc_crash [Return]
215
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
i.e.: sdc_crash
Saving logfiles and Prefs...
Saving system information...
Saving database content...
Saving sdc configuration...
Compressing output file...
The file /tmp/AW_4_2_<Version>_<hostname>_<Date>.crash.tar.gz is ready
If you just wish to send this crash file to Engineering or to your Support Center, do the following:
D Insert a blank diskette into the drive, and format it :
D Create the DOS filesystem and mount the diskette :
mkfs.msdos /dev/fd0 [Return]
D Change dir to /tmp and copy the compressed file on a floppy diskette
cd /tmp [Return]
cp AW_4_2_<Version>_<hostname>_<Date>.crash.tar.gz /mnt/floppy [Return]
D When this is done, umount the diskette
D Manually eject the diskette from the drive.
TROUBLESHOOTING
If you wish to analyze yourself this crash file, do the following:

D Uncompress and untar the xxx.crash.tar.gz file and proceed to default analyze...
gunzip AW_4_2_<Version>_<hostname>_<Date>.crash.tar.gz [Return]
tar xvf AW_4_2_<Version>_<hostname>_<Date>.crash.tar [Return]
i.e :
x ./browserlog.SunMay715:15:02.Z, 1547 bytes, 4 tape blocks
....................................
x ./dbrlog.SunMay706:15:00.Z, 239 bytes, 1 tape blocks
X ./dbrlog.TueMay915:15:03.Z, 240 bytes, 1 tape blocks
..................................................
x ./dcslog.FriMay520:15:03.Z, 1120 bytes, 3 tape blocks
....................................................................
D List the contents of the available logfiles:
ls [Return]
.....................
dbrlog.SatMay615:15:03.Z
dbrlog.SunMay706:15:00.Z
......................
D Read the logfile(s):
i.e.: more dbrlog [Return]
70
216
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
JOB CARD TSG 010 – Running Processes Information

1 LIST OF THE RUNNING PROCESSES AND BRIEF EXPLANATION

First processes belong to Root and are started when booting–up.
There is not much you can do with them. They must be up and running before the AW application can
be started successfully.
If this is not the case, shutdown the workstation and boot it again.
D Run the following command :
ps –ef | grep more [Return]
Note: The following is an example, and may differ from what you get on the screen.
UID PID PPID C STIME TTY TIME CMD
root 1 0 0 06:48 ? 00:00:04 init
root 2 1 0 06:48 ? 00:00:00 [keventd]
root 4 1 0 06:48 ? 00:00:00 [ksoftirqd_CPU0]
root 5 1 0 06:48 ? 00:00:00 [ksoftirqd_CPU1]
root 6 1 0 06:48 ? 00:00:00 [kswapd]
root 7 1 0 06:48 ? 00:03:21 [kscand]
root 8 1 0 06:48 ? 00:00:00 [bdflush]
root 9 1 0 06:48 ? 00:00:01 [kupdated]
root 10 1 0 06:48 ? 00:00:00 [mdrecoveryd]
TROUBLESHOOTING
root 19 1 0 06:49 ? 00:00:00 [kreiserfsd]
root 516 1 0 06:49 ? 00:00:00 syslogd –m 0
root 521 1 0 06:49 ? 00:00:00 klogd –x
root 666 1 0 06:49 ? 00:00:00 xinetd –stayalive –pidfile /var/
root 751 1 0 06:49 ? 00:00:00 /export/home1/insite/server/bin/
nobody 753 751 0 06:49 ? 00:00:00 /export/home1/insite/server/bin/
nobody 755 753 0 06:49 ? 00:00:01 /export/home1/insite/java/bin/ii
root 772 1 0 06:49 ? 00:00:00 gpm –t ps/2 –m /dev/mouse
................................................................................
nobody 857 853 0 06:49 ? 00:00:06 /usr/java/jre1.3.1_03/bin/i386/n
xfs 920 1 0 06:49 ? 00:00:00 xfs –droppriv –daemon
nobody 925 806 0 06:49 ? 00:00:00 /usr/sbin/httpd –DHAVE_SETENVIF
..............................................................................
217
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
JOB CARD TSG 010 – Running Processes Information 2 of 4
When Application is started ...

... you can see that most of the next processes belong to sdc.
The servers are started first
sdc 1144 1 0 06:49 ? 00:00:00 netserver (network server)
sdc 1146 1 0 06:49 ? 00:00:00 dbrserver (database read server)
sdc 1148 1 0 06:49 ? 00:00:00 dbwserver (database write server)
sdc 1150 1 0 06:49 ? 00:00:00 imserver (image management server)
sdc 1152 1 0 06:49 ? 00:00:00 dcserver (Dicom server)
sdc 1154 1 0 06:49 ? 00:00:00 prserver (Print server)
root 1156 1 0 06:49 ? 00:00:00 dmserver (Dicom Media server)
sdc 1158 1 0 06:49 ? 00:00:00 daserver (Dicom Archive server)
..............................................................................
sdc 1372 1 0 06:50 ? 00:00:00 CdComposer

sdc 1374 1 0 06:50 ? 00:00:05 CdPreparator
sdc 1376 1 0 06:50 ? 00:00:01 xautolock –time 5 –locker xlockS
sdc 1378 1307 0 06:50 ? 00:00:00 mwm –display :0.1
sdc 1379 1307 0 06:50 ? 00:00:01 mwm
sdc 1382 1351 0 06:50 pts/0 00:00:00 –sh
sdc 1411 1368 0 06:50 ? 00:00:00 /export/home/sdc/bin/printManage
sdc 1412 1154 0 06:50 ? 00:00:00 prserver
TROUBLESHOOTING
sdc 1414 1150 0 06:50 ? 00:00:00 imserver

sdc 1415 1148 0 06:50 ? 00:00:00 dbwserver
sdc 1417 1364 0 06:50 ? 00:00:01 /export/home/sdc/bin/filmer_nui
sdc 1436 1364 0 06:50 ? 00:00:00 mosaicDisplay –iconic –parent 25
sdc 1476 1436 0 06:50 ? 00:00:00 mosaicDisplay –iconic –parent 25
sdc 1635 1417 0 06:50 ? 00:00:00 /export/home/sdc/bin/filmCompose
sdc 5996 1 0 11:50 ? 00:00:00 /bin/csh /export/home/sdc/script
sdc 6024 5996 0 11:50 ? 00:00:00 xterm –ie –sb –fb helvetica –fn
sdc 6026 6024 0 11:50 pts/1 00:00:00 –sh
sdc 7588 6026 0 12:57 pts/1 00:00:00 more
sdc 8597 8595 0 13:45 pts/3 00:00:00 –sh
root 8627 8597 0 13:45 pts/3 00:00:00 su –
root 8630 8627 0 13:45 pts/3 00:00:00 –csh
sdc 8786 8784 0 13:52 pts/4 00:00:00 –sh
sdc 8818 8786 0 13:52 pts/4 00:00:00 telnet 3.45.12.120
sdc 8870 1148 0 13:56 ? 00:00:00 dbwserver
root 9258 8630 0 14:09 pts/3 00:00:00 ps –ef
root 9259 8630 0 14:09 pts/3 00:00:00 more
218
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
Processes consequent to a remote login on the workstation can be running also, as shown below.
root 25609 712 0 16:27 ? 00:00:00 in.telnetd: 3.45.13.110
root 25610 25609 0 16:27 ? 00:00:00 login –– sdc
sdc 25611 25610 0 16:27 pts/2 00:00:00 –csh
Result of the ps –ef | more command starts the following processes :

sdc 25643 25611 0 16:28 pts/2 00:00:00 ps –ef
sdc 25644 25611 0 16:28 pts/2 00:00:00 more
2 RESTARTABLE PROCESSES
2-1 Restarting the BROWSER

You can either restart BROWSER from the ROOT MENU or by opening a Command Window and
typing in:
D cd /export/home/sdc/scripts [Return]
D sdcapp.csh –k [Return]
D restart_sdc.csh [Return]
TROUBLESHOOTING
2-2 Application Hung
D Remote log from another workstation or a Unix / Linux image source:
telnet <IP address of the hung workstation> [Return]
User : sdc [Return]
D cd /scripts [Return]
D sdcapp.csh –k [Return]
D restart_sdc.csh [Return]
If the processes cannot be restarted, shutdown and reboot the workstation :

D init 6 [Return]
D Restart application by login in as sdc on the workstation.
2-3 Restarting the Print Server

D Restart the Print server
/export/home/sdc/scripts/start_filming [Return]
219
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
3 ROOT MENU SCRIPTS

The following Root Menu utilities can be run from a Command Window. This can be usefull to run
these utilities remotely.
To access the Root menu, press simultaneously the <Alt> and <F3> keys.
Root Menu
Refresh Screen
Command Window
Save Configuration
Recover Database
Service Tools
Exit AW
”Restart AW” /export/home/sdc/scripts/restart_sdc.csh [Return]

TROUBLESHOOTING
”Exit AW” /export/home/sdc/scripts/sdcapp.csh –k [Return]

”Recover database” /export/home/sdc/scripts/reinstall.images.call [Return]
”Install SMPTE” /export/home/sdc/scripts/start_SMPTE [Return]
”AW Configuration Screen” /export/home/sdc/scripts/conf [Return]
”Service menu” /export/home/sdc/scripts/service_tool_menu [Return]
”Administration menu” /export/home/sdc/scripts/admin_menu [Return]
71
220
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
JOB CARD TSG 011 – Service Menu

1 ACCESSING AND USING THE SERVICE MENU

The Service Tools, which allow you to perform the basic maintance tasks, locally or remotely, are
accessible through various means:
– Locally or remotely through the CSD (Common Service Desktop) Html pages (see Section 2)
– Directly through the AW User Interface (see 1–1 ; 1–3)
– Remotely through Command line login and Unix commands (see 1–2 ; 1–3)
1-1 Access through the User Interface
TROUBLESHOOTING
The Maintenance Tools window pops up, prompting you to enter the root password:
Note: You can also get to the Service Tools menu through the Root menu, by pressing
simultaneously the <Alt> and <F3> keys.
1-2 Remote access

Note: The service_tool_menu has to be called by root or insite account.
D Remote log to AW.
D In the Command window, switch user to root:
D Change to the scripts directory and run the service_tool_menu utility:
./service_tool_menu [Return]
221
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
JOB CARD TSG 011 – Service Menu 2 of 10
1-3 Service Tools menu description

Service tools
MAIN MENU
DATABASE MENU.................1
NETWORK MENU..................2
*UNUSED*......................3
POSTSCRIPT PRINTER MENU.......4
DICOM PRINTER MENU............5
*UNUSED*......................6
DICOM MOD MEDIA MENU..........7
CDR MEDIA MENU................8
*UNUSED*......................9
PROCESS MANAGEMENT MENU......10
SYSTEM MENU..................11
ROOT MENU....................12
Enter your choice [?,q] [0]
TROUBLESHOOTING
Type the number of the sub–menu corresponding to the function you want to access.
1-3-1 Database and Image Management Menu

Enter your choice [?,q] 1 [Return]
DATABASE/IMAGE MANAGEMENT MENU

List patients in alphabetical order.................101
List exams given the patient name...................102
List exams given the patient internal number (pXX)..103
List series given the exams internal number (eXX)...104
List images given the series internal number (sXX)..105
Dump header of image................................106
Create a compressed tarfile of a series ............107
(given its internal number)
View recover database progression....................108
The result is the display of the patient list.
The result is the display of the patient identifier number / patient name.
The result is the display of the exam number / patient identifier number.
The result is the display of the series number / exam identifier number.
222
REV 2 sm 2381096–100

The result is the display of the images numbers / series identifier number.
The result is the display of the header of the image selected in the Browser.
The result is the creation of a chosen series compressed tarfile.
The result is the display of the Database recovery process progression.
1-3-2 Network Menu

NETWORK MENU
Add Host....................201
Remove Host.................202
view/Modify host............203
view queue IN/OUT...........204
send DICOM echo.............205
The result is the creation of a new host under Application.
TROUBLESHOOTING
The result is the display of the SdCRHosts file and access to delete a host.
The result is the display of the SdCRHosts file and access to its modification.
The result is the display of the que In and the queue OUT.
The result is the sending of a test message (echo) using the Dicom protocol to a chosen host.
1-3-3 Postscript Printer Menu
COLOR PRINTER MENU

View printer status.........401
View Print queue............402
– This menu allows you to check connectivity to the Postscript color and greyscale printer(s).
The result is the display of the Postscript printer status.
The result is the display of the Postscript printer queue.
223
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
1-3-4 Dicom Print Menu

DICOM PRINTER MENU

View printer status..........501
View Print queue.............502
The result is the display of the Dicom printer status.
The result is that a small image file is sent to the printer.
Note: The device name (Dicom Printers names) is given by menu 501.
The device file description path is:
/export/home/sdc/Prefs/<device_name.dev>
1-3-5 Dicom MOD Menu

DICOM MOD MEDIA MENU

View DICOM MOD status..........701
TROUBLESHOOTING
View DICOM MOD queue...........702

Clear DICOM MOD queue..........703
Insert an initialized Maxoptix MOD media into the drive for successful completion of the test.
The result is that the showdicmod program is run.
The result is that the exams candidate to be read from the MOD disk are displayed
The result is that the archive queue is cleared.
1-3-6 CDR Media Menu

CDR MEDIA MENU

View CDR media status..........801
View CDR media queue...........802
Clear CDR media queue..........803
Insert an initialized Dicom CD media into the drive for successful completion of this test.
The result is that the showcdr program is run.
224
REV 2 sm 2381096–100

The result is to display the exams candidate to be stored or read from the CD–R.
The result is that the CD archive queue is cleared.
1-3-7 Process Management Menu
PROCESS MANAGEMENT MENU

Restart AW..................1001
List of running processes...1002
Kill a process..............1003
Restart a process...........1004
View process size in KB.....1005
The result is that the AW application is killed and restarted.
The result is that all the running processes are listed.
The result is that a chosen process (see 1001 for list of processes) is killed.
TROUBLESHOOTING
The result is that a chosen process is started.
The result is that the size of a chosen process (see 1001 for list of processes) is displayed.
1-3-8 System Menu
SYSTEM MENU
Check partitioning.................1101
Create compressed crash logfile....1102
The result is the mounted filesystems table.
The result is the availability of a tared and compressed crashlog file dumped into /tmp directoy.
225
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
1-3-9 Root Menu

ROOT MENU
Recover Database..........1201
View A.W Configuration....1202
A.W Administration........1203
The result is the starting of the DATABASE RECOVERY process.
The result is the display of the AW configuration file.
The result is the starting of the ADMINISTRATOR menu.
This menu gives access to the Site’s Administrator basic tasks, such as saving and restoring the
Customer’s presets and/or Site Configuration parameters.
Enter your choice [?,q] 0 [Return] to return to the main menu.

Enter your choice [?,q] q [Return] to quit the Service Tools menu.
TROUBLESHOOTING
2 ACCESSING AND USING THE SERVICE MENU THROUGH THE CSD

HTML PAGES
D Start the Mozilla Web Navigator application
1 2
Click on More Click on Mozilla to open
to view the avail- a Web Navigator.
able applications
note: You can, if you
wish, drag&drop the
Mozilla application in
the main Applications
window, before starting
it, so it will be available
directly
The Mozilla Web Navigator starts
226
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
D Enter the following address into the Web address field :

http://localhost:80/modality–csd/serviceDesktop/index.htm [Return]
The Common Service Desktop utility starts
2
D Click on the Diagnostics icon. The Service Tools window displays. Select a Service tool. You will
TROUBLESHOOTING
be prompted to enter the root password once, prior to get access to the tools.
To access service tools, please enter the root password:
Ok
2 Type in the root password in the password field,

and click on Ok when done.
1 Click to start the desired Service Tools

i.e: Click on Add Host, to create a new entry
in the SdCRHosts, remote hosts file.
You are prompted to enter the root password.
227
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
i.e: The Add Hosts utility menu displays

TROUBLESHOOTING
D Enter the new host information in the corresponding fields. For more information on the Service
Tools, refer to Section 1–3 : Service Tools Menu description
D Click on another Service Tool, or quit the Service Tools menu when done.
Note: Access to the other utilites through the Image Quality, Calibration, Configuration, etc ..
buttons, is not implemented in the present release.
However, access to the AW logfiles is operational through the Error Logs button.
See example hereafter.
228
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
Access to the Error Log Viewer

You can review the Logfiles, by clicking on the Error Logs button, and select the Terra Log Viewer.
Prior to do this, you must grant ”read” permissions to the AW logfiles. In order to do this, proceed with
the following steps :
D Open a Command window
D In the Command window, switch user to root:
D Change to the logfiles directory and give the read permission for all logfiles
chmod +r * [Return]
Start the Error Log review
D Click on the Error Logs button, and select the Terra Log Viewer.
TROUBLESHOOTING
3 Select the appropriate start date
and time and end date and time
for the review.
1 Select the Terra Log Viewer
2 Select the logfile to review
D Select appropriate date and time for the review, select the logfile to review, then click on the
Show Log button.
229
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
The logfile displays in the Log Data window
Click on the Show Log button

TROUBLESHOOTING
Note: To filter the listed log entries, use the Filter log tool. Select one or more columns, enter the
filter cryteria (the text the colums shall contain)for these colums, and click on the Show
Results button.
D Click on another Logfile to review, or quit the Service Tools menu when done.
72
230
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
JOB CARD TSG 012 – Create a Flash diskette for BIOS and Firmware
The AW application has been fully validated , for HP X4000 with the BIOS version IU.W1.15US and
Firmware version 1.14, and for HP XW8000 with the BIOS versions JQ.W1.09US prior to
AW4.2_04.10 release and JQ.W1.11US from AW4.2_04.10 release.
Any other further versions may work fine, but have not been controlled. Therefore, after the
replacement of the Mother board (workstation swap), you should check and may need to flash the
BIOS and Firmware, to remain in a validated configuration.
1 CREATE A XW8000 FLASH DISKETTE

This step should be done only if you do not have a Flash diskette available. In order to do this, you
need to download from the AW–IB intranet web site onto your PC, or your AW workstation, the file
named xw8000BIOS_JQW109.dd (P/N : 2381107–3) or xw8000BIOS_JQW111.dd (P/N :
2381107–4) and create the Flash diskette.
Connect to the AW–IB Web site @ http://aw–ib.euro.med.ge.com (AW Service Manuals page)
1-1 From an AW4.2 XW8000 workstation

D Download the xw8000BIOS_JQW109.dd or xw8000BIOS_JQW111.dd file into the /tmp directory,
(you may download it first from your laptop then ftp it to the AW workstation).
D Open a Command window and switch User to root
TROUBLESHOOTING
Enter root password
D Change to the /tmp directory
cd /tmp [Return]
D Insert a blank diskette (write enable) into the drive
Note: Formatting the diskette is not necessary.
D Copy the bios image file onto the floppy diskette
dd if=xw8000BIOS_JQW109.dd of=/dev/fd0 [Return] prior to AW4.2_04.10 release OR
dd if=xw8000BIOS_JQW111.dd of=/dev/fd0 [Return] from AW4.2_04.10 release
D Extract the diskette when done, and write protect it and label it.
It is ready for use with your AW workstation to flash the XW8000 BIOS and Firmware.
2 CREATE A X4000 FLASH DISKETTE

This step should be done only if you do not have a Flash diskette P/N : 2348143–2 available.
In order to do this, you need to download from the AW–IB intranet web site onto your PC, or your AW
workstation, the file named bios115.zip and extract the necessary files to create the Flash diskette.
Connect to the AW–IB Web site @ http://aw–ib.euro.med.ge.com (AW Service Manuals page)
2-1 From a PC Personal Computer

D On your PC hard disk, open the Windows Explorer and create a folder to download the file :
i.e : C:\x4000
231
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
73
JOB CARD TSG 012 – Create a Flash diskette for BIOS and Firmware 2 of 4
D Download the bios115.zip file into the C:\x4000 folder.

D Double click on the bios115.zip file. The PKZIP for Windows menu pops–up.
Click on Extract – Extract files – All files
Select Extract to Disk and browse to select the right path C:\x4000.
Click on Extract. When this is completed, click on Done.
Click to close the PKZIP window.
D Double click on the bios folder created under C:\x4000 , to open.
Check that 3 files were created : bios115.img = 1140KB , rawrite.exe = 14KB , README.txt = 2KB
D From the Start button, Programs menu, select to open the MS–DOS prompt.
The MS–DOS Prompt window pops–up.
D Change to C:\x4000\bios directory :
cd c:\x4000\bios [Return]
D Insert a blank or DOS formatted diskette (write enable) into the drive
D Create the Flash diskette by typing :
rawrite –n –f bios115.img –d a: [Return]
It is ready for use with your AW workstation to flash the X4000 BIOS and Firmware.
2-2 From an AW4.2 X4000 workstation

D Download the bios115.zip file into the /tmp directory
TROUBLESHOOTING
D Log in as root or switch User to root

Enter root password
D Change to the /tmp directory and unzip the bios115.zip file
cd /tmp [Return]
unzip bios115.zip [Return]
D Check that 3 the bios115.img file has been created.
D Insert a blank diskette (write enable) into the drive
Note: Formatting the diskette is not necessary.

D Copy the bios115.img file onto the floppy diskette
dd if=bios115.img of=/dev/fd0 [Return]
It is ready for use with your AW workstation to flash the X4000 BIOS and Firmware.
3 FLASH THE BIOS AND FIRMWARE
3-1 Checking the BIOS and Firmware versions

D Power on the computer and press on <F2> to enter the BIOS setup.
232
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
74
D Check that the BIOS version is IU.W1.15US and Firmware version is 1.14 (X4000)
D Check that the BIOS version is JQ.W1.09US or JQ.W1.11US (XW8000)
Note: Even though the current BIOS and Firmware versions of your workstation would be higher
than the above recommanded versions, we recommand that you downgrade to the validated
BIOS and Firmware versions.
D Shutdown and turn off the workstation.
Press simultaneously on the <Ctrl> <Halt> <Del> keys before switching off the workstation.
3-2 Flash the BIOS and Firmware

D Insert the Flash diskette P/N : 2348143–2 (X4000) or P/N : 2381107–3 / 2381107–4 (XW8000)
into the floppy drive
D Turn on the workstation, or press the Reset button to reset the workstation.
The system starts booting from the diskette.
Note: If the following message appears, the diskette is probably deffective, or the floppy drive
needs to be cleaned/replaced.
Invalid system disk
Replace the disk, and then press any key
Insert a new Flash diskette and restart the computer.
TROUBLESHOOTING
X4000 workstation
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
HP workstation X4000 Bios/Firmware Flashing utility
BIOS ver. IU.W1.15US. Firmware ver. 1.14
Please choose from the options below
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
A Flash BIOS and Firmware
B Exit without Flashing
Choose an option [AB] ?
XW8000 workstation
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
HP workstation Xw8000 Bios Flashing utility
BIOS ver. JQ.W1.09US (or BIOS ver JQ.W1.11US).
Please choose from the options below
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
A Flash BIOS and Firmware
B Exit without Flashing
Choose an option [AB] ?
D Press on [A] key to start BIOS and Firmware flash process
233
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
Flashing Firmware
Firmware version in file = 0X.XX
Firmware version currently running = 0X.XX
..................................
Note: DO NOT TURN OFF WORKSTATION while the BIOS is being flashed.
If the Flash memory has been successful, you should get the following pop up window :
Phoenix Phlash16 Status
Flash memory has been successfully programmed
PRESS ANY KEY TO RESTART THE SYSTEM

If the system does not restart
TURN THE POWER OFF, THEN ON
D Power Off the workstation

D Eject the Flash diskette from the floppy drive.
D Power on the workstation and press on <F2> to enter the BIOS setup, in order to check that the
BIOS and Firmware have been updated.
4 XW8000 BIOS PARAMETERS SETUP

TROUBLESHOOTING
AFTER FLASHING THE BIOS ON XW8000, OR SETTING UP THE DEFAULT BIOS

WARNING
PARAMETERS, IT IS NECESSARY TO ENTER THE BIOS IN ORDER TO
PROPERLY SET THE ”INSTALLED O/S” AND ”LEGACY USB SUPPORT”
PARAMETERS. SEE PROCEDURE BELOW
Symptom
The screen displays the boot sequence, but blanks when the boot up has completed.
Check the setup the BIOS parameters
D Shutdown and reboot the workstation
D Press on the F2 key, when prompted, at the begining of the boot sequence.
D Under the BIOS , Main Tab, check that Installed O/S is set to [Other/NT/Linux]
D Under the BIOS , Main Tab, check that Legacy USB Support is set to [Disabled]
D Under the BIOS , Main Tab, move to set Asset Tag and press on the [Return] key.
The window changes to Asset Tag window. Type in directly GEMS_AW42 and press <F3> to save.
D Follow the guidelines of the hp workstation | PhoenixBIOS Setup utility, to select and change
values as appropriate.
D Save and quit the BIOS to take the change into account.
The workstation reboots again
234
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
JOB CARD TSG 013 – X4000 SYMBIOS changes to avoid boot hang up
Note: The following is only applicable to the X4000 workstation.

It IS NOT necessary for the XW8000 workstation.
The boot up sequence may hang due to the scanning of the unused upper SCSI ID’s (8 to 15), on the
2 SCSI channels.
In order to avoid or greatly reduce this risk, perform the steps as described in the below procedure.
Note: The following should only be done (or checked) in case of workstation swap, as the Symbios
is properly parametered from the factory.
1 PROCEDURE
D Shutdown the workstation.
D Cycle power to the workstation, or press on the Reset button to start rebooting.
D The workstation starts to boot up.
Press the <Esc> key when prompted.
D Press simultaneously on the <Ctrl> and <C> keys, when prompted after the Memory check
sequence.
TROUBLESHOOTING
The ”Symbios Host Bus Adapters” menu pops up, displaying the 2 SCSI channels.
D Press the <Enter> key. The message ”Scanning for devices” pops up, then out.
The ”Adapter Properties” menu pops up.
D Press the <Enter> key. The ”Device Properties” menu pops up.
D From device 8 to device 15, set the Scan ID and Scan Luns from [YES] to [NO], by using the arrow
keys and +/– keys.
When this is done, press the <Enter> key.
D Press the <Esc> key to return to the Adapter properties menu of the 1st SCSI channel.
D Press the <Esc> key to exit.
With the arrow keys, select <Save changes then exit this menu>.
Press the <Enter> key to select.
The system takes you back to the ”Symbios Host Bus Adapters” menu.
D Select the 2nd SCSI channel, and proceed with the same steps as for channel 1, in order to set
the Scan ID and Scan Luns from [YES] to [NO].
D When this is done, press twice on the <Esc> key, and select <Exit the Configuration menu>.
The workstation reboots.
235
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
75
JOB CARD TSG 013 – X4000 SYMBIOS changes to avoid boot hang up 2 of 4
Blank Page
TROUBLESHOOTING
236
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
CHAPTER 5 – DISASSEMBLY / REASSEMBLY PROCEDURES
1 OVERVIEW
This document contains directions to be followed when replacing the computer box, or one of the
following sub–assemblies located inside the computer box.
2 TOOLS REQUIRED
D 5 mm Phillips screwdriver.
D 5 mm flat–head screwdriver.
D Grounding wristband.
3 PREREQUISITES
If the workstation is switched on, exit the application. Select ”Logout” from the sdc root menu.
D See Chapter 3 for various other methods of shutting the system down.
D Wait for the ”Power down” message ( 30 sec) or automatic computer switch off.
D Switch off the monitor using the switch on the front.
D Switch off the computer. Switch off the SCSI device(s).
D Disconnect the cables:
– Keyboard – CPU box
– Mains power supply – CPU box
– Ethernet network – CPU box
– Monitor – CPU box
– SCSI – CPU box
DISASS. / REAS.
PROCEDURES
The boards and hard disk drives contain electronic components that are extremely sensitive to static
electricity. Do not touch the components themselves or any metal part.
Wear a grounding wrist strap when handling the drive assemblies, boards or cards.
5 PROCEDURES
On–line access to HP Service Manuals and other additional information can be

NOTICE
obtained from the AW–IB intranet site @ http://aw–ib.euro.med.ge.com
or from HP documentation Web site at :
XW8000: http://h200000.www2.hp.com/bizsupport/TechSupport/DocumentIndex.jsp?
X4000: http://h200005.www2.hp.com/bizsupport/TechSupport/DocumentIndex.jsp?
237
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
ITEM HP X4000 SERVICE MANUAL HP XW8000 SERVICE MANUAL

2348152–100 2381099–100
POWER ON/OFF AND INTERNAL CHAPTER 6 ; PAGE 100 CHAPTER 2 ; PAGE 24

ACCESS
POWER SWITCH ASSEMBLY CHAPTER 6 ; PAGE 132 CHAPTER 2 ; PAGE 53
SETTING SCSI ID ON HARD DRIVE CHAPTER 6 ; PAGE 118 CHAPTER 2 ; PAGE 43
SCSI HARD DRIVE CHAPTER 6 ; PAGE 116 CHAPTER 2 ; PAGE 38
CD–R DRIVE CHAPTER 6 ; PAGE 123 CHAPTER 2 ; PAGE 44
FLOPPY DISK DRIVE CHAPTER 6 ; PAGE 130 CHAPTER 2 ; PAGE 46
POWER SUPPLY N/A CHAPTER 2 ; PAGE 48
SYSTEM FAN N/A CHAPTER 2 ; PAGE 51
GRAHICS AND PCI CARDS CHAPTER 6 ; PAGE 112 CHAPTER 2 ; PAGE 34
MEMORY MODULES CHAPTER 6 ; PAGE 107 CHAPTER 2 ; PAGE 31
SYSTEM BOARD CHAPTER 6 ; PAGE 133 CHAPTER 2 ; PAGE 66
SYSTEM BATTERY CHAPTER 6 ; PAGE 142 CHAPTER 2 ; PAGE 70
CAUTION
All defective parts must be returned with no delay.
Parts which are not returned will be charged !!!
DISASS. / REAS.
PROCEDURES
ITEM DESCRIPTION
MOUSE REPLACEMENT The defective mouse does not need to be returned.
HARD DISK OR CD–RW Make sure to properly set the

DRIVE REPLACEMENT jumpers on the new disk or CD–R drive, as set on the defective drive.
Refer to HP X4000 Service manual for more details.
Note : New hard disks may need to be formatted. Refer to Chapter 4,

TSG004 for details.
Ship the defective unit to the return address mentioned within the package,
with no delay, using the ”Supplier Warranty Program process”.
Refer to Section 5–4 for details
238
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
ITEM DESCRIPTION
FLOPPY DISK DRIVE The defective Floppy disk drive does not need to be returned.
REPLACEMENT
KEYBOARD The defective keyboard does not need to be returned.

REPLACEMENT
FOREWORD
COMPUTER BOX
REPLACEMENT 1: Unpack the CPU box carefully, in order not to damage the packaging,
PROCEDURE which will have to be used to return the defective unit.
2: Your AW CPU box should at any time be labelled with a rating plate to men-
tion the CE marking and other Model and Serial numbers.
The FRU computer box is delivered with 1 blank rating plate and 1 blank ICD
card to be filled up. Store these parts cautiously in a safe place.
They are necessary for the new Computer Box.
CPU BOX REPLACEMENT
Note: Your Computer Box FRU unit may also be delivered with an extra
Keyboard and a box of accessories.
1 : DO NOT LEAVE on–site the Cdroms and other unnecessary items that
may contained in the workstation’s FRU package. Some of these Cdroms, if
improperly used by the customer, might lead to software corruption (see 5–1).
2 : Make sure to write on the spare Rating Plate of the swapped CPU box
the proper information for your site (see 5–2) .
3 : Fill up the ICD card with the necessary information and send it asap to
the GIB administration, so that the serial number and other appropriate info of
the new CPU box is properly entered in the
Global Installed Base database.
DISASS. / REAS.
PROCEDURES
4: If you return the hard disks with the defective unit, you should whenever
possible erase all patient data stored on the disks.
5: Make sure you return the locker key together with the defective worksta-
tion. Stick it with tape on the CPU back, key holder.
6: Make sure to remove the extra 2GB memory option modules and return
the workstation with the 2 CRIMM modules in place.
7: Carefully pack up the defective CPU box, making sure that NO parts is
missing. In the other case, your region will be charged for the missing parts.
Note : If an extra keyboard is delivered within the workstation FRU, it can be

kept on–site, and does not need to be returned.
8 : Ship the defective unit to the return address mentioned within the pack-
age, with no delay, using the ”Supplier Warranty Program process”.
239
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
ITEM DESCRIPTION
COMPUTER BOX NEW CPU BOX CHECKS

REPLACEMENT
PROCEDURE The AW FRU CPU box (X4000 or XW8000) you have received, may not have
the correct BIOS and proper BIOS settings.
(continued) The following items should be checked on the new CPU box
1: Check Firmware and BIOS. Refer to Chapter 4, TSG012 : Section 2 and

flash Firmware and BIOS if necessary
Make sure that the XW8000 BIOS is set to:
– O/S = [Other/NT/Linux]
– USB Legacy support = disabled
2: SYMBIOS changes to avoid boot hang up (X4000).

Refer to Chapter 4, TSG013 to update the Symbios.
3: 2GB Memory option : Check that you have reinstalled the additional
memory modules from the old CPU box, if applicable.
Ship the defective unit with the 2 CRIMM modules in place (X4000).
4: Your new CPU box is delivered with a basic Linux Red Hat loaded from
the HP factory.
If you choose not to reinstall the hard disk drives from the defective unit into
the new unit, you will need to proceed with a complete software reload L.F.C.
(Linux and AW4.2 software).
Refer to chapter 1, Job Card IST011.
DISASS. / REAS.
PROCEDURES
240
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
5-1 CPU box swap. Do not leave on site the following items
D Case 1 : The CPU box may be delivered with an extra keyboard and a box of accessories.
It is also delivered with a new CE rating plate and an ICD card.
– Keep the extra keyboard (if applicable) for spare.
– If the accessories box is present, (i.e: X4000) keep the E–diagstool cdrom (labelled
A7819–91005 ; Linux Diagnostic CD for x2000, x2100 and x4000 workstations) as well as the
DVI/VGA adapter cable (labelled A6064–63001), that can be used for spare.
– Dispose of all other unnecessary items such as Linux 7.1 Cdroms (x4000). DO NOT LEAVE
these items ON SITE !!!!
D Case 2 : The CPU box is a repaired workstation.
Therefore, it is not delivered with a keyboard and a box of accessories.
It is just delivered with a new CE rating plate and an ICD card.
5-2 CPU box swap. Fill up the new CE rating plate

The CE rating plate must be sticked to the workstation’s casing. It has to be carefully filled up in order
to be consistent with the Model number, Serial number, and licenseId number and AW software key.
Use a permanent ink pen, and write the corresponding numbers on the rating plate, before sticking it
up on the CPU box casing.
1 : Model number 2 : Serial number 3 : License ID number

XW8000: 2376975
X4000: 2348136 4 : license key value
4.1P: 2384894DHF
4.2: 2381487DHF
CE 0459
GE Medical Systems
DISASS. / REAS.
PROCEDURES
COPYRIGHT 2003 GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
283 RUE DE LA MINIERE
BP34 78533 BUC CEDEX FRANCE
D 1 : Model number : This number is 2348136 for the AW4.2 on HPX4000

: This number is 2376975 for the AW4.2 on HPXW8000
D 2 : Serial number : This number can be found at the rear or on top of the CPU box.
D 3 : LicenseId number. Open a Command window and type in : licenseId [Return]
D 4 : AW License key. This number corresponding to the LicenseId number of your new workstation,
will be delivered to you by your OLC. Call your OLC with FDO and site’s SystemID number to get
the new AW license key, as well as license keys for the options.
Finally carefully fill up the ICD card with both information on the new CPU box and on the returned
CPU box, and send it back with no delay to your GIB administrator.
241
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
5-3 Fill up the new ICD card
You have just swapped your computer box. You must fill up the ICD card and send it back to the GIB
organization, in order to have your new CPU box registered in GIB database, as well as the
defective one uninstalled.
Carefully write down all necessary installation and uninstallation information, such as Serial Numbers,
System IDs etc .. of the new and old CPU boxes, and send back the ICD sheets.
The information about the uninstalled CPU box, can be written at the rear of the installation card, if no
uninstallation sheet is available on the ICD card.
5-4 Send back the defective unit
Send back the defective CPU box, Hard Disk drive or CD–R drive as follows
WARNING : Make sure that NO PART is missing inside the defective CPU box, before sending it
back to the address mentioned on the delivery package. Any missing part will be charged to the
region.
The defective unit (or disk drive) must be sent back through the ”SWAP (Supplier Warranty Program)
process”.
Fill the red label identifying the defective unit with the following information:
D GEMS part number
D Job number
D Failure description :
i.e : e–DiagTools summary if appropriate.
D Workstation Serial number ( even for disk drives returned separately)
D FE contact name and ID number
D SWAP/DOI/DOA : Cross Swap Box.
DISASS. / REAS.
PROCEDURES
242
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
CHAPTER 6 – RENEWAL PARTS
RENEWAL PARTS
243
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
Blank page.
RENEWAL PARTS
244
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
ABBREVIATIONS
ITEM
NO.
– Not illustrated.
–6 Item No. 6 not illustrated.
FRU Field Replaceable Unit.
1 Critical.
2 Not critical.
N Not available.
REP
Y Repairable.
QTY
PL Previously listed as an assembly or subassembly.

AR As required.
APP Applies to.
Viewing direction.
Renewal Parts
REMINDER: ALL DEFECTIVE PARTS (EVEN NON–REPARABLE PARTS) MUST

WARNING
BE RETURNED THROUGH THE USUAL DEFECTIVE PARTS PROCESS.
IN THE OTHER CASE, EXTRA COSTS WILL BE CHARGED TO THE REGIONS.
245
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
ADVANTAGE WORKSTATION FRU LIST
A
ITEM
PART NO. FRU REP DESCRIPTION QTY P
NO.
P
1 2 3 4 5
– – ADVANTAGE WORKSTATION 4.2 1
– N 1
HP XW8000 WORKSTATION
– 1 2384276 1 S HP XW8000 CPU BOX (W/O KEYBOARD & W/O MOUSE) 1
– 2 2381078 1 S S HP XW8000 3 1/2 FLOPPY DISK DRIVE 1
– 3 2381079 1 S S HP XW8000 73GB SCSI U320 15K RPM HARD DISK 1
– 4 2381080 1 S S HP XW8000 CD–RW 32X24X48 IDE DRIVE 1
– 5 2387123 1 S S HP XW8000 512MB DIMM DDR 266 MODULE 2
– 6 2381077 1 S S HP XW8000 1.0GB DIMM DDR 266 MODULE 2
– 7 2381075 1 S S HP XW8000 450W POWERSUPPLY ASSY 1
– 8 2381076 1 S S HP XW8000 REAR SYSTEM FAN 1
– 9 2381085 1 S S HP XW8000 NVIDIA Q4 200NV GRAPHICS CARD 1
– 10 2386246 1 S S HP XW8000 INTEL PRO 1000XT ETHERNET CARD 1
– 11 2381081 1 S HP XW8000 3 BUTTONS MOUSE PS2 PC99 1
– 12 2381082 1 S HP XW8000 US ENGLISH KEYBOARD 1
– 13 2396486 1 S HP ”INSIGHT” DIAGNOSTICS CDROM (FOR XW8000) 1
– N 1
HP X4000 WORKSTATION
– 14 2353733 1 S HP X4000 CPU BOX (W/O KEYBOARD & W/O MOUSE) 1
– 15 2348402 1 S S HP X4000 3 1/2 FLOPPY DISK DRIVE 1
– 16 2348403 1 S S HP X4000 36GB SCSI U160 15K RPM HARD DISK 1
– 17 2348404–2 1 S S HP X4000 CD–RW 40X IDE DRIVE 1
– 18 2348405–2 1 S HP X4000 3 BUTTONS MOUSE 1
– 19 2348406 1 S HP X4000 US ENGLISH KEYBOARD 1
– 20 2357095 1 S HP X4000 EDIAG TOOLS CDROM 1
– N 1
SOFTWARE
– 21 2381110 1 S RED HAT LINUX 7.3 OS CDROM 1 1
– 22 2381111 1 S RED HAT LINUX 7.3 OS CDROM 2 1
– 23 2381104–2 1 S AW4.2_03.10 S/W + ON–LINE DOC CDROM 1
– 24 2381109–2 1 S AW4.2_03.10 KICKSTART FLOPPY DISK 1
246
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
ADVANTAGE WORKSTATION FRU LIST (CONTINUED)
A
ITEM
NO.
P
1 2 3 4 5
– 25 5111059 1 S GEMS LINUX 1.8.12 CDROM 1
– 26 2381104–3 1 S AW4.2_04.10_EXT SW + DOC CDROM 1
– 27 2381107–4 1 S HP XW8000 FLASH UTILITY FLOPPY (BIOS JQ.W1.11US) 1
– 28 2381107–3 1 S HP XW8000 FLASH UTILITY FLOPPY (BIOS JQ.W1.09US) 1
– 29 2348143–2 1 S HP X4000 FLASH UTILITY FLOPPY (BIOS IU.W1.15US) 1
– 30 2258881 1 S AW DICOM XRAY DEMO IMAGES CDROM 1
– 31 2275666–2 1 S AW DICOM DEMO IMAGES CDROM (CT & MR) 1
– 32 2378672–3 1 S VOLUME VIEWER APPS CDROM (VXTL_3.0.64M) 1
– 33 2354210–3 1 S FUNCTIONAL ANALYSIS APPS CDROM (V2.6.6) 1
– 34 2343319–3 1 S FUSION APPS FOR LINUX CDROM (FUS_1_0_56) 1
– 35 2357634–2 1 S DENTASCAN / DENTASCAN PLUS CDROM (DENTA_3.0.58) 1
– 36 2355178–3 1 S SMARTSCORE V3.5–L–4011 CDROM 1
– 37 2353833–2 1 S XRAY APPLICATIONS CDROM 1
– 38 2379159–3 1 S PASTING 1.1.3 CDROM 1
– 39 2360377 1 S BMD GE_7.00 CDROM 1
– 40 2358566 1 S CV MASS APPLICATIONS 3.1–5.1 CDROM 1
– 41 2361372 1 S CARDIQ FUNCTION 1.01 CDROM 1
– 42 2357185–3 1 S ADVANTAGE SIM 6.0 CDROM 1
– 43 2381309 2 S CARDIQ DEMO EXAM CDROM 1
– 44 2378714 2 S AVA DEMO EXAM CDROM 1
– 45 2351432 2 S AW ALA DEMO EXAM CDROM 1
– 46 2378708 2 S CTC DEMO EXAM CDROM 1
– 47 2378738 2 S AUTO–BONE DEMO EXAM CDROM 1
– 48 2308033 1 S SMARTSCORE DEMO EXAMS CDROM 1
– N 1
MONITORS AND CABLES
– 49 2306872 1 S 18” NEC1850X LCD FLAT PANEL COLOR MONITOR 1
– 50 2349792 1 S 18” NEC1880X LCD FLAT PANEL COLOR MONITOR 1
– 51 2333243 1 S 21” SONY COLOR MONITOR GDM–520P 1
– 52 2260842 1 S HD15M/HD15M VGA VIDEO CABLE FOR SONY & NEC MONITOR 1
– 53 2304737–2 1 S DVI/HD15M–VGA VIDEO CABLE FOR NEC MONITOR 1
247
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
ADVANTAGE WORKSTATION FRU LIST (CONTINUED)
A
ITEM
NO.
P
1 2 3 4 5
– 54 2382608 1 S HP XW8000 CONVERTER Y VIDEO CABLE FOR VNDIA Q4 200NVS 1
– 55 2348217 1 S HP X4000 DVI–I/DB15 CONVERTER VIDEO CABLE 1
– N 1
ETHERNET
– 56 2114689 1 S CABLE RJ45 (4M) 1
– N 1
DICOM MAGNETO–OPTICAL DISK OPTION
– 57 2382663 1 S SONY SMO–S551–SD MOD DRIVE PACKAGE 1
– 58 2142726 1 S 1.3 GB MAXOPTIX MOD DISK 1
– 59 N S 2.6 GB MAXOPTIX MOD DISK
– N 1
SCSI CONNECTION CABLES
– 60 2160141 1 S SCSI CABLE WIDE 68 PINS / 50 PINS CENTRO 6’ 1
– 61 2160141–2 1 S SCSI CABLE WIDE 68 PINS / 50 PINS CENTRO 3’ 1
– 62 2160141–3 1 S SCSI CABLE WIDE 68 PINS / 50 PINS CENTRO 10 1
– N 1
AC POWER CORDS
– 63 E8812AE 2 S OPTIONAL US POWER STRIP 1
– N 1
INSITE OPTION
– 64 2399064 1 S INSITE 3.2 CLASS A (FOR AW4.2_03.10_EXT) CDROM 1
– 65 2396485–248 1 S INSITE/ILINQ3.2/RCOC1.1/CSD2.2 CDROM (FOR AW4.2_03.10_EXT) 1
– 66 2399064–2 1 S INSITE 3.2C CLASS A (FOR AW4.2_04.10_EXT) CDROM 1
– 67 5111058–248 1 S INSITE/ILINQ3.2C / RCOC1.1 / CSD2.2 CDROM (FOR AW4.2_04.10_EXT) 1
– 68 2371128 1 S RS232 CABLE DB9F/DB25M 1
– 69 2245794 1 S GLOBAL MULTITECH MODEM (EUROPE/ASIA/AMERICAS) 1
– N 1
NETWORK ADAPTATION KITS
– 70 2230676 1 S MICRO HUB 10/100MBPS CISCO 1528 1
– 71 2220705 1 S TRANSCEIVER AR–210TS AUI/RJ45 1
– 72 2220706 1 S CABLE RJ45 CAT 5 FTP 60M 10BT 1
248
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
CHAPTER 7 – FILMING
DASM–LCAM AND DASM–VDB FILMING INTERFACE ARE NOT SUPPORTED
FILMING
WARNING
WITH AW4.2.
1 INTERCONNECTION
None. Supported devices are network printers only.
CAUTION
The Print Application Entity title (A.E.T) of AW to be declared to the Dicom
printers is PR_<hostname> and not the Hostname of AW as for Dicom hosts.
i.e.: For an AW whose hostname is adw6 :
Dicom AET = adw6
Dicom Print AET = PR_adw6
If necessary, the Print A.E. T of AW can be changed by editing the following file:
/export/home/sdc/app–defaults/dicom_print/dprint.cfg
See Section 3–4 for details.
2 TROUBLE SHOOTING
2-1 Laser Imager Error Code
(See LASER CAMERA vendor’s documentation).
2-2 Error and Status Messages
Errors occurring when clicking on the PRINT button:

D Empty film not printed.
D Disk is full.
Please wait that some queued jobs have been printed and retry later.
D Internal input/output error has occurred.
Please retry or clear page.
D Cannot spool job for printing.
Please retry or restart Filmer.
The following status messages will appear in a window while attempting to print. Correct the indicated
condition and the system will retry automatically.
D SUPPLY MAGAZINE EMPTY
D RECEIVE MAGAZINE FULL
D SUPPLY MAGAZINE MISSING
249
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
D RECEIVE MAGAZINE MISSING

D SUPPLY MAGAZINE OPEN
FILMING
D RECEIVE MAGAZINE OPEN

D TOP COVER OPEN
The following messages may appear while attempting to print:
D Laser camera has been reserved by another user, or busy.
– Please wait.
The following status messages will appear in a window while attempting to print. Correct the indicated
condition and the system will retry automatically.
D Printing paused.
– Laser camera has been reserved by another user.
– Please wait.
3 CHECKS AND UTILITIES
3-1 Communication Checks

Communication from the Advantage Workstation to the Printer can be checked by opening a
Command window and typing in :
ping <IP address of the printer> [Return]
i.e : ping 192.3.45.11 [Return]
3-2 Utility Commands
Click on the Filmer button
250
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
The Clipboard
window
pops up
FILMING
The formats available
depend on the Printer(s)
installed
Number of copies
selected
Printer Settings
& multi–copies
Printer Name
Save Filming queue
Export Data
Print
Print current page
Before printing is done:

The image and associated icon are stored in a ”reserved space” under either:
/export/home1/sdc_image_pool/reserved
251
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
The ”reserved spaces” are of the form IMSxxxxxx.

In order to know which of them contains the image(s) to print, type in:
FILMING
strings .IMS* | more [Return]

You should find a line like IMSsexzxxxx and filmer.xxxxx. To know what they contain, type in:
cd IMSsexxxxx [Return]
ls –al[Return]
You should find ”n” files called dicomImage1 to dicomImageN corresponding on the format selected
(format 4x1 gives 4 lines) and ”n” files called voilut1x to voilut Nx, corresponding to the associated
Lookup tables
If image save has been selected too, you should find ”n” files called saveImage0 to saveImageN.
Note that these last files are Dicom files and can be directly handled accordingly (moved, copied,
declared into the Database etc...).
Note: The ”reserved spaces” are reset at each ”Restart Software” or each Reboot.
You can view the exact image(s) that will be on the film by using the command:
imadump dicomImageX [Return] where X is the number of the image
To quit, press simultaneously on <CTRL> and <C> keys.
For more information on the imadump utility, (non–square image formats etc...), type:
imadump –h [Return]
When printing is started:
The image is spooled in a ”reserved space” under either:
/export/home1/sdc_image_pool/reserved
The ”reserved spaces” are of the form IMSxxxxxx.
In order to know which of them contains the image(s) to print, type in:
strings .IMS* | more [Return]
Note: If ”n” print jobs have been started and are queued (not printed yet), you will find ”n” reserved
spaces belonging to the PrintManager.
You should find line(s) with PrintManager.xxxxx. To know what they contain, type in:
ls [Return]
You should find ”n” files called imgXXXXXX. They will remain until they have been printed, even
though the ”Restart software” button is pressed or the workstation rebooted.
You should also find in each PrintManager reserved space a file called <printer_name>.dev in which
you can review the settings and characteristics of the printer(s) declared to your workstation.
To have a chance to see this short–lived information, you must pause printing by clicking on the
Filming Queue button, To review this file, type in:
more <printer_name>.dev [Return]
You can view the exact image(s) that will be on the film by using the following commands:
filmdump imgXXXXXX – display [Return]
where X is the number of the image
To quit, press simultaneously on <CTRL> and <C> keys.
252
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
If you don’t want the print to occur, you can delete the dicomImageX files from /export/home/sdc/films
when done with reviewing.
FILMING
cd /export/home/sdc/film [Return]
rm dicomImageX [Return]
Where X is the number of the image
For more information on the filmdump utility, (non–square image formats etc...), type:
filmdump –h [Return]
Note: You can also find files called imgXXXXXX.ps if they have been created for a postscript printer.
In this case, to review them, use the gv (ghostview) command and you DO NOT need to run
the filmdump command before:
i.e.: gv imgXXXXX.ps [Return]
When printing is done:
The ”reserved spaces” that belong to the PrintManager are reset.
3-3 Accessing and using the log file
Note: The Logfiles are periodically and automatically cleaned up by the system ”cron” to prevent
them from growing up, consuming disk space.
Change to the logfiles directory
To read the contents of the prslog, printserverlog, printManagerlog, dicomPrintlog,

FilmComposerProxylog, or lcbuildlog
i.e : more prslog [Return]
Note: You can as well use the command display_logfile –f <logfile_name> which also takes in
account and packages for easier readind the older compressed logfiles
(i.e.: browserlog.WedSep1715:15:04.Z).
Note: FilmComposerProxylog and lcbuildlog are used to ensure compatibility with the batch Filming
of the Advanced applications such as Volume Analysis, Navigator, etc ...
3-4 Changing the Print AET of your AW
If necessary, the default Print A.E. T of AW can be changed by editing the following file:
D vi /export/home/sdc/app–defaults/dicom_print/dprint.cfg [Return]
D Uncomment the following line and replace the syntax ”My application entity title” by the name you
want to give
#applicationEntityTitle=”My application entity title” becomes
applicationEntityTitle=”AWPrintAET” for example
(do not forget the capital E, the capital T and the ” ”)
D Save and quit
<Esc> :wq! [Return]
253
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
3-5 Older DICOM Printers

FILMING
For former software releases of Sterling Dicom printers (if the result of the print is black & white
reversed) it may be necessary to add the MONOCHROME2 interpretation in order to correct this
issue.
In order to do this, follow the steps:
D Login as sdc if not already logged in, and switch user to root:
Password :operator [Return]
D Change to the Prefs directory by typing:
D Edit the SdCDicomPrintConfig file with the vi editor or any suitable editor
and add the following line at the end of the file:
(make sure to type a capital S, C, D, P and C for this file name)
vi SdCDicomPrintConfig [Return]
# # Dicom Print SOP Class Attributes Configuration File

## If you want to modify the Film Session, Film Box or Image Box SOP
Classes
# default attributes, you just have to remove the ’#’ character in front of
:
## For Film Session : set fs_
# For Film Box : set fb_
# For Image Box : set im_
.......................
# Border denisty (2010,0100)
# BLACK
# WHITE
#set fb_border_density ”BLACK”
# Empty image density (2010,0110)
# BLACK
..........................
# Photometric interpretation (0028,0004)
# RGB
# MONOCHROME1
# MONOCHROME2
#
#set im_photo_interpretation ”MONOCHROME1”
set im_photo_interpretation ”MONOCHROME2” <––– Add this line at the end of the
file.
Make sure to type it right (NO # at the begining of the line, NO space between MONOCHROME
and 2).
D Update and quit.
254
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
CHAPTER 8 – OPTIONS
Note: This chapter gives you additional information about all options supported on AW4.2.
There you can find information such as jumper settings and diagnostics for the hardware
options and uninstallation procedure for both hardware and software options.
All installation procedures are detailed in Chapter 1, Job cards.
SCSI Hardware options
OPTIONS
SECTION 1: DICOM MOD drive option
Non SCSI Hardware options

SECTION 2: Second monitor option
SECTION 3: 2GB memory add–on option
Software options
SECTION 4: Volume Viewer Applications package
SECTION 5: Functional Analysis Applications package
SECTION 6: Fusion Applications package
SECTION 7: X–Ray Applications package
SECTION 8: Smartscore package
SECTION 9: Dentascan / DentascanPlus package
SECTION 10: Non–embedded (preloaded) option package
Other options
SECTION 11: InSite option
SECTION 12: Color Printer option (DIA)
SECTION 13: Greyscale Printer option (DIA)
255
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
1 DICOM OPTICAL DISK DRIVE

D The Dicom MOD drives supported with AW LINUX are:
Maxoptics T5 2600* (Star Series, Firmware 4.5 or up) from AW3.1 or AW4.0 upgrades.
Sony SMO S551–SD 5.2GB
Note: The only 2 medias which can be used with AW are:

2.6 GB: 2.3GB – 512 Bytes/Sector formatted: DIA P/N: E80011NC
1.3 GB: 1.2GB – 512 Bytes/Sector formatted: DIA P/N: E80011NB
OPTIONS
All other medias (1024 or 2048 Bytes/sector) are not compatible.

Warn your customer not to purchase them locally.
1-1 Physical Connection

SCSI port
SCSI active
terminator
Dicom MOD drive
D The Maxoptics T5 2600* 2.6 GB or Sony SMO S551–SD MOD drives are SCSI devices.
D The Maxoptics 2.6 GB or Sony SMO S551–SD MOD drive must always stand last in line and be
terminated by means of the active terminator.
D LINE VOLTAGE IS AUTOMATICALLY SELECTED WHEN THE UNIT IS SWITCHED ON.
D It must be connected and powered up before booting up the workstation.
D Type of SCSI cables.
The SCSI plug on the MOD drive is a Centronics 50 pins plug.
A Centronics 50p SCSI active terminator is also provided with the optical disk drive.
D The 2.6 GB MOD Unit SCSI address is 3. This is selectable by means of the target address
switch located at the rear of the device.
CAUTION
Never connect a SCSI peripheral to the SCSI bus or change its SCSI address
when either the workstation or the peripheral is powered on.
256
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
1-2 Maxoptix MOD Drive Physical Connection

Illustration 4 – Maxoptix Dicom MOD Drive, Rear View (External)
OFF ON
3 SCSI
address 1
2
3
4
5
6
7
OPTIONS
8
Illustration 5 – TMT5–2600* Series Type Drive Switch Setting

OFF ON
Verify off 1 Write active

off 2
INT
Termination off 3 Power
EXT
off 4
5
6
Not used 7
8
The Maxoptix Dicom MOD drive must always stand last in SCSI line. Therefore, terminator switches
must be set to OFF and an external Active Terminator must be connected.
1-3 Sony SMO–S551–SD MOD Drive Physical Connection

Illustration 6 – Sony SMO–S551–SD Front View
Busy LED
Power On LED
Power Switch Eject Button
ËËËË ÀÀÀÀÀÀÀ
Illustration 7 – Sony SMO–S551–SD Rear View
S2 DIP
ËËËË ÀÀÀÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀÀÀÀ
switches
SCSI connec-
ÀÀÀÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀÀÀÀ
tors
SCSI ID select switch : set

to ID = 3
257
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
Illustration 8 – Sony SMO–S551–SD S2 Dip Switch Setting

A = 0: SCSI parity check enabled
1 B = 0: Optical memory device
C = 1: Write caching disabled
D = 1: Fast SCSI compatible
O E = 1: Verify write operations
A B C D E F G H F = 0: Internal terminator disabled
G = 0: Spindle motor spins when disk inserted
H = 0: Eject button enabled
OPTIONS
1-4 Dicom MOD Software Declaration

Refer to Chapter 1, Job Card IST004
1-5 De–installation
D Login as sdc:
Password : sdcpasswd [Return]
D Open a command window from the root menu, service tools submenu.
D Switch user to root
enter password : rootpasswd [Return]
D Move to the install directory:
D Run the “uninstall.dicmod” script
./uninstall.dicmod [Return]
License removed
# MOD Application removed
1-6 Running MOD Diagnostics

MOD diagnostics can be run either by root or sdc.
D Change to the scripts directory:
D Insert a Maxoptics 2.6GB MOD media into the drive.
D Run the showdicmod diagnostics utility:
./showdicmod [Return]
Running MOD diagnostics
Verifying correct device driver installed
...okay!
Verifying access to the drive (read only test)
...okay!
258
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
2 ADD SECOND MONITOR OPTION

Supported monitor configurations
1L1 / 2L1 : 1 or 2 monitor Landscape 1K (Sony 21” CRT color monitor)
1FP1 / 2FP1 : 1 or 2 monitor Landscape 1K (NEC 18” LCD color monitor)
2-1 Add 2nd Flat Panel or CRT Color Landscape (1L1 >>> 2L1)
D Shutdown workstation.
OPTIONS
D Connect the second monitor to the additional connector of the Graphic Frame Buffer board and
place it to the right of the first monitor.
D Reboot workstation
D Login as sdc, open a Command window and switch user to Root :
password : Enter the root password
D Run the monitor installation routine :
/export/home/sdc/install/install.site [Return]
Choose keyword mon >>>> Choice 2 for 2 monitors configuration
D Reboot workstation and login as sdc to start application.
Illustration 1 – HPXW8000 with 1K NEC 1880SX LCD Landscape Monitor(s) Configuration

(MASTER)
XW8000 REAR VIEW
ÀÀÀÀÀ
LEFT MONITOR
RIGHT MONITOR NEC 1880SX FLAT PANEL
ÀÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀÀ INPUT2 / VGA
ÀÀÀÀÀ
INPUT 2/ VGA
ÀÀÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀÀÀ VGA OUT
HD15 / HD15
VGA cable HD15 / HD15
2 1 VGA cable
CAUTION : DO NOT USE THE
DVI / DVI OR DVI / VGA CABLES
DELIVERED WITH THE NEC
DOUBLE VGA HD15
MONITOR.
ADAPTER Y CABLE
USE THE VGA / VGA CABLE
AND Y ADAPTER CABLE
259
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
Illustration 2 – HPX4000 with 1K NEC 1880SX LCD Landscape Monitor(s) Configuration
X4000 REAR VIEW (MASTER)

RIGHT MONITOR
ÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀ
LEFT MONITOR
ÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀ
DVI 1 IN
DVI 1 IN
ÀÀÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀÀÀ
OPTIONS
DVI / HD15
cable
VGA OUT
ÀÀÀÀÀÀ
DVI OUT
CAUTION : DO NOT USE THE DVI / HD15

DVI / DVI CABLE DELIVERED cable
WITH THE NEC MONITOR.
USE THE DVI / VGA CABLE
AND DVI / VGA HD15 ADAPTER
AS SHOWN ABOVE.
DVI / VGA HD15
ADAPTER CABLE
Illustration 3 – HPXW8000 with 1K SONY CRT Landscape Monitor(s) Configuration
XW8000 REAR VIEW (MASTER)

RIGHT MONITOR
ÀÀÀÀ
SONY G520P LEFT MONITOR
ÀÀÀÀ
SONY G520P
ÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀÀ
INPUT 1 INPUT 2 INPUT 1 INPUT 2
ÀÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀÀ VGA OUT
HD15 / HD15
cable HD15 / HD15
2 1 cable
DOUBLE VGA HD15

ADAPTER Y CABLE
260
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
Illustration 4 – HPX4000 with 1K SONY CRT Landscape Monitor(s) Configuration
X4000 REAR VIEW

RIGHT MONITOR
SONY G520P ÀÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀÀ
(MASTER)
LEFT MONITOR
ÀÀÀÀÀ
SONY G520P
ÀÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀÀ
INPUT 1 INPUT 2
INPUT 1 INPUT 2
ÀÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀÀ
OPTIONS
VGA OUT
ÀÀÀÀÀ
DVI OUT
HD15 / HD15 HD15 / HD15

cable cable
DVI / VGA HD15

ADAPTER CABLE
2-2 Removing the 2nd Monitor from an Installed System

This can be used either to remove permanently the second monitor from a site or temporarily in case
of a monitor failure, if no spare part is available rapidly.
D Login as Root and run the monitor installation routine:
/export/home/sdc/install/install.site [Return]
Choose keyword mon >>>> Choice 1 for 1 monitor configuration
D Shutdown workstation and turn it off.
Disconnect the monitor.
D Reboot the workstation, before login in again as sdc to start the application.
261
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
3 2GB MEMORY ADD–ON OPTION

D Shutdown the workstation and turn it off. Disconnect all cables and open the side cover.
D Use an antistatic wrist wrap and antistatic mat to handle the printed circuit boards.
OBSERVE VERY CAREFULLY THE ANTI–STATIC PRECAUTIONS WHEN HANDLING

WARNING
THE RIMM MEMORY MODULES.
3-1 X4000 Workstation

Refer to the HP X4000 Service Manual, chapter 6, page 101 and page 108–111, for more detailed
OPTIONS
information.
The HP X4000 workstation is delivered with a 2GB standard memory, (4 x 512MB) RIMM modules
installed in Bank 1.
The HP X4000 workstation is also delivered with 2 CRIMM modules installed in Bank 2.
These modules must be used to fulfill a bank when not complete with 4 RIMM modules
When upgrading with additional 2GB memory, remove the 2 CRIMM modules and store them in a safe
place. The CRIMM modules can be used in case of memory failure, to downgrade the memory until
the failing memory modules are changed.
DO NOT USE OUTSOURCED MEMORY MODULES THAT COULD LEAD TO

WARNING
MALFUNCTION OF YOUR WORKSTATION. DO NOT USE EITHER MEMORY
MODULES OF DIFFERENT SIZE.
Standard configuration 2GB Add–on configuration 4GB
Memory Expander Card (MEC) Memory Expander Card (MEC)
512MB RIMM CRIMM 512MB RIMM 512MB RIMM

512MB RIMM 512MB RIMM 512MB RIMM
CRIMM 512MB RIMM 512MB RIMM 512MB RIMM

512MB RIMM 512MB RIMM 512MB RIMM
Remove and store for future use
Standard memory Additional memory

2A 4B
1A 3B
Bank 1 Bank 2
2B 4A
1B 3A
262
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
D Remove the Memory Expander Card in order to install the 4 additional 512MB RIMM modules in
Bank 2.
Do not attempt to insert the RIMM modules in the Memory Expander Card, still inserted into the
system board connector.
Extract the MEC board and place it on an antistatic mat.
Remove the 2 CRIMM modules and carefully insert the 4 memory modules in Bank 2 slots.
D Reseat the Memory Expander Card on the System board, close the cover and reconnect the CPU
box to the mouse, keyboard , network, monitor(s) and wall outlet.
D Turn on the workstation and press on the <Esc> key when prompted.
Verify that the Summary Screen displays the new amount of memory.
OPTIONS
The additional 2GB memory is operational.
Note: You may want to test more carefully the newly installed memory modules.
Refer to Chapter 4, Job Card TSG005 in order to launch the E–diag tools.
3-2 XW8000 Workstation

Refer to the HP XW8000 Service Manual, chapter 2, page 31–33, for more detailed information.
The HP XW8000 workstation memory bank is composed of 6 slots for DDR SDRAM.
DIMM memory modules must be installed in pairs.
Each pair must be composed of equivallent capacity modules (i.e : 2x 512MB).
DO NOT USE OUTSOURCED MEMORY MODULES THAT COULD LEAD TO

WARNING
MALFUNCTION OF YOUR WORKSTATION.
XW8000 System board
Standard configuration 2GB
Memory module pair 1:

(load this pair first)
2 x 512MB DIMM
(load this pair second)
2 x 512MB DIMM
Add–on 2GB
(load this pair last)
2 x 1GB DIMM
Basic memory = 2GB (4 x512MB DIMMs)

Add–on memory= 2GB (2 x 1GB DIMMs)
D Turn on the workstation and press on the <Esc> key when prompted.
Verify that the Summary Screen displays the new amount of memory.
The additional 2GB memory is operational.
263
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
SOFTWARE OPTIONS
4 VOLUME VIEWER APPLICATIONS PACKAGE

To install the option, refer to Chapter 1, IST005.
To preload the option’s Cdrom content, for future installation, refer to Chapter 1, IST010 or IST011.
To uninstall the option, follow the steps described below.
OPTIONS

D When AW has completed its startup, click on the Admin button, then on the Command Window
button to open a Command Window

D Run the Advanced Lung Analysis software uninstallation script:
./uninstall.ala [Return]
D Run the Advanced Vessel Analysis software uninstallation script:
./uninstall.ava [Return]
D Run the CT Colonography software uninstallation script:
./uninstall.ctc [Return]
D Run the CardIQ 2 software uninstallation script:
./uninstall.cardiq2 [Return]
D Run the CardEP software uninstallation script:
./uninstall.cardep [Return]
D Run the Autobone software uninstallation script:
./uninstall.autobone [Return]
264
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
5 FUNCTIONAL ANALYSIS APPLICATIONS PACKAGE

To preload the option’s Cdrom content, for future installation, refer to Chapter 1, IST010.
OPTIONS
D Run the Functool Diffusion Tensor software uninstallation script:
./uninstall.fctldti [Return]
D Run the Functool Spectroscopy software uninstallation script:
./uninstall.fctlmrsi [Return]
D Run the Functool Perfusion software uninstallation script:
./uninstall.fctpwi [Return]
D Run the Functool Performance software uninstallation script:
./uninstall.fctl2 [Return]
D Run the CT Perfusion 2 software uninstallation script:
./uninstall.ctperf2 [Return]
D Run the CT Perfusion Multi–organ software uninstallation script:
./uninstall.ctperf3 [Return]
D Run the CT Perfusion Body software uninstallation script:
./uninstall.ctperfbody [Return]
D Run the CT Perfusion Neuro software uninstallation script:
./uninstall.ctperfneuro [Return]
6 FUSION APPLICATIONS SOFTWARE PACKAGE


D Run the Fusion CT MR software uninstallation script:
./uninstall.fusion_ctmr [Return]
265
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
D Run the Fusion CT PET software uninstallation script:

./uninstall.fusion_ctpet [Return]
D Run the Fusion XA MR software uninstallation script:
./uninstall.fusion_xmr [Return]
7 X–RAY APPLICATIONS SOFTWARE PACKAGE

OPTIONS


D Run the 3D XRay software uninstallation script:
./uninstall.spin3d [Return]
D Run the 3D XRay coils&clips software uninstallation script:
./uninstall.spin3dcoil [Return]
D Run the Advantage Paste software uninstallation script:
./uninstall.paste [Return]
D Run the Advantage Straight software uninstallation script:
./uninstall.straight [Return]
8 SMARTSCORE OPTION SOFTWARE PACKAGE


D Run the Smartscore software uninstallation script:
./uninstall.sscore [Return]
9 DENTASCAN OPTION SOFTWARE PACKAGE

Note: The Dentascan option Cdrom contains both the Dentascan and the DentascanPlus
packages.
The Dentascan Cdrom content, CANNOT be preloaded.
266
REV 2 sm 2381096–100


D Run the dentascan software uninstallation script:
./uninstall.denta [Return]
OPTIONS
D Run the dentascan software uninstallation script:
./uninstall.dentaPlus [Return]
10 NON EMBEDDED OPTION SOFTWARE PACKAGE

To install the option, refer to Chapter 1, IST005 and to the manual delivered with the option.
The software options supported on AW4.2 are :
D Advantage SIM
D Cardiq Function
D BMD application
D Mass applications

D Run the option software uninstallation script:
./uninstall.”option–name” [Return]
267
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
OTHER OPTIONS
11 INSITE OPTION
REFER TO CHAPTER 1, JOB CARD IST008 FOR INSTALLATION AND SERVICE

WARNING
INSTRUCTIONS ON THE OPTION.
OPTIONS
12 COLOR PRINTER OPTION (CODONICS NP–1600 M OR MD)

The color printer option is a network–connected printer. It can be located anywhere on the network,
assuming it can be reached from the Advantage Workstation.
Connect it as shown in the figure below. Remember that the length of your network must not
exceed 180 meters if using thin ethernet link.
terminator
Scanner
computer
cabinet
Network
Color
printer
terminator
CAUTION
The color printer cannot receive images directly from the scanners. It can
only print images that are produced by the Advantage Workstation software.
268
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
12-2 Printer Settings

Make sure the following information is available before starting to install your printer:
D Internet address: an address on the same network as your system unless otherwise specified by
the network administrator of the site, if any.
D Hostname: Chose a host name or use the one given by the network administrator of the site.
D Netmask: If specified by the network administrator of the site.
D Broadcast address: If assigned by the Network administrator of the site.
OPTIONS
D Default Gateway: If specified by the Network administrator of the site.
CAUTION
For more accurate information concerning the printer settings, refer to the
Vendor’s documentation delivered with the printer. Some features might
changed after this manual has been released
Entering set–up mode

D Turn the printer ON and wait for the 16–character LCD display to display ”READY”. This can take
between 1 and 4 minutes based on the temperature of the printer.
D Place the printer in Setup mode by pressing and releasing the <Setup/Select> button on the front
panel.
D The LCD will now display ”SETUP | EXIT”.
D Use the <up–arrow> or <down–arrow> buttons to scroll through the menu options until the LCD
displays ”SETUP | NETWORK”.
D Press <Setup/Select> to select this option.
D The LCD will now display one of the configurable network options. Use the <up–arrow> or
<down–arrow> buttons to scroll through the menu options until the LCD displays ”NETWORK |
IP ADDR”.
IP address setting
D The LCD will now display the current IP address of the printer. This IP address is displayed in the
form ”nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn”, where ”nnn” is any number between 000 and 255.
D The cursor appears over the first digit at the left side of the IP address. To change this digit, press
the <up–arrow> or <down–arrow> buttons. This will increment or decrement the digit to the next
value.
D To move between digits, press the <Setup/Select> button. This will allow the cursor to be
positioned over any digit field which needs to be changed. Digits can be changed by pressing the
<up–arrow> or <down–arrow> buttons.
D When the IP address has been assigned, use the <Setup/Select> button to exit.
D The LCD will now display ”NETWORK | IP ADDR”.
displays ”NETWORK | EXIT”.
269
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
D Press the <Setup/Select> button to return to the main Setup menu.

D Press the <up–arrow> or <down–arrow> buttons until the LCD displays
”SETUP | EXIT”.
Netmask setting
CAUTION
Use netmasks only when your network administrator explicitly requires a
tree–like network with netmasks.
OPTIONS
panel.
D The LCD will now display ”SETUP | EXIT”.
displays ”SETUP | NETWORK”.
D The LCD will now display one of the configurable network options. Use the <up–arrow> or
<down–arrow> buttons to scroll through the menu options until the LCD displays ”NETWORK |
SUBNET”.
D The LCD will now display the current SUBNET address of the printer. This SUBNET address is
displayed in the form ”nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn”, where ”nnn” is any number between 000 and 255.
D The cursor appears over the first digit at the left side of the SUBNET address. To change this digit,
press the <up–arrow> or <down–arrow> buttons. This will increment or decrement the digit to the
next value.
D When the SUBNET address has been assigned, use the <Setup/Select> button to exit.
D The LCD will now display ”NETWORK | SUBNET”.
displays ”NETWORK | EXIT”.
D Press the <Setup/Select> button to return to the main Setup menu.
D Press the <up–arrow> or <down–arrow> buttons until the LCD displays
”SETUP | EXIT”.
D Press the <Setup/Select> button to return to READY.
Postscript and ISG Keys setting

panel.
D The LCD will now display ”SETUP | NETWORK”.
displays ”SETUP | KEYS”.
270
REV 2 sm 2381096–100

D The cursor appears over the first digit at the left side of the key. To change this digit, press the
<up–arrow> or <down–arrow> buttons. This will increment or decrement the digit to the next
value.
D When the POSTSCRIPT key has been assigned, use the <Setup/Select> button to exit.
OPTIONS
displays ”SETUP | EXIT”.
D Follow the same steps to enter the ISG key if available.
Color parameters setting

panel.
D The LCD will now display ”SETUP | NETWORK”.
displays ”SETUP | IMAGE”.
displays ”IMAGE | TCR”.
D The default value of the TCR appears. To change this value, press the <up–arrow> or
<down–arrow> buttons. This will increment or decrement the value to the next state.
TCR (True Color Rendering): adjust from 0 to 100. 0 gives full bright colors. 100 gives all gray
images.
D Press <Setup/Select> to accept the new value.
displays ”IMAGE | GAMMA”.
D When this is done, press <Setup/Select> to select this option.
D The default value of the Gamma correction appears. To change this value, press the <up–arrow>
or <down–arrow> buttons. This will increment or decrement the value to the next state.
Gamma : light/dark: adjust from 0 to 10.
0 gives darker images. 1 is normal. 10 gives lighter images.
D When this is done, press <Setup/Select> to accept the new value.
D The LCD will now display ”SETUP | IMAGE”.
displays ”SETUP | EXIT”.
271
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
Exiting the set–up mode

D Press the <Setup/Select> button to exit Setup mode.
D After a few seconds, the LCD should display ”READY”. This completes the IP address setup
procedure.
12-3 Testing the Network Connection

Once the IP address has been correctly assigned to the printer, the printer should respond to TCP/IP
messages on the network. Before testing the printer, check the following items:
OPTIONS
D The printer is actually connected to the network, using an external transceiver. The printer must be
turned on and the front panel ”POWER” button must be on.
D The front panel on the printer displays ”READY”, and the correct IP address for the printer was
installed.
Go to the Advantage workstation, and open a command window from the ”Root Menu”, ”Service Tools”
and type in:
<prompt> su – [Return]
Password : rootpasswd [Return].
Move the cursor into this command window, and type the following command:
<prompt> /usr/sbin/ping <IP addr of Codonics> [Return]
<IP addr of Codonics> is alive
Note: Do not enter leading zeros in any of the four fields separated by dots. That is, do not type in
192.100.009.005, instead use 192.100.9.5.
This ”alive” answer from the system means that the printer can be reached from the Advantage
Workstation system through the network, and that its physical installation worked well, as far as the
network is concerned. If no answer, check ethernet cable, transceiver, 50 ohm terminator...
Note: If the system displays ”unknown host”, your Color Printer may not be correctly declared. Do
the steps described in Section 1-2 again.
If the system displays ”Network unreachable”, you probably have given the printer an IP
address incompatible with your A.W. workstation’s address.
Check that they belong to the same network, 192.100.9.5 for example.
12-4 Check Printer Status

D Open a ”telnet session” by typing :
telnet <IP address of codonics> [Return]
trying XX.XX.XX.XX ... (this is the IP address given to the printer)
connected to <IP address of codonics>
Escape character is ’^]’
Unix (r) System V Release 4.0 (np1600)
login : root [Return]
#
Note: There has been no password factory given to the root user in the computer of the printer.
This is the reason why you are not prompted to enter it when login as root.
272
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
D Test the printer status by typing:

# stat [Return]
It will display something like :
Status: Ready Date: 26–Dec–1995 13:38

Media: A4–Size Paper Printer ID: 8074–1bd2
Ribbon: CMY E–net Addr: 08:00:20:74:1b:d2
Mem Config: 16MB RAM
Queues: 0 jobs in image queue Hard Drive: 270MB Quantum
0 jobs in print queue SW Version: 1.3.2
OPTIONS
Captions: Right (77 x 2048)
Keys: POSTSCRIPT Key=00M35LUFCS Permanent
CATIA Key=02XILVEYY4 Temporary (18–Aug–1995, 250 days)
ISG_1 Key=40ILVEYY4X Permanent
DICOM Key=01X6CNVKDD Temporary (21–Aug–1995, 250 days)
Defaults: Printer (root)
TCR 33
Gamma 1.10
Antialias None
Rotate Auto
Scale Bilinear
MCM Off
Note: The keys depend on the Serial Number (actually, it depends on the hostid number contained
in the NVRAM chip of the Sparc CPU board) of the Color Printer.
They are shipped with the printer and should display as PERMANENT.
If you replace the Printer or the CPU part of it (Tray Assembly), you will need new keys.
Contact DIA or Support Center if keys are not available with the Spare Part.
Note: CATIA and DICOM keys are not needed for AW application.
12-5 Test Printer Functionality

D Open the Filmer and insert an image.
D Transfer test image file to the Postscipt printer.
D Now check the dialogue when printing. Open a ”telnet session” by typing :
telnet <IP address of codonics> [Return]
trying XX.XX.XX.XX ... (this is the IP address given to the printer)
connected to <IP address of codonics>
Escape character is ’^]’
Unix (r) System V Release 4.0 (np1600)
login : root [Return]
#
You will see many lines of text telling you the printer’s status.
D Type logout or <Cntl> <D> to logout.
273
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
12-6 Load Paper Cassette

D Place blue cardboard that is shipped with new paper inside the paper cassette.
Note: Frequent paper jams may occur without the blue cardboard beneath the paper in the paper
cassette.
D Load paper into paper cassette with the glossy side facing up.
Note: Store remaining paper inside plastic bag and in a room where the humidity can be maintained
between 20 to 70% (and preferrable between 40% to 60%). Storing the paper outside the
plastic bag in a room where the humidity exceeds 70% can cause the edge of the paper to
OPTIONS
curl and consequently cause frequent paper jams.
12-7 Service Procedures

12-7-1 Image Quality Problems
D Vertical color line: Clean the thermal head. See procedure in the Codonics Service Manual
delivered with your printer.
D Vertical white line(s): Always at the same position, it can be a ”blown pixel” problem.
Clean the thermal head and if the problem persists, change the ”printer engine” assembly (P/N:
2116591). See procedure section 1-3.
D Fade image on transparent paper: Check the position of the paper in the paper tray. Check for the
notch orientation indication.
D Side edge fold or stretch problem: The thermal head is not aligned. There is no mechanical
adjustment possible.
Replace the ”printer engine” assembly (P/N : 2116591). See procedure section 1-3.
lines of different colors
D ”Smiles” problem: Generally happening with transparent paper in the dark areas.
Check that the thermal head voltage is properly adjusted. See section 6 in the Codonics Service
manual.
D Paper jam: The paper cannot exit properly from the paper tray to the thermal head path.
Verify that blue cardboard is under paper in tray. Check for deformation of the paper. This can be
due to improper storage conditions. Check the springs in the paper tray. Replace the paper tray if
defective.
274
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
12-7-2 Printer Engine Assembly, Tray Assembly Replacement

Opening the tray assembly
See section 5 of Codonics Service manual.
Color printer block diagram
270 MB
HD drive floppy drive
Printer Engine
OPTIONS
I/O cable
Controller board Sparc computer
Printer engine assembly Tray assembly

P/N : 2116591 P/N : 2116594
D Testing the printer engine:

Disconnect the I/O cable between the Tray assembly (SUN Sparc computer) and the Printer
Engine Controller board.
Place the S1 switch, located on the Printer Controller board on the ”ENGINE” position.
Switch ON the color printer.
Enter the DIAGS menu. Refer to section 7 of the Codonics Service manual.
D Error codes:
The color printer error codes are described in section 8 of the Codonics Service manual.
Basically, the tray assembly should be replaced if there are communication problems between
A.W. and the printer.
The Printer Engine should be replaced in case of thermal head problems or film transport
problems.
12-7-3 Periodic Maintenance

D Proceed to thermal head and ”donor” transport cleaning every 100 films.
Refer to section 2 of the Codonics Service manual.
12-7-4 Un–installation
D Login as sdc if not already logged in and switch user to root:
Password :rootpasswd [Return]
./uninstall.printers [Return]
... and choose the printer you want to uninstall.
275
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
13 GREYSCALE PRINTER OPTION (LEXMARK OPTRA S1650)

Installation of this printer is to be done by the Vendor’s Service Engineer in collaboration with GEMS
FE.

The Greyscale printer option is a network–connected printer. It can be located anywhere on the
network, assuming that it can be reached from the Advantage Workstation.
OPTIONS
Connect it as shown in the figure below. Remember that the length of your network must not
exceed 180 meters if using thin ethernet link.
terminator
Scanner
computer
cabinet
Network
Greyscale
printer
terminator
CAUTION
The Greyscale printer cannot receive images directly from the scanners. It can
only print images that are produced by the Advantage Workstation software.
13-2 Printer Settings

Make sure the following information is available before starting to install your printer:
D Internet address: an address on the same network as your system unless otherwise specified by
the network administrator of the site (if any).
D Hostname: Chose a host name or use the one given by the network administrator of the site.
D Netmask: If specified by the network administrator of the site.
276
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
CAUTION
The following is given as information only. Installation is to be done by Vendor’s
Service Engineer in collaboration with GEMS FE. For more accurate information
concerning the printer settings, refer to the Vendor’s documentation delivered
with the printer. Some features might changed after this manual has been
released
Entering set–up mode
D Turn the printer ON and wait for the LCD display to display ”READY”. This takes a few minutes.
D Place the printer in Setup mode by pressing and releasing the < Menu > button on the front panel
OPTIONS
until the display shows Network Menu.
D Press and release the * select button. The Network mneu, Option network 1 is displayed.
D Make sure that:
– PCL smartswitch = ON
– PS smartswitch = ON
– NPA mode = Auto
– Network buffer = Auto
D Enter Network 1 setup menu.
D Enter Network card menu and make sure that:
– View Card status = Connected
– View Card speed = 10Mbps, Half Duplex
– Job Timeout = 90
– View Net address = UAA
– Banner page = Off
D Enter Lewlink menu and make sure that:
– Activate = No
D Enter TCP / IP menu and make sure that:
– Activate = Yes
– Enable bootp = No
– Enable DHCP = No
– Enable RARP = No
D Enter Set IP address menu and press on * select button.
– Enter IP address for your printer with NO additional zeros
e.g.: 192.9.100.5 (but not 192.009.100.005)
D Enter Set IP Netmask menu and press on * select button.
– Enter, if applicable, the IP netmask for your printer with NO additional zeros
e.g.: 255.240.0.0 (but not 255.240.000.00)
277
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
D Enter Set Gateway address menu and press on * select button.

– Enter, if applicable, the Gateway address for your printer with NO additional zeros
e.g.: 255.240.0.0 (but not 255.240.000.00)
D Enter Set Hostname menu and press on * select button.
– Enter a Host name for your printer. DO NOT USE any special characters, that could confuse
network transmissions.
You can use numerical, alphanumerical characters and – or _ signs.
e.g.: optra; optra1; OPTRA; OPTRA–01; optra_printer1; etc ...
– Make sure that all the last fields unused do not display any value, but are blank, and press on
OPTIONS
the * select button several times, until it displays ” saved ”.

D When this is done, select Print Setup page to print on a sheet of paper the settings. You can join
this sheet to the Site’s maintenance logbook for future use.
D Press the Return button to return to On–line.
The Printer is ready. Return to Chapter 1, Job Card IST006 to declare the printer to the AW Apllication
software.
13-3 De–Installation
D Login as sdc if not already logged in and switch user to root:
Password :rootpasswd [Return]
./uninstall.printers [Return]
... and choose the printer you want to uninstall
278
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
CHAPTER 9 – NETWORKING
1 SAMPLE NETWORK CONFIGURATIONS

ADVANTAGE WORKSTATION: ETHERNET CONNECTION
AW4.2 : X4000 AW4.2 : XW8000 Other Hosts
Additional Network
interface PCI card
(defaults to eth0)
eth0 eth1
eth0 XW8000: Use PCI Ethernet

PCI card to connect to Network
(reserved for
future use)
NETWORKING
Network
Open a Command Window and type :

ifconfig –a [Return] to get information on the Ethernet Interface(s)
1-1 Basic Intra–Suite Network: MR SIGNA ADVANTAGE, MR HORIZON
SIGNA
AW Station
A.W IC ADVANTAGE
5.X
OC
RJ 45
Transceiver Transceiver
RJ 45 NETWORK
1-2 Basic Network
CT/MR CT/MR
AW Station
RJ45 cable
RJ45 cable AUI cable
HUB RJ 45
AUI transceiver
Note: Gateway board is no more needed on CT/i system.
279
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
1-3 Basic Intra–Suite Network: CT–HLA, CT–HSA
AW Station OC SBC
SBCO
RJ 45
RJ 45 RJ 45
RJ 45 NETWORK
1-4 Basic Network: CT SYTEC, PACE, PROSPEED – MR VECTRA

NETWORKING
AW Station CT MR
ETC board ETC board
RJ 45 AUI cable
ETC board: P/N 9704WA
Transceiver AUI cable: P/N 9704RB
RJ 45 RJ 45
RJ 45 NETWORK
1-5 Basic Network: DRS, DLX (without Digital Gateway)

DRS3
DLX3
DLX 2
AW Station upgraded to DLX 3
ETHERNET I/F BD
RJ 45 AUI cable
Transceiver F1301BH : DRS3 Ethernet I/F kit

S18411NE : DLX3 Dicom Ethernet I/F kit
RJ 45 S18411NA : Upgrade DLX2 to DLX3
Dicom Ethernet I/F kit
RJ 45 NETWORK
280
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
1-6 Basic Workstations Network with no Router

DLX with a Fast Ethernet Gateway
acquisition system network
50 W 50 W
Terminator Terminator
dqw1 le0 interface le0: ethernet vdp ethernet Frontal Ethernet

DLX interface
192.100.10.8 192.100.10.3 SBCO
VDP
DIGITAL DLX
GATEWAY SUN
SS4
le1: netmask : 255.255.255.0
NETWORKING
used for DICOM HIS/RIS Interface
* 192.100.10.5 192.100.10.4
dlx–dicom1 le1 dlx–dicom1 le1
dicom ethernet dicom ethernet
I/F board I/F board
RJ45 MII connector

connector **
50 W
*** Terminator
Twisted pair
crossed cable 50 W
5 meter max Terminator
RJ45
connector
192.100.10.2 HIS / RIS

STATION
AW Station
Note: *: The Fast Ethernet Interface can operate at either 10 or 100 Mbits/s (auto configured).
Note: **: The Digital Gateway MII connector can be used with a MII to AUI Interface and one AUI
transceiver. In this case, the RJ45 cable must be removed.
Note: ***: The Digital Gateway RJ45 connector can be used to connect to a HUB. In this case, the
twisted pair cable is not crossed.
281
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
1-7 Workstations Subnetworks with one Router

DLX with a Digital Gateway and a Fast Ethernet Interface
SIGNA AW 1 CT/MR YMS

192.100.10.1 192.100.10.2 192.100.10.4
ETC board
192.100.10.0 Network
Twisted Pair cable

NETWORKING
192.100.10.5 Fast Ethernet I/F bd

NETWOK PRINTER
dgw–hme0 on Digital Gateway
Digital 192.100.10.10
Gateway
DLX SUN SS
DLX
( le1 netmask: 255.255.255.128 )
CT HLA/HSA
AW 2
GATEWAY 192.100.10.3
or
ROUTER CT SBC
CT OC AW 2
192.100.9.2
192.100.9.1
192.100.9.4
192.100.9.0 Subnetwork
282
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
1-8 Advantage Workstation within the MR SUITE
SIGNA AW station
Use network menu window on browser to

192.100.10.1 192.100.10.4 add host entries for SIGNA (192.100.10.1)
CT_IC (192.100.9.3)
CT_OC (192.100.9.1)
192.100.10.0 Network
GATE 192.100.10.3
IC: Use ”icload” to reconfig
NETWORKING
IC
192.100.9.3
CT OC
192.100.9.1
Signa OC: Use ”setAdoption” to declare AW
CT SBC
192.100.9.2
283
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
1-9 Advantage Workstation within the CT SUITE
SIGNA Use network menu window on browser to add host entries for :
SIGNA (192.100.10.1) CT_IC (192.100.9.3) CT_OC (192.100.9.1)
192.100.10.1 CT OC: Use ”setAdoption” to configureAW as non Genesis host within the suite
192.100.10.0 Network
CT OC CT SBC
GATE 192.100.9.2
192.100.10.3 192.100.9.1
AW station
IC
192.100.9.3 192.100.9.5
NETWORKING
IC: Use ”icload” to reconfig
1-10 Advantage Workstation on the LOCAL BACKBONE (Gateway in CT

Operator Console)
SIGNA AW station
192.100.10.1 192.100.10.4
192.100.10.0 Network
CT HLA/HSA
NETWORK PRINTER
192.100.10.3
192.100.10.10
CT SBC
CT OC
192.100.9.2
GATE 192.100.9.1
284
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
1-11 Advantage Workstation within the MR, CT and LOCAL SUITE

SIGNA:
AW 1 as non SIGNA AW 1
genesis host Use network menu window on browser to
within suite,
or non– add host entries for SIGNA, IC1, IC2
genesis CTOC, AW 2 , AW 3
suite 192.100.10.1 192.100.10.4
AW 3 as non
genesis suite

add host entries for SIGNA, IC1, IC2,
CTOC, AW 1, AW 3
192.100.10.3 AW 2
NETWORKING
IC 1
192.100.9.5
GATE 192.100.11.3
192.100.9.0 subnetwork
CT :
AW 2 as non
genesis host
withing the suite
AW 3 as non
NETWORK PRINTER CT OC genesis suite
192.100.11.0 Network
192.100.11.5 192.100.9.1
GATE 192.100.11.2
IC 2 CT SBC
192.100.9.3
192.100.9.2
AW 3
add host entries for SIGNA, IC1, IC2,
192.100.11.4 CTOC, AW 2, AW 1
285
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
1-12 MIXED Sources Configuration Sample
SIGNA AW 1 CT/MR YMS

192.100.10.1 192.100.10.2 192.100.10.4
ETC board
192.100.10.0 Network
192.100.10.5
dlx–dicom1 NETWORK PRINTER
Ethernet I/F bd
DLX / DRS le1 on DLX
192.100.10.10
( le1 netmask: 255.255.255.128 )
CT HLA/HSA
NETWORKING
GATE 192.100.10.3
CT SBC
CT OC 192.100.9.2 AW 2
192.100.9.1 192.100.9.4
CT OC: Use ”setAdoption” to configure

AW 2 as non Genesis host within the suite
286
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
2 AW LINUX HOST DECLARATION ON IMAGE SOURCES
CAUTION
The following material is only given for information. The accuracy of the
Information contained here is subject to change, depending on the software
versions of the products.
REFER SPECIFIC SERVICE MANUALS of the following products.
CAUTION The number of hosts sending simultaneous sending images to AW is limited to

4 in order not to degrade performances. If overloaded , the following message
pops up:
”Hosts association failed..”
2-1 AW4.2 Declaration on UNIX (SUN or Silicon Graphics) Based Source
NETWORKING
– CT Lightspeed
– CT/i or CT Synergy
– MR Horizon LX
– MR Profile
– MR Contour
Use the Dicom 3.0 protocol.
Refer to the appropriate Service Manual that were shipped with the respective products.
2-2 AW4.2 Declaration on GENESIS Based Source

– Signa Advantage 5.x
– Signa Horizon
– Genesis Independant console
– CT HLA
– CT HSA
Refer to the appropriate Service Manual that were shipped with the respective products.
Use the Dicom 3.0 protocol or the IC Dicom 3.0 protocol.
2-3 AW4.2 Declaration on non Genesis Based Source

– Signa Advantage 4.x
CAUTION
AW4.2 does not support direct connection with Signa4.X
287
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
2-4 AW4.2 Host Declaration on CT9800 Image Sources
CAUTION No IDLink2 version 2.3 DICOM compatible version currently exists.
An IDLink2 compatible system is required to interconnect a CT9800 to Advantage Workstation. Use

of a compatible ”MERGE box” is under identification.
D The ”Logical Address” is the hostname of the Advantage workstation (e.g. AW01–PC0).
Note: ”logical address” is the same thing than ”Application Entity Title” in DICOM format.
D The ”Host Address” is the Internet address of the AW3.0 (e.g. 192.100.10.4).
D The ID/Net2 or DICOM ”Port Number” of the Advantage workstation is ALWAYS ”4006”.
2-5 AW4.2 Host Declaration on Dicom Devices

NETWORKING

D Use the DICOM protocol to declare GE XRay DLX or DRS systems and Foreign DICOM hosts.
D The DICOM ”Application Entity Title” for the Advantage workstation is the workstation’s hostname
(e.g. AW01–PC0).
D The DICOM or ID/Net2 ”Port Number” of the Advantage workstation is ALWAYS ”4006”.
2-6 AW4.2 Declaration on DRS / DLX Sources

D Check that the 64MB memory is recognized by the DLX system, once the Dicom Ethernet
interface has been installed.
D IP addresses should be supplied by the hospital Network Administartor (if applicable). If not,
contact your On–Line support center which can supply a set of unique IP addresses for your
network.
Example of IP addresses and Hostnames:
AW1 192.100.1.1 (class C network)
DLX–DICOM1 192.100.1.2 (class C network)
Note: In this basic network case, with no router, and using Class C IP addresses, the Netmask
value is 255.255.255.0.
In case of non Class C addresses, refer to section 3 for netmask setting.
D DLX setting: Refer to DLX Service Manual, Job Card IST 160 ”Installing the Dicom Ethernet
option”, to set the the IP address and Netmask of the DLX and to set the AW Dicom Server in the
DLX.
Note: When replacing an existing AW station by another one, you must reboot the DLX, even if you
keep the same hostname and IP address for the new workstation.
288
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
2-7 AW4.2 Declaration on YMS Sources

– CT Sytec family (SRi, S, Plus, 1800i, 3000, ...)
– CT Prospeed family (Plus, Vx, Advantage, S, Sx, ....)
– MR Vectra
After making sure that all hardware and software pieces have been correctly installed, (rev. level of
software compatible with the Ethernet link option, switch settings of the ETC board, removal of the
back plane jumpers at the corresponding slot, etc...), you have to:
D Set the boot FD in the drive and start maintenance utility (if applicable).
D Select installation parameters (change parameters) from the menu.
D Declare the link as shown after (Communication data setting procedure) and reset the scanning
system.
NETWORKING
Refer to the CT or MR specific manual for more accurate information as new releases of software on
the Scanning system, may introduce some changes in the procedure.
Note: DICOM format is now implemented on new YMS systems (Prospeed family) depending on
the software version.
Note: The query / retrieve function is available from Advantage Workstation, as YMS systems
are query / retrieve provider (depending on the software version).
CAUTION
For YMS CT, DICOM feature is working ONLY IF
– No images on studie 0
– No SMPTE test pattern installed
CAUTION
When using the DICOM protocol, the Name field to enter, (Application Entity
Title) is the hostname of the Advantage Workstation.
So, make sure to enter it EXACTLY the way it’s written on the AW side
(lower or upper case letters) and DO NOT USE any space caracters which could
be interpreted as 2 different names.
Communication data setting procedure
Note: The following is only applicable for software revision levels FROM:
SYTEC 3000/p V 6.00

SYTEC 3000s V 4.00
PROSPEED V 4.00
SYTEC i V 3.00
VECTRA V 3.00
289
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
The following example details the steps to declare the link between an MR Vectra and 2 Advantage
Workstations.
D Activate management by pressing <MGT> key.

D Select “COMMUNICATION DATA HANDLING” from the menu. The system prompts you as follows.
Note: This procedure, describing the steps to set a MR VECTRA for ethernet communication with
Advantage Workstation, is applicable to the YMS scanning systems mentioned above. The
host name must be set in the form ”SuiteIDHostID”, SuiteID being MR01 and HostID being
OC0 in our example.
The Network Address can be left at the default value if there is only one YMS system on the
network. Otherwise, increment it for the second YMS scanner.
The IP address can be set to a Class C default value, as shown in our example,
(190.100.9.X) unless otherwise specified by the Network Administrator of the Site.
Enter Satellite No =
NETWORKING
<0: Myself, N: New Data, <END>: Update, <CANC>: Quit>
D First select 0: (Myself) and set parameters to:
COMMUNICATION DATA HANDLING

Myself
Name = MR01OC0
Network Address = 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 01
IP Address = 192.100.9.1
<0: Myself, N: New Data, <END>: Update, <CANC>: QUIT>
D Select N: (New Data) to declare a 1st target destination and set parameters to:
N : New data
Register New Station *** Model No. Table ***

Station No. = *
0101 : CT8600 , CT9000 , ........
Model No. = (see table)
0103 : ........................................
Machine No. = **
...................................................
OK to register ? (y/n) [N] : y [Return] ...................................................
...................................................
* : enter a Station number not already 101D : AW
used (presss <Sta List> push button 10FF : Non GEMS Products
for list of Stations).
** : use 1 if first machine of this model OTHER 01xx:CT 02xx:MR 10xx:Display
then 2 for next...
290
REV 2 sm 2381096–100

Myself
Name = MR01OC0
Network Address = 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 01
IP Address = 192.100.9.1
satellite 1 (Advantage Workstation)
Station No =1 Model No = 101D

Protocol = DICOM 3.0 Base Address = FF6000 CPU No= 11
Name = AW01–PC0 Port Number = 4006
IP Address = 192.100.9.2
GW Address = 0.0.0.0
Note: GW Address (GATEWAY) must be left to 0.0.0.0 unless otherwise specified by the Network
Administrator of the Site.
NETWORKING
Enter Satellite No = j
select N: (New Data) to declare a 2nd target destination and set parameters to:

Myself
Name = MR01OC0
Network Address = 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 01
IP Address = 192.100.9.1

Name = AW01–PC0
IP Address = 192.100.9.2

Name = AW02–PC0 Port Number = 4006
IP Address = 192.100.9.3
<0: Myself, N: New Data, <END>: Update, <CANC>: QUIT>
Press <END> to update, then <END> to quit the Communication Data Handling menu and RESET
SYSTEM to validate new Hosts declaration.
291
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
3 NETWORKING OVERVIEW
3-1 General Overview

CLASS A NETWORK
0 8 16 24 32
0 NETWORK HOST
Class A network address between 1 and 127.

Maximum of 127 class A networks and 16777215 hosts per network.
typical netmask (no mask) is 255.0.0.0.
3 . 45 . 16. 101
NETWORKING
e.g. : Network address 3.0.0.0

network host id
CLASS B NETWORK
0 8 16 24 32
1 0 NETWORK HOST
Class B network address between 128 and 191.

(16 bits for the Network, 16 bits for the host).
e.g. : 129 . 32 . 100 . 54 Network address 129.32.0.0

network host id
CLASS C NETWORK
0 8 16 24 32
1 1 NETWORK HOST
Class C network between 192 and 254

(24 bits for the Network, 8 bits for the host)
Most commonly used for CT/MR Advantage Networks and small “Local Area Networks”. (A lot of
possible networks but few hosts per network).
292
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
3-2 Routing Table Examples

If you get the message ’Network unreachable’ when pinging a host, you may need to create a route
to the host network.
3-2-1 Adding a default router
3-2-1-1First method
Note: However more simple than the second method, it does not offer the capability to save the
parameters entered on the Configuration Cdrom, and therefore should be done again in case
of LFW or LFC software reinstall.
– Open a Command window and switch User to root
– Change to the network–scripts directory and edit the ifcfg–eth0 file:
cd /etc/sysconfig/network–scripts [Return]
vi ifcfg–eth0 [Return]
NETWORKING
– Add gateway information to this file as appropriate (see example below)
i.e : GATEWAY=3.45.12.135 (enter the gateway address as shown)
– Save the file and quit
<Esc> :wq! [Return]
– Bring down the network interface and restart it
ifdown eth0 [Return]
ifup eth0 [Return]
Example of a ifcfg–eth0 file
DEVICE=eth0
BOOTPROTO=static
IPADDR=3.231.48.162
NETMASK=255.255.252.0
GATEWAY=3.45.12.135 <<< gateway address entered
>
3-2-1-2Second method (preferred method)

– Open a Command window and switch User to root
– Change to /etc/rc5.d directory
cd /etc/rc5.d [Return]
– Create a S93route script
vi S93route [Return]
# !/bin/sh (comment line)
# Script for adding a default router (comment line)
route add default gw <router_IP_address> (if NO router is defined, your
workstation will act as default router. In this case, enter your workstation’s IP address)
i.e : route add default gw 192.100.9.2
:wq!
293
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
– Make S93route script executable

chmod +x S93route [Return]
– Restart the nework service
service network restart [Return] OR
– Reboot the workstation.
init 6 [Return]
3-2-2 Checking the routing table

– Make sure the route has been properly declared
netstat –r [Return]
You should read a line like in our example:
default 192.100.9.2 0.0.0.0 UG0 0 0 eth0
The following examples refer to the configuration sample shown in Section 1-11.
NETWORKING
Note: In order to define the number of hops to reach a network or a host , you can add the following
”metric” information a shown in the example below for 3 ”hops”:
i.e : route add –host 192.100.9.110 gw 192.100.10.54 metric 3 [Return]
Adding routes for AW1
– Login as root and change to /etc/rc5.d directory
– Create a S93route script
# !/bin/sh (comment line)
# Script for adding a default router (comment line)
route add –net 192.100.11.0 netmask 255.255.0.0 gw 192.100.10.3
:wq!
init 6 [Return]
– Proceed as shown for AW1
– Proceed as shown for AW1
294
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
3-3 Emergency procedure: Forcing the network speed and mode

Network controller cards used on the HP X4000 and on the HP XW8000 workstations, are designed
and set to fully support the Auto–negociation mode.
Any potential Network communication (mode, speed) issues, are most probably due to problems in the
configuration or performance of the Site’s network.
Nethertheless, in case of Network communication issue (10 MBps or half Duplex mode selected
through auto–negociation), it is possible to force these communication parameters to the desired
values.
The procedure below describes how to create a script (or use the existing S93route script) , launched
at boot, and that can be back–up’ed on the Configuration cdrom together with the other Site’s
parameters.
Make sure you use the right syntax (X4000 supports the mii–tool utility, and XW8000 supports the
ethtool utility).
NETWORKING
3-3-1 Case 1: No route information curently exists: Create S93route script.
– Open a Command Window and switch User to root:
– Change to the /etc/rc5.d directory:
– Create the S93route script with the vi editor (or any other suitable editor).
D X4000 case (AW4.1 upgrades):
# !/bin/sh <<< Enter this line to specify the script language
# Script for forcing network mode and speed <<< line for comments
mii–tool –F 100baseTx–FD eth0 (in our example, we force the eth0 controller
speed to 100MBps and mode to full duplex)
<Esc>
:wq! <<< To save and quit the editor
D XW8000 case (AW4.1P or AW4.2):
# !/bin/sh <<< Enter this line to specify the script language
ethtool –s eth0 speed 100 duplex full autoneg off
(in our example, we force the eth0 controller speed to 100MBps and mode to full duplex)
<Esc>

init 6 [Return]
295
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
3-3-2 Case 2: Route information curently exists: Update S93route script.

Note : If the script already exists (i.e: you have previously declared routing information), when
you open it with the vi editor (or any other suitable editor), it will look like the example
below for the XW8000, with already existing routing information
Refer to procedure previous page for the X4000 workstation:
– Open a Command Window and switch User to root:
– Change to the /etc/rc5.d directory:
– Update the S93route script with the vi editor (or any other suitable editor).
# !/bin/sh <<< Add this line to specify the script language
# Script for adding routes <<<< (example of the existing route information)
NETWORKING

ethtool –s eth0 speed 100 duplex full autoneg off (in our example, we force the
eth0 controller speed to 100MBps and mode to full duplex)
<Esc>

init 6 [Return]
IT IS NOW TIME TO COMPLETE THE AW CONFIGURATION FORM LOCATED AT

WARNING
THE BEGINNING OF THIS MANUAL,WITH ALL ROUTING INFORMATION YOU
HAVE CREATED.
296
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
3-4 More information on subnetworks

Subnetworks allow a single network address to span several physical networks.
Some of the bits in the host portion of an IP address are used to specify the subnet number on the
network backbone, and the remaining are used to specify the host number within the subnet. How
these bits are divided between subnet and host depends on the type of netmask used.
D The 0–bit netmask (255.255.255.0) is the default netmask for Class C networks, since it has no
effect on the IP address.
D The 7–bit and 8–bit netmasks are useless because they don’t contain any useable host
addresses.
D Of the remaining netmasks types, the 3–bit, 4–bit, and 5–bit types are the most practical to use
because they offer realistic subnet/host combinations.
Possible Netmasks for Class C Network
HOST PORTION OF NUMBER OF USEABLE
NETWORKING
NETMASK NUMBER OF HOST ADDRESSES
NETMASK (BINARY)
SUBNETS
Type Number Subnet Bits Host Bits Per Subnet Total
0–bit 255.255.255.0 00000000 1 254 254
1–bit 255.255.255.128 1 0000000 2 126 252
2–bit 255.255.255.192 1 1 000000 4 62 248
3–bit 255.255.255.224 1 1 1 00000 8 30 240
4–bit 255.255.255.240 1 1 1 1 0000 16 14 224
5–bit 255.255.255.248 1 1 1 1 1 000 32 6 192
6–bit 255.255.255.252 1 1 1 1 1 1 00 64 2 128
7–bit 255.255.255.254 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 128 0 0
8–bit 255.255.255.255 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 256 0 0
To determine which netmask type to use, you must first know which subnet/host combination is
needed for the network.
When looking at the table, you can notice that the number of useable host addresses is always equal
to the number of host addresses minus 2.
e.g.: 8 >>6 useable; 16 >>14 useable ; 64 >>62 useable host addresses.
If, for instance, we consider a 255.255.255.192 netmask, we can see that we are able to split the
network into 4 subnetworks.
Each subnet will have 62 possible addresses.
–subnet 1: from 1 to 62
The missing addresses are reserved for SRI–NIC administration and subnet broadcasting.
See following illustration example.
297
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
SUBNET 2
NETMASK : 255.255.255.192
CT_SBC1 CT_OC1 AW1 AW2
192.100.9.2 192.100.9.3
192.100.9.66 192.100.9.67
192.100.9.4 GATE1
192.100.9 Network SUBNET 1
GATE2 GATE3
192.9.100.5 192.100.9.6
CT_OC2 CT_SBC2 CT_OC3 CT_SBC3
192.100.9.132 192.100.9.131 192.100.9.212 192.100.9.213

NETWORKING
SUBNET 3 SUBNET 4
Note: For Class A or Class B subnetworks, consult the Network Administrator of the Site.
3-5 Netmasks Declaration
Note: Preferrably use the ”sys–reconfig” utility that allows you to change hostname, IP address
and netmask if you are not familiar with the vi editor.
Refer to Chapter 3.
Note: The example procedure below is for the advanced user. Write access may have to be
obtained before the /etc/inet/netmasks file can be edited.
– As root, edit the /etc/inet/netmasks file using the vi editor
vi /etc/netmasks [Return]
192.9.100.0 255.255.255.240 example for a class C network
4.0.0.0 255.128.0.0 example for a class A network
– Update and quit the vi editor by pushing the <ESC> key and typing
:wq! [Return]
298
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
CHAPTER 10 – PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
1 TO BE DONE ONCE A YEAR

1. Verify the integrity of the external cable connections to the peripheral devices, including the
network connections.
2. Clean the monitor and the keyboard.

3. Clean the inside of the computer box. Use an appropriate DATA VACUUM CLEANER such as
46–194427P392.
Open the CPU box by referring to chapter 4 Disassembly/Reassembly Procedures, Job Card
DR001. Pay special note to the Electrostatic Discharge precautions when working inside the CPU
box.
Carefully vacuum out the system, carefully attending to heavy accumulation spots such as the
Sparc Processor area.
Note: The use of compressed air is not recommended. Blowing dust out with a stream of air is not
recommended because of the ESD (Electro–Static Discharge) hazards to components, and
the dust hazard to the personnel in the area near the cleaning activity.
4. Save Site’s parameters on a new Configuration Cdrom. When AW has completed its startup, select
SaveConfiguration from the Admin menu :
MAINTENANCE
PREVENTIVE
This allows you to have your back–up Configuration Cdrom renewed at least once a year.
You can review the data on your laptop
5. Create a boot diskette

Refer to chapter1, Job Card IST009, section 5–3 for instructions.
6. Create a Kickstart diskette (prior to AW4.2_04.10_EXT release)
Refer to chapter4, Job Card TSG008, for instructions.
299
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
2 TO BE DONE DURING THE IMAGE SOURCE MAINTENANCE OR AS

OFTEN AS PRACTICAL
D To be done for the color monitors: Display the SMPTE pattern from the Browser, and check
monitor(s) alignment. See ”Console Monitor Adjustment Procedure” (Service tools installing
SMPTE pattern) using the SMPTE pattern in Chapter 3, section 2-6-1 for details on monitor
alignment. Adjust Brightness and Contrast levels so that the Grey scale is integrally displayed.
D Dicom Print tests : Verify that the SMPTE pattern displayed on the image monitor is compatible
with the image printed on the film. Address any discrepancies with the Customer before making
changes to the filming setups. See Chapter 7 for details on camera operations.
D Repair loose external cable connections to peripheral devices, including network connections.
D Login as root:
root [Return]
password : operator [return]
D Check for disk usage and available disk space for the FileSystem partitions.
– Check for disk usage: Refer to Chapter 4, TSG003 for details
df –k [Return]
Verify that / and /export/home filesystems ARE NOT, in any case, close to 100% maximum disk
usage, in order to allow System to write data in these partitions.
D Check for any unwanted ”core” file, which could take unnecessary disk space.
MAINTENANCE
PREVENTIVE
– Login as root
– Remove CORE files
find / –name core –type f –print [Return]

rm <dir_name>/core [Return] (if any)
DO NOT ATTEMPT TO REMOVE CORE DIRECTORY UNDER /export/home/sdc

D Save Site’s configuration on new Configuration Cdrom and write date on the label.
Use a new Cdrom each time (do not use rewitable Cdroms) so you make sure you are not deleting
any previous configuration that could be needed later.
Refer to Chapter 1, IST009 for details.
D Create a boot diskette
Refer to chapter1, Job Card IST009, section 5–3 for instructions.
D Create a Kickstart diskette
Refer to chapter4, Job Card TSG008, for instructions.
D Check FILMING directory

Refer to Chapter 7 (Filming):
– Refer to section 3-1 for Communication Checks.
– Refer to section 3-2 for Filming utility commands.
300
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
D Remove LOGFILES which became too big

ls [Return]
IF YOU SEE SOME FILES LIKE FOLLOWING:
arslog*
arslog.FriAug906:15:01.Z
arslog.FriAug910:15:03.Z
browserlog*
browserlog.FriAug906:15:01.Z
..............
{prompt} :
You can DELETE ALL *.Z FILES by the following command:
\rm *.Z [Return]
Note: The command ”\rm” avoid you to reply to confirmation questions.
Note: The system periodically cleanups this kind of files.

D Run the HP Diagnostics utility to monitor system performances from the dedicated E–diag tools
Cdrom (X4000) or HP Insight Diags Cdrom (XW8000)
Refer to Chapter 4, Job Card TSG005 of this manual
MAINTENANCE
PREVENTIVE
Run the diagnostics program during lunchtime, for example, and check the results. The tests must
pass without errors.
D Shutdown the Advantage Workstation. This will cleanup the ” /tmp ” directory automatically.
This can also be done by the Customer, as often as necessary, (before a scheduled Main power
shutdown, for example) by using the shutdown utility described in Chapter 3.
301
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
3 TO BE DONE EVERY 5 YEARS: SYSTEM BATTERY REPLACEMENT

The System board integrated battery has a limited life of about 5 years.
When the battery fails, the workstation repeatedly looses all its configuration settings.
Replace the battery with a CR2032 coin type manganese/lithium battery available from most
workstation stores or photo shops.
Procedure
To replace the battery, refer to XW8000 Service Manual , 2381099–100.
When this is done, you must run the Setup program to re–configure the workstation.
To replace the battery, refer to X4000 Service Manual , 2348152–100.
When this is done, you must run the Setup program to re–configure the workstation.
MAINTENANCE
PREVENTIVE
302
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE CHECKLIST
Preventive Maintenance Date : .....................................
F.E.Name : ........................................................
Hospital Name : ...................................................
Room Number or System ID : ........................................
External cables visual check : OK KO
State cable(s) to be replaced asap : ..........................

...............................................................
Workstation’s vents cleanup
Monitor, Keyboard and Mouse checks and cleanup
Save Site parameters on new Cdrom and label
Create a boot diskette
Create a Kickstart diskette
MAINTENANCE
PREVENTIVE
Check for ”Filesystem full”
Display SMPTE pattern and check image geometry. Do not adjust

color, brightness and contrasted unless required by customer.
Check MOD operation
Check CD–R operation
Check Filming operation
Run HP Diagnostics reliabilty program (optional)
Make sure that all pieces of documentation and backup software

are available on site.
Store the new Configuration cdrom in a safe place.
CPU box replaced ? YES NO

New licenseId number :.............................
303
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
F.E.Name : ........................................................
Hospital Name : ...................................................

...............................................................

MAINTENANCE
PREVENTIVE

Check MOD operation


304
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
F.E.Name : ........................................................
Hospital Name : ...................................................

...............................................................
MAINTENANCE
PREVENTIVE

Check MOD operation


305
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
F.E.Name : ........................................................
Hospital Name : ...................................................

...............................................................

MAINTENANCE
PREVENTIVE

Check MOD operation


306
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
F.E.Name : ........................................................
Hospital Name : ...................................................

...............................................................
MAINTENANCE
PREVENTIVE

Check MOD operation


307
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
F.E.Name : ........................................................
Hospital Name : ...................................................

...............................................................

MAINTENANCE
PREVENTIVE

Check MOD operation


308
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
APPENDIX A – GLOSSARY & LINUX COMMAND
1 GLOSSARY (This glossary contains a list of LINUX terms commonly used).
ABSOLUTE PATHNAME
The list of directories starting with the root directory, specified as /, down through the file system tree
structure to the file or directory in question, with each directory along the way separated from the
others with an additional / character. The other types of pathnames are: simple and relative
pathnames.
ACCOUNT
The means by which a user accesses the system and the system administrator assigns space for the
user’s files and directories. Usernames and passwords are specific to the accounts.
ALIAS
An alias is a user–specified abbreviation, or alternate string, for a standard command string.
APPEND
Attach to the end.
APPEND OUTPUT
Attach redirected output to the end of a file.
ARGUMENT
Any word (string of characters separated by spaces or tabs) occurring after the command in a
APPENDIX A
command line.
ARITHMETIC OPERATOR
Symbols used to indicate and execute addition (+), subtraction (– ), multiplication (*), and division.
BACKGROUND
The place where a command, or commands, are run while commands are still being typed in the
foreground, with background and foreground commands executing apparently simultaneously.
BUG
Any problem or error in the design or coding of a program.
309
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
CASE–SENSITIVE
Treating lower–case and upper–case characters as two kinds of characters with separate functions.
CHILD DIRECTORY
The directory directly below the current working directory in the file system tree structure.
COLON MODE
In vi, the mode where files are written or quit the program. Type ”:” when in command mode to access
colon mode. Besides command mode and colon mode, vi has insert mode.
COMMAND
A string of characters typed to the system, expecting it to respond by performing a certain function
unique to that command line. The command is sometimes called the “verb” of the command line
“sentence”.
COMMAND EDITING
Modifying a previous command line for reuse as a new command.
COMMAND LINE
A string of characters beginning with a command followed by arguments, which aren’t necessarily
required, including options, filenames, and other expressions.
COMMAND MODE
In vi, the mode where moving and deleting commands are typed, as well as changing text commands
that access insert mode. vi starts out in command mode; the other modes are insert mode and colon
APPENDIX A
mode.
COMMAND PROMPT
The string of characters that the system types indicating it is ready to accept and interpret the next
command line. Often, the command prompt includes the name of the system.
COMMAND REPETITION
Repeating a previous command line, or portion of one, for reuse as a new command line.
310
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
COMMAND SUBSTITUTION
Substituting a portion of a previous command line for reuse as a new command line.
CONCATENATE
Literally, to link together in series. For LINUX, to type a file on the screen.
CONSOLE
When you log in at the actual machine, rather than accessing the machine from another machine, you
log in on the console.
CONTROL CHARACTERS
Keys that require that you press and hold down the <CTRL> key while typing the associated character
to perform a certain function. For example, <CTRL> <U> deletes the current command line before
execution. Control keys extend the functionality of the keyboard.
COORDINATED UNIVERSAL TIME

See Greenwich Mean Time.
CURRENT DIRECTORY
See working directory.
CURSOR
The rectangular portion of the screen that moves as you type on the keyboard, indicating your current
position on the screen.
APPENDIX A
DEBUG
To attempt to fix problems with programs.
DIRECTORY
A “container” for files and other directories that resides within the LINUX file system in a tree structure.
Directories and their associated files can be created (make), moved, copied and removed. Really,
directories are a special type of file.
DOWNTIME
Time when the computer is not working because of maintenance or an unknown problem.
311
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
ECHO
The way that the system types back onto the screen the keys that you press.
EDITOR
See text editor.
EMPTY DIRECTORY
A directory that doesn’t contain any files or directories.
END–OF–FILE CHARACTER
<CTRL> <D> the character used to indicate when you have finished typing in a file.
ERROR MESSAGE
A character string that the system types to let you know that there is a problem with a command, or
perhaps with something else. Usually, the error message will give you some idea of how to correct the
problem.
ESCAPE KEYS
Keys that require that you press and release the <ESC> key before typing the associated character.
Escape keys are a way of extending the functionality of the keyboard.
EXPRESSION
An expression is a string of characters that signifies a certain meaning to the system.
APPENDIX A
FILE
A “container” for text. Files can be created, moved, copied, listed, and removed, or deleted. They are
a good way to save memos, phone lists, programs, and other portions of text. Use a text editor to
create and modify files.
FILENAMES
The name assigned to a file. Do not use special characters in the filename, because the system may
misinterpret the filename as something else.
FILENAME EXTENSION
A portion of a filename appended to the end, often demarcated with a period character.
312
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
FILE PROTECTION
The way that the system maintains some security over the contents of your files.
FILE SYSTEM
In the case of LINUX, a tree–structured network of files and directories, through which you can move
to access the files and directories contained in it.
FILE SYSTEM HIERARCHY

The structure of the file system, consisting of a tree of files and directories, with a root directory at the
“top” and directories acting as parent directories and child directories throughout.
FILLING
The process of placing a series of words on a line until the end of that line, and so on. The formatter
fills text unless you type a command, such as the line break command .br, indicating that it do
otherwise.
FOREGROUND
The place where commands are typed at the command prompt for the system to execute. Type an
ampersand character at the end of a command line to have the system execute that command line in
the background, while continuing to type commands at the command prompt for execution in the
foreground.
FORMATTER
See text formatter.
APPENDIX A
GREENWICH MEAN TIME
The time at the Greenwich meridian, from which all the time zones on the earth are established.
Sometimes known as Coordinated Universal Time (UTC).
HARDCOPY
A copy of a text file that is on a piece of paper, not stored somewhere on the computer.
HIDDEN FILES
Files that don’t show up in a simple listing, because they have a period character as the first character
in their filename.
313
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
HIERARCHY
See file system hierarchy.
HISTORY MECHANISM
The way that the system keeps track of commands that have been typed previously so that they can
be reused with command repetition and command editing.
HOME DIRECTORY
The directory you are in when you first log in to the system, which is also your personal root directory
to all the files and directories you create in your own area.
HOSTNAME
The name of a machine, or host.
INDENT
To put spaces or tabs before a section of text, particularly at the beginning of a paragraph.
INSERT MODE
For vi, insert mode is the mode in which text is inserted or changed; you exit by typing <ESC>. The
other vi modes are: command mode and colon mode.
INTERACTIVE PROGRAM
A program that requires commands to be typed after it has been started, rather than executing its
function in full after a single command line is entered.
APPENDIX A
INTERRUPT
To stop the execution of a command or program.
JOB CONTROL
The way that the system keeps track of all the commands run in the foreground and background, as
well as all the commands that other users may run on the system.
KEYBOARD
A part of the workstation, similar to a typewriter, that permits characters to be input and displayed on
the screen.
314
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
LEFT–JUSTIFY
To put characters up against the left margin, or side of the page.
LINE BREAK
A way to stop the flow of filling, so that a line of text ends at a specific point, with any further words
appearing on the next line.
LINE SPACE
A way to indicate a blank vertical spacing equivalent to one line, usually mentioned when formatting.
LOGIN
Gaining access to the system, usually by typing a username and password, so that a work session on
the computer can be begun.
LOGIN PROMPT
The string of characters that the system types to let you know that it is ready to interpret your
username when you decide to type it.
LOGOUT
Ending access to the system, usually when the work session is ended, prevents an unauthorized user
from having access to your account, perhaps causing damage to one of your files, or accessing
sensitive information.
MARKER
In this case, the – character is marker for options, so that when you type a command with an option,
the system can figure out that you have typed an option, not another kind of command argument.
APPENDIX A
MESSAGE OF THE DAY
A portion of text that the system may type at log in. The system administrator sometimes creates this
message to let users know about downtime or other important system events.
MODE
See command mode, colon mode, or insert mode.
MOUSE
A small, rectangular part of the workstation, with three buttons and a wire running out of it, that
permits better control of the window system, when it is running.
315
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
NATURAL LANGUAGE
The languages that people, as opposed to machines, speak, read, or write in societies and cultures of
all eras.
OPERATING SYSTEM
A collection of programs that monitors the use of the machine and supervises the other programs
executed by it. Currently, Redhat 7.3 is used for AW on Linux.
OPERATOR
See arithmetic operator.
OPTION
A portion of the command line sometimes compared with an adverb because it modifies the effect of
the command you type.
OUTPUT REDIRECTION
See redirecting output.
PACIFIC STANDARD TIME

The standard time on the West coast of the United States, established primarily by the distance from
Greenwich, England.
PARENT DIRECTORY
The directory above “this” directory in the file system tree structure.
APPENDIX A
PASSWORD
A character string that you type, usually just after your filename, to get access to the system. Keep
your password secret, and change it when you think someone discovers what it is.
PATHNAME
An identifier for the position of a file or directory within the tree structure of the file system. The three
types of pathnames are: simple, absolute, and relative.
316
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
PRINTER
A physical device that takes electrical signals, interprets them, and types them out onto paper.
PRINTOUT
A piece of paper, produced by a printer, that has the image of the characters from a file on it.
PROGRAM
A series of instructions that the system executes when you type the program name and commands
associated with the program. A programmer writes the set of instructions and figures out how to get
the system to use them properly.
READ AHEAD
See type ahead.
REDIRECTING OUTPUT
Causing what the system types as the result of a command to go into a file, rather than onto the
screen. Basic output redirection requires use of the > or >> symbols.
RELATIVE PATHNAME
A series of directory names separated by /’s that locates a file or directory with respect to the current,
or working directory. The other types of pathnames are: simple and absolute pathnames.
ROOT DIRECTORY
The “top” directory in the tree structure of the LINUX file system.
APPENDIX A
RUB OUT
To erase, or delete, from the screen.
SAVE A FILE
See write a file.
SCREEN
See terminal screen.
317
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
SEARCH A FILE
To look through the contents of a file, perhaps with grep, to find a certain character string.
SIMPLE PATHNAME
A file or directory name, without mention of any associated directories, that one uses to access the file
or directory.
SPECIAL CHARACTERS
One of a set of characters that have a meaning to the system, other than their meaning as a simple
character. For instance, the exclamation mark ! has a special meaning for the history mechanism, and
you shouldn’t use it in a filename.
STATUS LINE
For vi, the line the system types at the bottom of the interactive screen to provide information about
the number of characters or lines in a file, or whether an instruction to write the file was successful.
STRING
A series of characters.
SUB–DIRECTORY
The child directory of a parent directory, or any directory below that child directory.
SUSPEND
To halt, perhaps temporarily, the execution of a program.
APPENDIX A
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR
A person who manages the system, providing accounts, and hopefully solving any problems you have
with the computer.
TABLET
See mouse tablet
TERMINAL SCREEN
A flat, rectangular part of the workstation that you look at to see what you type to the system and what
it types back.
318
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
TEXT
Combinations of characters in strings, sometimes forming a comprehensible language of command
lines.
TEXT EDITOR
A program with which you can create files and modify them. For LINUX, the primary text editor is vi.
TREE STRUCTURE
The way that many people describe the LINUX file system hierarchy, drawing an analogy between the
structure of a tree and the structure of the file system. As with a tree, the file system originates with a
root, a root directory, which “grows” child directories on its branches.
TYPE AHEAD
The way that the system lets you type new commands while it is still interpreting and executing the
current command.
UNIVERSAL TIME
See Greenwich Mean Time.
LINUX OPERATING SYSTEM

The operating system that runs on LINUX workstations. See operating system for more information.
USERNAME
The character string with which you identify yourself to the system, usually assigned by your system
administrator.
APPENDIX A
WILD CARD CHARACTERS
Characters that have a special meaning to the system, because they specify all filename character
strings that have a certain attribute. For example, the wild card character asterisk, *, indicates a
filename string of arbitrary length.
WINDOW
A portion of the screen in which you can type commands or execute programs while running the
window system.
319
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
WINDOW SYSTEM
A set of programs that allows you to divide up the screen into portions where you can type various
commands and run many programs at the same time.
WORD
A character string, separated from other character strings by spaces or tab characters.
WORKING DIRECTORY
The current directory in which, among other activities, you can type commands and list files. When
you first log in, your working directory is your home directory.
WORK SESSION
The time that you access the computer to work or play, between when you log in and when you log
out.
WORKSTATION
A system made up of a keyboard, a terminal screen, a mouse, and a mouse pad, which you can use
for profitable work or healthy recreation.
WRITE A FILE
For “vi”, to save the changes you have made to a file, so that when you next access the file ,
the changes will still be there.
2 LINUX COMMAND SUMMARY

APPENDIX A
Note: The following is a list of the commands available with this version of LINUX. The most basic
commands and those you will need to know to perform service work have been explained in
greater detail within this manual.
CAUTION
Many of these commands can seriously alter the contents of files. Do not attempt to
use these commands unless you are sure of the results.
320
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
Command Description
accton system accounting

adb general–purpose debugger
arp address resolution protocol
at execute a command or script at a specified time
atq display the queue of jobs to be run at specified times
atrm remove jobs spooled by at or batch
awk pattern scanning and processing language
basename display portions of pathnames and filenames
bc arbitrary–precision arithmetic language
biod starts servers asynchronous block I/O daemons
boot system startup procedures
bootsd boot SCSI disk
bootxy boot Xylogics 440/450 disk
cat concatenate and display
chgrp change the group ownership of a file
chmod change the permissions mode of a file
chown change ownership of a file
chroot change root directory
cmp perform a byte–by–byte comparison of two files
colrm remove characters from specified columns within each line
comm display lines in common between two sorted lists
cp copy files
crontab install, edit, remove or list a user’s crontab file
csh a shell with a C–like syntax
cut remove selected fields from each line of a file
date display or set the date
dc desk calculator
dd convert and copy files with various data formats
df reports free disk space on file systems
diff display line–by–line differences between pairs of text files
dkinfo disk geometry information
dmesg collect system diagnostic messages to form error log
APPENDIX A
domainname set/display domain name
du display the number of disk blocks used per directory or file
dump copy directories onto a tape for offline storage
echo echo arguments to the standard output
ed basic line editor
egrep search a file for a string or regular expression
etherfind find packets on the ethernet
ex line editor
expr evaluate arguments as an expression
321
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
Command Description
false provide true values

fastboot reboot system
file determine the type of a file by examining its contents
find find files by name, or by other characteristics
ftp file transfer program
fsck check and repair filesystem
fsirand install random inode generation numbers
getopt parse command options in shell scripts
getty set terminal mode
gettytab terminal configuration database
grep pattern searches
groups displays a user’s group membership
hostid print the numeric identifier of the current host
hostname set or print the name of current host system
id print the user name and ID, and group name and ID
ifconfig configure network interface parameters
ifdown bring network card down, without rebooting the system
ifup bring network card up, without rebooting the system
inetd internet server daemon
init process control initialization
install install files
installboot install bootblocks in a disk partition
ipcrm remove message queue, semaphore, shared memory ID
ipcs report interprocess communication facilities status
kill send signal to process, or terminate a process
lastlog login records
ln make hard or symbolic links to files
login log in to the system
logout terminate a login shell
lpr send job to printer
ls list the contents of a directory
magic file command’s magic numbers table
APPENDIX A
mach display the processor type of the current host

make maintain, update, and regenerate related programs & files
makedbm make a yellow pages dbm file
mkdir make a directory
mkfs make file system
mknod creates a new file name by the path name pointed to by path
more browse or page through a text file
mount mount file systems
mt magnetic tape control
mv move or rename files
ncheck convert i numbers to filename
nd network disk control
netstat display network status
322
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
Command Description
networks network name database overview

nfsd starts the daemons that handle client filesystem request-
nice change priority
passwd change password file information
ping checks to see if another machine is up and running
portmap DARPA port to rpc program number mapper
print env display environment variables currently set
protocols protocol name database
ps display the status of current processes
pstat print system facts
pwd display the pathname of the current working directory
quota display a user’s disk quota and usage
rc start up commands
rcp remote file copy
rdate set system date from a remote host
reboot restart system
restore file system restore
rlogin remote login
rm remove (unlink) files or directories
rmt remote magnetic tape protocol server
route manipulate routing table
rpc library routines for remote procedure calls
rcpinfo report rpc information
rsh remote shell
rwall write to all users over a network
sa reports on, cleans up, and maintains accounting files
savecore save OS core dump
sed stream editor
sh standard system shell
showmount show all remote mounts
shutdown close down the system
size display the size of an object file
APPENDIX A
sleep suspend execution for a specified interval
sort sort and collate lines
spray sends a one–way stream of packets to host
string a series of characters
strip remove symbols and relocation bits from an object file
stty set or alter the options for a terminal
su super–user, temporarily switch to a new user ID
sync update the super block; force changed blocks to the disk
323
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
Command Description
tail display the last part of a file

tar create tape archives, and add or extract files
tee replicate the standard output
telnet interface to remote system using TELNET protocol
termcap terminal capability database
test return true or false according to a conditional expression
tftp trivial file transfer program
time time a command
touch update the access and modification times of a file
tr translate characters
true provide truth values
tset establish or restore terminal characteristics
tty display the name of the terminal
umount dismounts file systems
uniq remove or report adjacent duplicate lines
update periodically update the super block
uptime show how long the system has been up
vi visual display editor based on ex
w who is logged in, and what they are doing
wc display a count of lines, words and characters
which locate a command; display its pathname or alias
who who is logged in on the system
whoami display the current effective username
wtmp login records
xedit Graphically based editor, that can be used in place of VI,
in most cases
ypbind binds client processes to a yp server
ypcat print values in a YP database
ypinit build and install yellow pages database
ypmatch print the value of one or more keys from a YP map
APPENDIX A
324
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
REVISION HISTORY
REV DATE REASON FOR CHANGE PAGES
0 August 2003 Initial Release

0 October 2003 Update for production release
2 March, 2004 Update for post–production AW4.2_04.10 release 326
NUMBER SIZE REVISION

2381096–100TPH A4 2
325
REV 2 sm 2381096–100
Blank page.
326

Technical Publications: Revision 2

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Technical Publications: Revision 2

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Technical Publications: Revision 2

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Technical

Advantage Workstation 4.2

CopyrightE 2003–2004 by General Electric Co.

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

3 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

2-1-24 Changing the Internet Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

1-6 Running MOD Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258

DO NOT ATTEMPT TO SERVICE THE EQUIPMENT UNLESS

NE PAS TENTER D’INTERVENIR SUR LES ÉQUIPEMENTS

NO SE DEBERÁ DAR SERVICIO TÉCNICO AL EQUIPO,

ERSUCHEN SIE NICHT DIESE ANLAGE ZU WARTEN,

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

THIS MANUAL TO BE USED ONLY FOR AW4.2 RUNNING ON THE

Chapter 3: Common Procedures

Chapter 6: Renewal Parts

Chapter 10: Preventive Maintenance

Appendix A: Glossary and LINUX commands

CONVENTIONS FOR THIS MANUAL

Responses or commands to be typed in by the FE appear in bold characters:

Keyboard hardkeys are shown in bold characters and between brackets :

Pull down menu selections, to be selected by the FE appear in bold characters

AW Administration Install package

Restart AW Service Tools

MACHINE TYPE: ............................................

SMARTSCORE LICENSE KEY: ............................................

BMD LICENSE KEY: ............................................

Illustration 2 – Advantage Workstation HP X4000 Basic Overview

ADVANTAGE WORKSTATION HAS UNSHIELDED MONITORS. PLACING THE

2-1 Required Hardware Environment

CONNECTION TO NEC MONITORS: EXCLUSIVELY USE THE VGA/VGA CABLE

D Greyscale Printer connected to network (DIA, see Chapter 8).

INPUT switch SONY Color monitor

EXIT < > + – SELECT 1–2 RESET/OSM ON/OFF

INPUT selector NEC Flat Panel

Illustration 5 – HPXW8000 with 1K NEC 1880SX LCD Landscape Monitor(s) Configuration

ÀÀÀÀÀ LEFT MONITOR

INPUT2 / VGA ÀÀÀÀÀ

Illustration 6 – HPX4000 with 1K NEC 1880SX LCD Landscape Monitor(s) Configuration

CAUTION : DO NOT USE THE DVI / HD15

Illustration 7 – HPXW8000 with 1K SONY CRT Landscape Monitor(s) Configuration

ÀÀÀÀÀ INPUT 1 INPUT 2

DOUBLE VGA HD15

Illustration 8 – HPX4000 with 1K SONY CRT Landscape Monitor(s) Configuration

X4000 REAR VIEW

HD15 / HD15 HD15 / HD15

DVI / VGA HD15

2-1-4 Ethernet connection

RJ 45 CABLES OF CATEGORY > 5 MUST BE USED FOR 1GBPS CONNECTION.

Illustration 9 – HPx4000 and HPXW8000 connection to the network

CAUTION : XW8000 STATION:

XW8000 REAR VIEW X4000 REAR VIEW

ÀÀÀÀÀ face(s) information

USE THE ADDI-

2-2 Required Software Environment

2-3 Further Assumptions

2-4 Installation / re–installation flowcharts

NEW AW SYSTEM Yes

NEW MRV2 SYSTEM Yes

LOAD FROM WARM ? Yes